Big green egg cypress table plans
INLAWS FROM HELL 17
2024.06.07 20:52 Virtual-Ad5362 INLAWS FROM HELL 17
Actully post 18 but it won't let me fix the title.
Moving part 1
Hello internet. I meant to post this sooner. Honestly, these can be hard to write because I'm trying to say what happened without making too long from all the details. And it gets a bit emotional for me. Just a little reminder- My spelling isn't the best, so definitely let me know if something turned out weird.
Just a warning- this is going to be another long one.
So a few weeks ago, we moved military bases. DH (dear husband) is switching his job and needs 9 months of schooling/training at this new base. During the move, there ended up being about a 15-day period where we wouldn't have a home. Because of that, we decided to stay with my parents for that duration. This meant 15 days of being in the same town as my inlaws.
SIDE NOTE- THIS COMES UP LATER
Now, a month before this, JNSIL (Just No Sister Inlaw) TOLD us that she, JNFIL (Just No FatherInlaw) , and Grandma were going to visit us a week after we moved. Not just a little day trip but a whole 3 days. This wasn't even to help us unpack, but to celebrate JNSIL'S birthday. There were so many reasons this wouldn't work out. We would be unpacking settling in while DH would be starting classes. When we obviously told her that wouldn't work out. JNSIL, being JNSIL, started saying stuff like " What do you want us to do, just sit in our houses all alone?" As if there wasn't any other way for her to celebrate her birthday. She made it clear she was going to our area for her birthday whether or not we saw her. Fine with us- we just didn't want to be harassed the whole time about how terrible we are for not seeing them. In the end, we agreed to one dinner because DH really wanted to support JNFIL since his wedding anniversary with JNMIL was coming up (JNMIL just passed 3 months before).
Anyways, I was actually pretty stressed about us going to our hometown. When talking to my psychiatrist (who I see for ADHD medication), she actually prescribed me a sedative for when I'm around them.
DH assured me that this time would be different. He said we'd spend more time with my family and wouldn't be at the beck and call of his. We would still see his, but it would not be the sole focus. We even came up with a safe word for if the visits with his family became too much for me. This was actually recommended by my therapist. I actually started seeing him for some trauma I experienced while working at a school, and during our sessions, my inlaws came up and became a frequent topic.
Anyways, DH was true to his word, and we actually, for the most part, had a great time. This was impart because we spent limited time with his family. But the whole 4 interactions we did lead to some of the most drama filled experiences of my life.
To help things make sense, I'm just going to break this down by event.
1) Lunch.
So, halfway through our stay, DH and I went to have lunch with JNFIL and Grandma. It was nothing special, just a quiet lunch at a local fast food restaurant. It wasn't a planned lunch either, just a last-minute thing. Outside a few negative remarks about the LGBTQ+ community, it wasn't too bad. DH did ask about JNSIL but was told she would be sleeping, and nobody wanted to wake her (she works the night shift). Turns out not inviting her was a big mistake. And if you think she would just communicate her hurt feelings like a normal adult, then you haven't been paying attention.
2) Breakfast Hell/ Chicken Coop
That Saturday, JNSIL calls DH at 7 in the morning to invite us to breakfast in an hour. DH and I talked about this previously. I think calling this early is disrespectful. It's not just DH anymore. There's also me to consider. And I have trouble falling and staying asleep. Not to mention that call woke up our 2 dogs and cat who now want fed and to go to bathroom. Also, it'd be a lot easier on me if they planned these things out at least a day before. I'd know that I needed to go to bed earlier, and over all, it'd give me time to prepare for an early breakfast. I don't think that's too much to ask.
DH told JNSIL no, we would not be going to breakfast. He told her it was because it was too short notice and we had a late night. (We were up till 3 am watching all of the Lord Of the Rings and The Hobbit movies since DH hasn't seen them before) When she heard that we've Bern up late, she started acting like the mother of a middle schooler. She was demanding to know what we were doing up that late.( It took everything thing in me not to yell that we were having crazy unprecedented sex- just to piss her off more) DH did agree to a late breakfast at 10.
Unfortunately, I didn't get to go back to sleep. The animals were up, and for some reason, JNFIL was calling. I was just so tired I couldn't even remember what was going on. Plus, this was back in March. What I do remember was DH promising to ask his family not to call before 8:30am and not after 9pm. I would have preferred 9am-8pm out side of life or death emergencies but I was too tired to fight on this.
So, we're at the restaurant, and it was full of people. JNSIL, JNFIL, and Grandma were there. After a bit of small talk DH brought up how we would appreciate not getting calls before 8:30am or after 9pm. He absolutely brought up what we talked about earlier, like how its not just him anymore, and how it also wajes up thd animals. JNSIL made the excuse that they came up with the plan to have an early breakfast last night so that they could build a chicken coop for JNFIL before it got too hot.
Now I don't know if it was because I was tired or just done with all their bullshit, but for once I actually jumpped in. I asked if they new since last night then why didn't they call or shoot us a text then? JNSIL started making excuses and how DH never calls her and how DH would know these things if he called.
(Side note. 1) DH doesn't want to call her. He wants to interact with her as little as possible. 2) both me and DH have severe ADHD. So if we don't physically see you, we will completely forget you exist. Mt family is aware of and don't make a big deal or get offended by it. My little sister will actually text me constantly so that were always uptodate with eachother.)
Being done with all of it I just look JNSIL in the eyes and tell her that the phone works both ways. I guess that just set her off.
She slammed her fist on the table in this crowded restaurant. I don't know what she was trying to do maybe to try and scare me. The whole place got quite as she started screaming at me how DH never calls and how we didn't invite her to lunch with JNFIL and Grandma the other day.
Now I don't know what got into me but in a calm steady voice, I once again looked her dead in the eyes and said "The phone still works both ways." She started screaming again even louder before getting up and walking out side. I don't have a clue how the hell staff didn't kick us out and straight up ban us from the establishment.
Honestly, I desperately wanted to leave myself but didn't want to pass or walk by JNSIL. Nobody at the table exknowledged what the fuck just happened. DH went on to ask JNFIL about the chicken coop. When JNFIL asked about if we'd be helping putting it together, DH said he would but I couldn’t because I had plans to go shopping with my mom. I hadn't really got yo spend time with my mom yet since shes been working all week. JNFIL just goes "Oh sure, I can't blame her for not wanting to be around us" in reference to JNSIL'S outburst.
JNSIL came back inside and ate her strawberry pancakes. Acting as if nothing happened. And that's how I got guiltied into making a chicken coop. Which instead of helping like she claimed she would, JNSIL spent the whole afternoon in the AC getting a new tattoo.
This is getting longer than I expected and there is still so much that happened. I think I need to break this up into 2nd post.
submitted by Virtual-Ad5362 to u/Virtual-Ad5362 [link] [comments]
Moving part 1
Hello internet. I meant to post this sooner. Honestly, these can be hard to write because I'm trying to say what happened without making too long from all the details. And it gets a bit emotional for me. Just a little reminder- My spelling isn't the best, so definitely let me know if something turned out weird.
Just a warning- this is going to be another long one.
So a few weeks ago, we moved military bases. DH (dear husband) is switching his job and needs 9 months of schooling/training at this new base. During the move, there ended up being about a 15-day period where we wouldn't have a home. Because of that, we decided to stay with my parents for that duration. This meant 15 days of being in the same town as my inlaws.
SIDE NOTE- THIS COMES UP LATER
Now, a month before this, JNSIL (Just No Sister Inlaw) TOLD us that she, JNFIL (Just No FatherInlaw) , and Grandma were going to visit us a week after we moved. Not just a little day trip but a whole 3 days. This wasn't even to help us unpack, but to celebrate JNSIL'S birthday. There were so many reasons this wouldn't work out. We would be unpacking settling in while DH would be starting classes. When we obviously told her that wouldn't work out. JNSIL, being JNSIL, started saying stuff like " What do you want us to do, just sit in our houses all alone?" As if there wasn't any other way for her to celebrate her birthday. She made it clear she was going to our area for her birthday whether or not we saw her. Fine with us- we just didn't want to be harassed the whole time about how terrible we are for not seeing them. In the end, we agreed to one dinner because DH really wanted to support JNFIL since his wedding anniversary with JNMIL was coming up (JNMIL just passed 3 months before).
Anyways, I was actually pretty stressed about us going to our hometown. When talking to my psychiatrist (who I see for ADHD medication), she actually prescribed me a sedative for when I'm around them.
DH assured me that this time would be different. He said we'd spend more time with my family and wouldn't be at the beck and call of his. We would still see his, but it would not be the sole focus. We even came up with a safe word for if the visits with his family became too much for me. This was actually recommended by my therapist. I actually started seeing him for some trauma I experienced while working at a school, and during our sessions, my inlaws came up and became a frequent topic.
Anyways, DH was true to his word, and we actually, for the most part, had a great time. This was impart because we spent limited time with his family. But the whole 4 interactions we did lead to some of the most drama filled experiences of my life.
To help things make sense, I'm just going to break this down by event.
1) Lunch.
So, halfway through our stay, DH and I went to have lunch with JNFIL and Grandma. It was nothing special, just a quiet lunch at a local fast food restaurant. It wasn't a planned lunch either, just a last-minute thing. Outside a few negative remarks about the LGBTQ+ community, it wasn't too bad. DH did ask about JNSIL but was told she would be sleeping, and nobody wanted to wake her (she works the night shift). Turns out not inviting her was a big mistake. And if you think she would just communicate her hurt feelings like a normal adult, then you haven't been paying attention.
2) Breakfast Hell/ Chicken Coop
That Saturday, JNSIL calls DH at 7 in the morning to invite us to breakfast in an hour. DH and I talked about this previously. I think calling this early is disrespectful. It's not just DH anymore. There's also me to consider. And I have trouble falling and staying asleep. Not to mention that call woke up our 2 dogs and cat who now want fed and to go to bathroom. Also, it'd be a lot easier on me if they planned these things out at least a day before. I'd know that I needed to go to bed earlier, and over all, it'd give me time to prepare for an early breakfast. I don't think that's too much to ask.
DH told JNSIL no, we would not be going to breakfast. He told her it was because it was too short notice and we had a late night. (We were up till 3 am watching all of the Lord Of the Rings and The Hobbit movies since DH hasn't seen them before) When she heard that we've Bern up late, she started acting like the mother of a middle schooler. She was demanding to know what we were doing up that late.( It took everything thing in me not to yell that we were having crazy unprecedented sex- just to piss her off more) DH did agree to a late breakfast at 10.
Unfortunately, I didn't get to go back to sleep. The animals were up, and for some reason, JNFIL was calling. I was just so tired I couldn't even remember what was going on. Plus, this was back in March. What I do remember was DH promising to ask his family not to call before 8:30am and not after 9pm. I would have preferred 9am-8pm out side of life or death emergencies but I was too tired to fight on this.
So, we're at the restaurant, and it was full of people. JNSIL, JNFIL, and Grandma were there. After a bit of small talk DH brought up how we would appreciate not getting calls before 8:30am or after 9pm. He absolutely brought up what we talked about earlier, like how its not just him anymore, and how it also wajes up thd animals. JNSIL made the excuse that they came up with the plan to have an early breakfast last night so that they could build a chicken coop for JNFIL before it got too hot.
Now I don't know if it was because I was tired or just done with all their bullshit, but for once I actually jumpped in. I asked if they new since last night then why didn't they call or shoot us a text then? JNSIL started making excuses and how DH never calls her and how DH would know these things if he called.
(Side note. 1) DH doesn't want to call her. He wants to interact with her as little as possible. 2) both me and DH have severe ADHD. So if we don't physically see you, we will completely forget you exist. Mt family is aware of and don't make a big deal or get offended by it. My little sister will actually text me constantly so that were always uptodate with eachother.)
Being done with all of it I just look JNSIL in the eyes and tell her that the phone works both ways. I guess that just set her off.
She slammed her fist on the table in this crowded restaurant. I don't know what she was trying to do maybe to try and scare me. The whole place got quite as she started screaming at me how DH never calls and how we didn't invite her to lunch with JNFIL and Grandma the other day.
Now I don't know what got into me but in a calm steady voice, I once again looked her dead in the eyes and said "The phone still works both ways." She started screaming again even louder before getting up and walking out side. I don't have a clue how the hell staff didn't kick us out and straight up ban us from the establishment.
Honestly, I desperately wanted to leave myself but didn't want to pass or walk by JNSIL. Nobody at the table exknowledged what the fuck just happened. DH went on to ask JNFIL about the chicken coop. When JNFIL asked about if we'd be helping putting it together, DH said he would but I couldn’t because I had plans to go shopping with my mom. I hadn't really got yo spend time with my mom yet since shes been working all week. JNFIL just goes "Oh sure, I can't blame her for not wanting to be around us" in reference to JNSIL'S outburst.
JNSIL came back inside and ate her strawberry pancakes. Acting as if nothing happened. And that's how I got guiltied into making a chicken coop. Which instead of helping like she claimed she would, JNSIL spent the whole afternoon in the AC getting a new tattoo.
This is getting longer than I expected and there is still so much that happened. I think I need to break this up into 2nd post.
2024.06.07 20:47 GoAheadMMDay Warnings of 911 in Back To The Future
 | Marty brings his hands to his mouth and shouts out loud, “I have to tell you about the future!” submitted by GoAheadMMDay to conspiracy_posts [link] [comments] The creators of Back To The Future said the same thing. \"I have to tell you about the future!\" It was known The destruction of New York's Twin Towers on September 11, 2001 was not a surprise attack. The plan for 911 was known two decades before, as far back as the early 1980's. Details of 911 appear in the blockbuster trilogy “Back To The Future”, the first of which was released in 1985. I first learned that Back To The Future contained warnings of 911 from this video: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uPJQ-1Y8jfY. In this post, I expand on the examples presented in that video, providing additional supporting arguments of my own. I include a few more 911 warnings I spotted myself. So come along and enjoy this ride, as we rupture the space-time continuum and create a paradox of our own. Terrorist attack at Twin Pines Mall Pics 1 & 2 In the first Back To The Future movie, a terrorist attack (pic 1) takes place at the Twin Pines Mall (pic 2). This is a warning of a future terrorist attack on the Twin Towers on 911. “Pines” represent the towers. “Twin” is… well… just plain obvious. A terrorist attack at Twin Pines Mall - filmed 1985. A terrorist attack at Twin Towers - happened 2001. The numbers Pics 3 & 4 When Marty first arrives at the mall, the clock reads 1:16, which is 911 upside down (pic 3). When Doc shows Marty two synchronized watches, the time is 1:19, which is 911 backwards (pic 4). 911 once; 911 twice. If you don’t like having to turn the mall clock upside down or flip the watches backwards, don’t worry. There is an even clearer reference to the numbers 911 later on - in their proper order. Lone Pine Mall Pics 5 & 6 When Marty returns to the mall at the end of the first movie, Twin Pines Mall (pic 5) becomes Lone Pine Mall (pic 6). You probably already see how this foretells 911. Let’s break it down. Pics 7 & 8 The site where the mall stands used to be owned by Old Man Peabody, who had two cherished pine trees (pic 7). When the mall was built, both pine trees were still on the property, and so the mall was named Twin Pines Mall. When Marty travels back in time, he travels from the mall directly to Peabody’s land. Same spot, just different time period. While trying to escape, Marty knocks down one of Peabody’s two pine trees (pic 8). Thus, two pines become a lone pine after they were crashed into. Pics 9 & 10 This foreshadows the aftermath of 911, when the Twin Towers (pic 9) were replaced by a lone tower (pic 10) after they were crashed into. What is more, the replacement tower is named One World Trade Center. “Lone” vs “One” – even the name is a near-perfect match. Even the name! Looks like an airplane Pics 11 & 12 When Peabody and his family first see the car (pic 11), Peabody describes it as “an airplane without wings”. Later, the car was modified to fly (pic 12). Add these details together and what do we have? A car described as a plane, which later flies, that crashes into a tree symbolizing one of New York’s Twin Towers – precisely what happened years later on 911 (pics 13-14). Pics 13 & 14 Towers on fire After the Twin Towers were struck on 911, they began burning. The makers of Back To The Future anticipated this and depicted it. Pics 15 & 16 Near the end of the first movie, as the DeLorean takes Marty back to his time, the car’s tires leave two twin tracks on the road (pic 15). The twin tracks are on fire, an unmistakable depiction of the Twin Towers burning. Doc then runs between the burning twin tracks, shrieking loudly (pic 16). As he runs from the top of the tracks to the bottom, he looks and sounds like people falling off a building - a haunting foreshadowing of 911. Pic 17 Yet the burning twin tracks represent more than just the Twin Towers on fire. As the camera pulls out, a store sign in the shape of the number 9 comes into view on the left (pic 17). The sign and burning twin tracks together form an undeniable 911. Notice that the placement of this store sign is perfect for indicating 911. It is not at the end of the street at the top of the twin tracks, nor is it to the right, but is perfectly placed to the left of the burning 11. Notice too that the sign could have been a 3, or a 7, or a J, or an S, and would still have served its function of pointing to the store. But it was none of those shapes. It was a 9. And the camera pulls out enough to capture the whole 9 perfectly. Where the earlier examples of the mall sign and watches might be too much of a stretch to suggest 911, this 911 at the plaza leaves no room for denial. The falling towers On 911, after the Twin Towers had burned for a time, they ultimately fell. So too in the Back To The Future movies. The first movie ended with the Twin Towers on fire. In the second movie, we see the Twin Towers falling. Pics 18 & 19 Jennifer is on the sofa in her future home (pic 18). She looks up in astonishment. Through her look, the movie is telling us… “Pay attention to this. This is shocking.” What is Jennifer looking at that shocks her so? She is looking at the TV. She then exclaims, “I’m in the future!” (Pic 19). With this, they have taken us to the future - to 911. And this is what we see… Pics 20 - 23 A moment later in this scene, we see two pine trees projected on the TV screen (pic 20). When Lorraine clicks the remote, the pine trees are replaced by New York’s Twin Towers (pic 21). This confirms our understanding that the pine trees really do represent New York’s Twin Towers. The TV then glitches and scrolls upward (pic 22). As the frames scroll up, the towers appear to be rising. But notice that one of the characters is upside down. Since he is the closest character to the audience, the movie is telling us to look at the TV from his perspective. And what does he see? As the TV frames scroll up, he sees the towers falling down (pic 23). He sees New York’s Twin Towers falling down. Pic 24 All three characters are looking at the Twin Towers on TV (pic 24), just like millions of people were viewing the actual towers on their TV’s on 911. Lorraine points directly at the towers. But notice the torch of the Statue of Liberty at the bottom of the shot. Why is the torch of the Statue of Liberty in this shot? To create the impression of being in New York City; that the characters in this scene are people in New York looking at and pointing to the Twin Towers on 911. Talk about pointing something out! This is as pointed as it can get. 911 was staged Yet the creators of Back To The Future might be telling us one thing more about this future terrorist attack. They might be telling us it is not a real terrorist attack at all. It might be a staged, agency operation. Pics 25 - 27 In all three movies, as the DeLorean passes through the time barrier, it is racing toward things related to cinema... ie: the stage. The first time the car breaks the time barrier, it is racing toward a film booth (pic 25). The second time, it is racing toward a movie theater (pic 26). In the third movie, the DeLorean breaks the time barrier while racing toward a drive-in movie screen (pic 27). Though the Twin Towers really were tragically brought down, the creators of Back To The Future may have been telling us that the circumstances behind the disaster were - like in cinema - not what they appear to be. (For more on the possibility that 911 was a staged pretext for war, see my other post: https://www.reddit.com/conspiracy/comments/1aghwh3/we\_are\_being\_led\_into\_world\_war\_3/). Whether 911 was staged or not, the big question here is… Where did the creators of Back To The Future get this information? How did they know about 911 twenty years in advance? Fortunately for us, they put that in the movie too. Message received Pics 28 & 29 Marty received knowledge of a specific event (pic 28). What event? A tower being struck (pic 29). The message came with an urgent plea… save the tower. In the real world, a group of people learned that New York’s Twin Towers would be struck. They wanted to save the towers. Message delivered Pics 30 - 33 Marty asked Doc for his help getting back home, and delivered the message of a tower being struck (pic 30). In the real world, the people who learned about 911 delivered their message of the Twin Towers being struck to Robert Zemeckis and Bob Gale (pic 31), asking for their help in getting the warning out. Rob and Bob suggested making a movie about it (pic 32), to get their message out through cinema – which was worked into the movies by Doc instructing Marty to go through the movie screen (pic 33). The message The warning of 911 is woven throughout the movies, along with an urgent plea to avoid the disaster. Pic 34 Marty writes in a letter to Doc: “Please take whatever precautions are necessary to prevent this terrible disaster.” (Pic 34) Notice the letter was made fully visible in the movie. This is the message the creators of Back To The Future wanted to announce. Notice too they used the word “disaster”. While the shooting of a man (Doc) is indeed terrible, referring to it as a disaster is a little on the strong side. In using the word “disaster”, the creators were really referring to 911, which could truly be called a disaster. The even spelled the word "Disaster" with a capital "D", even though it isn't at the beginning of a sentence. Also note the word “please” is underlined. The creators were imploring. The source of the message But where did the people behind Back To The Future get their knowledge of 911? The people who contacted Rob and Bob with knowledge that the Twin Towers would be struck... Where did they get that information? As with everything else, this too was worked into the movie… The woman in the plaza (pic 35). Pics 35 & 36 She is the one who gave Marty the flyer about the tower (pic 36). She is the source of that knowledge. She knows every detail about the tower, including how and when it was struck. She also gives Marty the urgent instruction to save the tower. Pics 37 - 39 The woman is positioned directly beneath a store sign that reads “The Third Eye” (pic 37). An eye inside a pyramid is used instead of the word “eye”. This symbol is called the “all seeing eye”, and it lines-up perfectly with the woman’s forehead. This shot replicates mysticism iconography (pic 38), where the third eye is depicted on the forehead as a symbol of enlightenment. The all-seeing-eye symbol is also used in Freemason iconography (pic 39). Add these details together and what do we have? Marty learned of the destruction of the clock tower from a woman depicted with her forehead directly beneath the all-seeing-eye of the Freemasons. With this shot, the creators of Back To The Future are telling us they learned about the destruction of the Twin Towers from Freemasons. 911 was approved Pics 40 & 41 Another link to the Freemasons is shown on the clock at Lone Pine Mall (pic 40). When Marty returns to the mall at the end of the first movie, the clock reads 1:33. 33 is a special number in Freemasonry (pic 41). The number 3 represents completeness, such as the 3 dimensions of the physical universe. It also denotes stability, since 3 is the minimum number of legs a table needs to remain upright. Doubling the number 3 as in 33 signifies achieving a complete and stable degree of enlightenment, which is why 33 is the highest level of membership in Freemasonry. By placing the number 33 together with Lone Pine Mall, the creators of Back To The Future are telling us that 911 has Freemasons behind it, approved by those at the highest level. Why so cryptic? But why present this information about 911 in such a cryptic way, with so much symbolism? If they wanted to warn us about 911, why not just come out and tell us plainly and clearly? To be frank, I don’t know why. All we can do is speculate. Perhaps they were under oath. The people trying to sound the warning about 911 were likely Masons who did not agree with other Masons concerning 911. Coming out and publicly denouncing the plans of their own fraternity would have landed them in serious trouble. Another possibility is that while the date of 911 was known so long in advance, the year was not. Consider what came immediately after 911. 911 opened the door to US invasions overseas. 911 could not be launched until the US was ready for such operations in foreign lands. The country needed to be prepared politically, economically, and militarily. Only then would the year for 911 be chosen. So even though the plan for 911 was known as far back as the early 1980’s, not knowing the year was problematic. What could anyone do about it? Ground all flights on September 11 of every single year for decades? No one would take such a warning seriously, nor would authorities take such precautions. Yet another possibility is to prepare people and society for planned changes, guiding people into becoming more accepting of them. "Predictive Programming", as it has come to be called, is the "theory that the government or other higher-ups are using fictional movies or books as a ... tool to make the population more accepting of planned future events." - https://u.osu.edu/vanzandt/2018/04/18/predictive-programming Still another possibility is simply to clear their conscience. If the ones planning the disaster make their plans known ahead of time, they believe they will escape its moral and spiritual consequences, leaving them free of guilt. This is similar to a country announcing a planned attack on a city or facility through television, radio, and dropping leaflets from planes. They warn people of their planned attack, indicating its precise location, date and time, in order to escape culpability for any loss of life that may result. The idea is: "We warned you. If you are injured or killed, it is your fault, not ours." As unbelievable as it sounds, such twisted reasoning is used by governments and militaries to this day. One final possibility I can think of is that the creators of the Back To The Future movies realized they would not be able to stop the 911 disaster, and produced the movies for posterity’s sake. They wanted people to know the truth - that it was not a surprise attack, but was a planned operation approved long in advance by people connected to powerful organizations. They wanted people to know… it was known. As Marty often said, “That’s heavy.” Joseph Cafariello ___________________________________________ conspiracy_posts is my own subreddit for posting original content I have created which is too controversial for other subreddits to accept. This subreddit is not open for posting by others, and its posts are not open for commenting. However, you are more than welcome to discuss my posts in other subreddits and other forums. This post is the 1st of 3 posts I will be posting at conspiracy_posts. The other 2 will be posted over the next few days. Please return to my subreddit and have a read. If you have an open mind and are a logical thinker, you will not be disappointed. I highly encourage people to share and discuss my posts with others. Remember, logic and reason are more effective than slander and heckling. |
2024.06.07 20:42 DinoZavr Reminder: ESO+ free trial: instant freebies (June 07 - June 19, 2024)
Quick Note: added Necrom Section. also note this time it is 12 days, not usual 7 :)
Activation: ingame Crown Store -> ESO Plus tab → click “Free Trial!”.
INSTANT or QUICK Freebies:
Dungeons DLC: - Shadow of the Hist: Heroic personality -- Enter either the Ruins of Mazzatun or the Cradle of Shadows (Shadowfen) - Horns of the Reach: Bullhorns emote -- Enter either Falkreath Hold or Bloodroot Forge (Craglorn) - Dragon Bones: hat: Renegade Dragon Priest Mask -- Enter either Fang Lair or Scalecaller Peak (Bangkorai/Stormhaven) - Wolfhunter: Werewolf Hunter Hat -- Enter either Moon Hunter Keep or March of Sacrifices (Reaper’s March/Greenshade) - Wrathstone: hat: Ayleid Royal Crown -- Enter either Frostvault or Depths of Malatar (Eastmarch/Gold Coast) - Scalebreaker: outfit style: Dread-Aurelian Mask -- Enter either Lair of Maarselok or Moongrave Fane (Grathwood /Northern Elsweyr) - Harrowstorm: Emote: Wickerman Mishap -- Enter either Unhallowed Grave or Icereach (Bangkorai/Wrothgar) - StoneThorn: Pet: Energetic Dwarven Shock-Spider -- Enter either Castle Thorn or Stone Garden (Western Skyrim/Blackreach: Greymoor Caverns) - Flames of Ambition: Outfit weapon style Fire-Forged Maul -- Enter either The Cauldron or Black Drake Villa (Deshaan/Gold Coast) - Waking Flame: Scorion Pyreling non-combat pet – Enter either Red Petal Bastion or the Dread Cellar (Glenumbra/Blackwood) - Ascending Tide: Abyssal Embrace Face Markings - Enter either Coral Aerie or Shipwright's Regret (Summerset/Rivenspire) - Lost Depths: Mulberry Hermit Crab non-combat pet - Enter either Earthen Root Enclave or Graven Deep (both surface entries are in High Isle/Amenos, so if you don't own High Isle chapter use map to teleport inside or group with a friend, who is inside and teleport to them) - Scribes of Fate: has no “immediate” loyalty reward. Despite declaring the “Lost in the Woods” emote being granted for just visiting Bal Sunnar or Scrivener's Hall, actually it is rewarded on completing BOTH dungeons on Normal difficulty (relevant discussion: https://forums.elderscrollsonline.com/en/discussion/629124/official-discussion-thread-scribes-of-fate-update-37-now-live-on-pc-mac ) Entry points: Bal Sunnar – Stonefalls & Scrivener's - Hall The Rift. - Scions of Ithelia - Bascially, nothing. Completing both Oathsworn Pit and Bedlam Veil in Normal yeilds you only 10 Achievement points, nothing more.
Game-maps.com has ESO+ group dungeons color-coded on the Tamriel map: https://game-maps.com/ESO/Tamriel-ESO-World-Map.asp
Zone DLC:
- Orsinium: Pet: Echalette -- Enter Orsinium capital city (also: quests for Orzorga provisioning recipes, get Briarheart dagger quest reward for your StickerBook) - Thieves Guild: Pet: Jackal -- Enter Abah's Landing. Unlock TG skill line (also grants Thieves Guild Leathers costume) - Dark Brotherhood: Personality: Assassin -- Enter Gold Coast zone. Unlock DB skill line (the second quest in DB story unlocks the Shrouded Armor costume) - Clockwork City: Pet: Scintillant Dovah-Fly -- Enter the Brass Fortress (also do quests for provisioning recipes, the later are bound, so it worths the efforts). Collecting Precursor dummy fragments is up to you as it is quite time consuming and the dummy itself has too low HP. - Murkmire: Pet: Verdigris Haj Mota -- Enter Lilmoth (quest Death Among the Dead-Water rewards with a Fire Rock memento) - Dragonhold: Outfit Style: Topal Corsair Hat -- Enter Southern Elsweyr (questing unlocks other pages). Questing unlocks Mask of Alkosh hat and The Za’ji’s Dragonguard Uniform costume - Markarth: Outfit Style: Arkthzand Anfractuosity Shroud -- Enter The Reach (questing grants head and body markings, and Witchwise Headdress hat collectible) - The Deadlands – Oblivion Explorer’s Headwrap - Enter Fargrave for the first time (its’ wayshrine is unlocked) - Firesong- Firesong Obsidian Mask – Enter Galen
- Summerset: nothing immediate. fish in Artaeum for bound provisioning recipes (otherwise they are obtainable by purchasing Waterlogged Psijic Satchels, which is an expensive lottery), unlock Psijic skill line (progressing it also unlocks buying bound furnishing recipes at the Artaeum trader). Also one of three Antiquities leads for Music Box “In Dreams and Memories” drops in Summerset. And fast to obtain “Alinor Allemande” dance emote from the Antiquity lead.
- Elsweyr: nothing immediate. (Despite parts of Peryite Skeevemaster costume drop in Orcrest public dungeon, parts of a Grisly Mummy Tabby pet drop in Rimmen Necropolis all these are not bound and may be purchased from Guild Traders any time), zone quest unlocks Hall of the Lunar Champion housing (a free manor sized house!!), and Dragonslayer Style head & shoulders outfit styles. Three wings of the Hall of the Lunar Champion manor are unlocked by completing 1) Elsweyr story, 2) Dragonhold story, 3) completing both Lair of Maarselok and Moongrave Fane on normal difficulty. Also completing Sunspire Trial on normal unlocks purchases of the beautiful Akatosh Chancel doors (furnishing for housings) for 100K gold from Achievement furnisher in Rimmen.
- Greymoor - nothing immediate, but Antiquities are numerous.. It takes like 6 ..7 hours to level up Scrying and Excavation up to level 7 to be able to get mythics (faster moving speed is preferable – get crafted Adept Rider set or Coward's Gear set). I did it on 3 characters and stayed at Artaeum doing first greens, then cycling between greens and blues till a purple lead (one time per location) at level 5 scrying (normally 3..4 hours depending on how fast you do move). Then i preferred to stay at Artaeum for approx 3 more hours repeating green-blue cycles to get level 7 (the alternative is to go Green-Blue-Purple in the base game zones & Artaeum (purple part is non-repeatable on account) to unlock the 100,000 gold Al-Esh Ascension Coin lead, but you have to unlock Eyevea (by completing Mages Guild questline) and get 10 in scrying to dig for this gold), and, basically, as other zones are bigger and you would most likely have to kill mobs on your way – this method of skill line progression would take more time then staying in small cosy Artaeum. Well.. this is up to you to decide.
Alcast has a good & comprehensive Antiquties guide: https://alcasthq.com/eso-antiquities-system-guide-greymoor-chapte His guide also includes a link to the levelling guide, where author recommends green-blue-purple method. ESO Hub has good information about Mythics and theirs leads https://eso-hub.com/en/sets/category/mythic Friendly reminder: Mythics are reconstructable at any time (and theirs level is fixed CP160), but not deconstructable.
There are some cosmetic Antiquities items https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Antiquity_Leads#Cosmetics_and_Outfit_Styles
Also pick up the Alinor Allemande emote (Summerset), and, maybe Aldmeri Symphonia music box. Also get fancy crafting stations: Anvil of Old Orsinium, Druidic Provisioning Station, Daedric Enchanting Station, and the Shipbuilder's Woodworking Station. The Ebon Dwarven Wolf mount is 17 parts, so it might take you too much time to get them all in one week, though it is doable, if the random number generator is loyal to you. DisplayLeads addon is awesome and extremely helpful (https://www.esoui.com/downloads/info2651-DisplayLeads-withLocationInfo.html)
- Blackwood nothing seriously big, but you can get a free Bog Dog pet (Lost in the Wilds quest) and some nice furnishings (including a canoe). Companions are not on the table. To kill your time there is the 15 pieces Blackwood Tapestry antiquity furnishing (check Alcast for the guide if interested). Also Thrafey Debutante Gown is a stylish costume obatined with 50 Scaly Cloth Scraps (tradeable) fragments from the Silent Halls public dungeon.
- High Isle. Again, nothing immediate. Cosmetics include non-combat pet Jerall Rescue Dog acquired during Tales of Tribute questline, non-combat pet Coral Haj Mota: 25 Coral Haj Mota Decoys from the Spire Of The Crimson Coin and 25 Coral Haj Mota Lures from Ghost Haven Bay (these are tedious to get tradeable fragments)
Courtly Traveling Attire costume plus head and body marking you get during the zone story line quest Nighthunter's Cowl hat is one lead Antiquity
- Necrom. Nothing immediate. Long term offers include: Emissaries Enclave - big house, 28 quests 1.5M gold, The Fate Scryer Costume – completing the quest “Chronicle of Fate”, shroom tender style - different style pages unlocked by achievements, new ToT desk – Almalexia. nix-ox steed mount would be hard or, probably impossible to get, I can not tell for sure (please comment on that), Abyssal Cephaliarch’s Face Art – completing the quest “A Hidden Fate”, Body Art – completing the quest “A Calamity of Fate”. Also The Prism of Moribund Sapience – completing the quest “In a Troubled House”. The Meln’s Soul Gem memento – completing the quest “Spirit of Fate”
Necrom Master Angler achievememnt unlocks Shroomtender Shoes style, though i normally do not mention Master Angler achievements for DLC zones, as catching all them rare fishies consumes the enormous amount time and only one other Master Angler achievement rewards directly - becoming the Deadlands Master Angler allows to purhcase a Sulfur Pool achievement furnishing. So them fishing shoes style is for the most reckless of you, daredevils! I don't have that much time to complete that. :
Other Shroomtender style pages are unlocked by doing all deleves, world bosses, quests and other activities in Necrom zones.
Berylglow Nix-Ox Steed mount requires the Savior of Necrom achievement with 5 coditions. The third of these is Complete all 3 Daily Job achievements for Necrom's Stalwart Protector one of three requirements for that is "Complete 30 Bastion Nymic Daily Quests for Ordinator Tandasea in Necrom" (i doubt participating in your friends' shared daily Nymic counts, if you have already completed your own daily Nymic, so, here, in my understanding, is the catch. please, correct me if i am wrong and 30 Nymic (as well as 30 WB and Delves dailies) can be done in a week) link: https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Savior_of_Necrom (these 30 Nymic dailies also unlock a Obsidian Dwarven Sphere pet, though, again, i doubt it can be done withing a week)
UESP page with the images of loyalty rewards: https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:DLC_Loyalty_Rewards
What works:
- Thieves Guild, Dark Brotherhood, and Psijic Guild skill lines skill line will persist, allowing looting Thieves Troves and Psijic portals. Blade of Woe still continues to function (Please, keep in mind that is per character! Psijic quest (it is long) unlocking the line (and subsequent ones (long too)) is fun only first 9 times.., after that it starts becoming annoying)
- Housing purchased in DLC zones will persist, on exiting the house you would not enter a DLC zone, but teleport back to the location from which you have teleported to your house
- Furnishings exceeding non-ESO+ limits will stay, but you will not be able to re-add them if accidentally put away
- you would be able to allocate/deallocate Skill Points (with respec or by loading an Armory build) in the TG/DB/Psijic/JC/Scrying/Excavation skills you have already unlocked while progressing these skill lines.
- Antiquities will still allow you to scry from the map (though I am not sure it was intended by Zenimax)
thanks go to u/LordAsheye for the instructions: https://www.reddit.com/elderscrollsonline/comments/10kdvem/comment/j5rqmpd/?utm_source=share&utm_medium=web2x&context=3
What does not work:
- Jewelry Crafting skill line still requires Summerset (after ESO+ expires you can not access JC crafting stations if you don't own the DLC), but it makes a lot of sense to research Infused, Bloodthirsty and Swift traits for reconstructing stickerbook jewelry (thanks Kelinmiriel for this tip) as at any time you can buy the Transmute Station or visit your friends houses/guildhalls where the said station has been already deployed.
- You would not be able to further progress DB, TG and Psijic skill lines (if not maxed them) after free ESO+ trial ends.
- You can not play Tales of Trubute (if you have no access to High Isle) after trial end
- Companions of Blackwood and High Isle are decoupled from the zone for ESO+ Free trials (but, of course, work for the real subscriptions), Companions of Necrom are not accessible, because Necrom is the latest Chapter, which is not unlocked with ESO+ (trial or regular)
OTHER EASY THINGS to do:
- re-log with each character to make materials they carry to go into the Crafting Bag (after event it will turn into "extract-only" mode)
- unlock TG, DB and Psijic skill lines for each of your characters (looting a thieves trove is enough to unlock the TG line, so if you are lucky to spot the thing that saves a trip to Hew's Bane)
- collect skyshards, lorebooks, unlock exploration and questing dyes and achievements, check achievement furnishers (as they offer quite a lot of inexpensive and nice furnishings)
(LovelyNorth has an excellent achievement furnishers visual guide: http://lovelynorth.com/achievementfurnishings/)
- dye your costumes (this is done per character, so the same costume may be dyed differently on different characters)
- dye your Companions costumes (if you have Blackwood or High Isle or Necrom and unlocked them Companions)
- refine your raw materials, preferably on a character with the best refining passives and Meticulous Disassembly green CP star slotted
- if you do crafting dailies, then pack your CraftBag with everything. I’d suggest depositing a LOT of style stones (basic ones are 15g each at vendors located near crafting stations), potency runes (again, vendors), Ta runes, Mudcrab Chitin and Violet Coprinus. If you craft furnishings stock up with furnishing materials as well.
- pack your houses with 2x storage (utilize 2x furnishing limits at houses of any size)
- do the treasure maps (might be purchased at the Guild Traders) pointing to otherwise restricted zones
- if you decided to train Antiquities, then acquire new and do the existing leads in the unlocked DLC zones (if you decide to max up Antiquities skill lines (for the Ultimate difficulty furnishing leads) - the easy way to get level 7 lead (Void-Crystal Anomaly furnishing) is to harvest nodes in Coldharbour, as it drops surprisingly often there from resource nodes)
- attune your crafting stations to Order's Wrath (High Isle), Law of Julianos (Wrothgar) , New Moon Acolyte (Southern Elsweyr) (also: Clever Alchemist, Wretched Vitality, Mechanical Acuity (CWC), Coldharbor Favorite, Stuhn's Favor, Heartland Conqueror, and Ancient Dragonguard are quite good options too (imho), but that is you, who decides on that matter and most of the GuildHalls normally have them crafting stations).
- it is worth mentioning you can open your geodes to use doubled (1000) transmute crystal limit (though after the event you would not be able to add new crystals unless you consume the existing ones to make theirs number to drop below the “normal” 500 limit)
- purchasing alchemy ingredients to pack your CraftBag with is up to you (this may help to level up new characters uber-fast using batches of pre-crafted Master Achemy Writs), as well as buying uncommon style materials (for future gear crafting Master Writs). However, for both of these purposes I’d suggest just to subscribe to ESO+.
TIME-CONSUMING ACTIVITIES:
- collect Bound-On-Pickup group dungeons DLC gear for the collections book (unbound may be bought)
- quests and dungeons for rewards, achievements and collectibles (like Elsweyr free housing or Elsweyr+Dragonhold Epilogue free flying pet, undaunted trophies.. Pirharri the Smuggler assistant, etc etc..)
- doing DLC dungeons for bound gear, skillpoints, achievements (including skins for achievements in veteran DLC dungeons), motif pages drops and trophies
- if you are for good DPS sets: on normal Falkreath Hold (for Pillar of Nirn) is soloable, just block minotaurs heavy attacks. Frostvault (for Tzogvin's Warband) is soloable too, just get tanky to kill the troll. And you don’t need 60+ runs as you get armor pieces rather quick so you can reconstruct them later (for 50..60 crystals, not 25, but, anyway..). Weapons require more runs, though..
- doing DLC trials with friends for skins, gear and achievement. UESP: https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Trials
- Zones story quests reward with skillpoints (especially smaller zones: CWC -8, Murkmire – 7, Southern Elsweyr – 6+3, Markarth – 6+3, The Deadlands – 6+3, Firesong – 6+3 (6+3 means 6 from smaller zone DLC plus 3 from epilogue quests completing one year arc (if the appropriate big zone DLC story line completed))). (Thanks to u/RadioRy for this recommendation) Also: warning: it takes only several hours for these storylines if you rush the dialogues, however – rushing is not recommended if you are for stories or RP.
- do public dungeons group events in Summerset Isles, Northern Elsweyr, Greymoor, Blackwood, High Isle and Wrothgar for the skill points (Atoll of Immolation is, technically, a public dungeon too, but does not reward you with a skillpoint. Enter it from The Deadlands, not from Blackwood)
Game-Maps.com has the excellent public dungeons maps https://game-maps.com/ESO/ESO-Public-Dungeon.asp
On PC use the Urich's Skill Point Finder addon to check your quests, skyshards and dungeons skillpoints https://www.esoui.com/downloads/info1863-UrichsSkillPointFinder.html
- check UESP full list of mementos: https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Mementos (“DLC and Chapters” is a sepatare section), maybe you would like to unlock some
- completing skill lines (DB, TG, Psijic)
- complete maps (do world bosses if you please)
- complete fishing Achievements
- do DLC dungeons with friends on veteran difficulty for skins, costumes, titles and other nice rewards
Now some details about fashion for those, who might be interested in that stuff. Skip if not.
Five sections below do not include veteran hard-mode dungeons and trials rewards and achievements, as not 100% of the players do these activities. Let’s talk relatively easy things, OKay?
(Base Game, Morrowind, and Imperial City goodies are not included for the obvious reason – no connection with ESO+, though Shadowfen skeleton or Vvardenfell Scarlett Judge costume are mentioned in the comments each and every time). Dyes are too numerous, so I decided not to overload this document. Check UESP for dyes, please.
I also skipped titles, mementos and emotes to keep this text reasonably compact.
GETTING COSTUMES (not including the ones from the tradeable fragments)
- Antiquarian Field Garb & Antiquarian Robes - gained by progressing scrying and excavating antiquities - Regalia of the Orsimer King - completing Orsinium storyline quests - Cavalier of the Sworn Oath Old Orsinium Sentry Trinimac's Penitent Knight - questing in Wrothgar - Merchant Lord's Formal Regalia - obtained by progressing Thieves Guild story quest - Shrouded Armor - you get it at the very start of Dark Brotherhood story-line quests - Thieves Guild Leathers - you get it just by starting Thieves guild questline - Za'ji's Dragonguard Uniform - completing Southern Elsweyr questline - Oblivion Explorer Garb – obtained during The Deadlands zone story - Courtly Traveling Attire – complete High Isle zone story - Black Hand Robe – complete Dark Brotherhood story - The Fate Scryer Costume - obtained during Necrom zone quest
HATS (not including “instant” ones)
- Nighthunter's Cowl Hat – Antiquity on the High Isle - Ironclad Sarcoshroud – Antiquity in The Deadlands - Helm of the Black Fin – obtained during Blackwood zone quest line - Arkthzand Insight Vertex Shroud – Antiquity in Markarth DLC - Witchwise Headdress – obtained during The Reach story line quests - Dwemer Crown - the Antiquity lead drops from the group event boss in Nchuthnkarst public dungeon in Blackreach - Mask of Alkosh obtained by completing the Dragonhold main questline - Madgod’s Turban obtained with “The Lunacy of Two Moons” side quest in Northern Elsweyr - Psijic Skullcap is obtained on completing the Psijic Order quests line
NON-COMBAT PETS (not including “instant” ones)
- Phoenix Moth – awarded on completing Galen’s story line quests - Jerall Rescue Dog – obtained during Tales of Tribute quest line - Coral Haj Mota – combined from (tradeable) fragments from both High Isle public dungeons - Dremnaken Runt – obtained completing Blackwood + The Deadlands epilogue quest line - Bog Dog pet – obtained by exploration achievement in Blackwood (check ArzyeLBuilds guide https://arzyelbuilds.com/eso-lost-in-the-wilds-achievement-guide-blackwood-free-pet/) - Dwarven Scarab – 7 parts Antiquity from Markarth DLC. Thought Zeni claims they improved the drop rates, they still deserve much better :( - Somnolent Void Rot - obtained during Greymoor + Markarth epilogue quest line - Solitude Silver Wolf – obtained during Greymoor story line quests - Regal Dragon Imp flying pet obtained during Season of the Dragon Epilogue quests
FACE AND BODY MARKINGS (not including “instant” ones)
- Y’ffelon’s face and body marks obtained during Galen story quest line - Stonelore’s Legend Face and Body marks obtained during High Isle zone story - Fargrave Soullatice Face and Body obtained on completing The Deadlands story questline - Ysgramor’s Chosen Face Marking – antiquity lead in Western Skyrim - Ysgramor’s Chosen Body Marking obtained during Greymoor story quest - Dwemer Face Markings – antiquity lead from Colossus Charging Station WB in Blackreach - Dwemer Body Markings – antiquity lead from the boss of The Scraps delve in Western Skyrim - Face & Body Imprint of the Psijic Order are obtained during the Psijic Order quests line in Summerset - Abyssal Cephaliarch’s Face Art – completing the quest “A Hidden Fate” in Necrom - Body Art – completing the quest “A Calamity of Fate” in Necrom
SKINS
- Barkroot Blessing is 10 parts antiquity from Galen https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Barkroot_Blessing (i will be honest: I gave up with this skin after using 25+ Galen treasure maps with zero freakin’ lead drop; may the luck follow you, tamrielings!:)
OTHER COSMETICS
- Ascendant Lord’s Greatsword – style page awarded for completing High Isle + Firesong epilogue quests chain - Eldertide Style – shoulder style Antiquity from Galen Treasure Map I - Pelin’s Paragon outfit style pages drop from Tales of Tribute dailies rewards containers - Bog Blight Funerary Mask Style – hat style Antiquity from Blackwood - Leyawiin Brigadine Shield Style – obtained by completing Blackwood zone story line - Malign Ambitions Crow – major adornment obtained during story line quests in Blackwood - Antiquarian's Pickaxe is a two-handed weapon style acquired by reaching the max rank in the Excavation Skill Line - Wolf of Solitude Replica Sword is one-handed weapon style obtained during Greymoor storyline quests - Karthwatch Sigil Shield outfit style is also obtained during Greymoor storyline quests - Wolfcrown of Solitude adornment obtained on finishing Greymoor story line quests - Topal Corsair outfit style pages are awarded for completing different quests in Southern Elsweyr - Ancient & Pristine Moon Crescent Styles are sickle-like one-handed weapon styles obtained by completing side quests chain given by Vastarie NPC in Northern Elsweyr - Skyterror Dragonslayer Style are helm and shoulder outfit styles granted during Northern Elsweyr storyline quests - Mystic Eye Psijic Cuirass outfit Style is obtained during the Summerset zone story - Psijic Warden Gauntlets outfit Style is also obtained during the Summerset zone story - Shroomtender outfit pages are a reward for completing various achievements associated with the exploration of Necrom
DAILIES
UESP has a comprehensive list of dailies and how to unlock them: https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Repeatable_Quests
FURNISHING PLANS
(though I would not recommend this because of cooldowns and limited time of the Event, but this is still a good clean family entertainment to diversify your activities. Wrothgar: loot Old Orsinium; CWC: steal in Brass Fortress Basilica; Summerset loot Shimmerene Monastery; Murkmire: steal in Lilmoth and Bright-Throat Village; Northern Elsweyr: loot Rimmen Royal Palace (Dragonhold added no new furnishing plans); Greymoor: loot Nchuthnkarst; Markarth: loot Bthar-Zel (unlocked during the zone quest); Blackwood: steal in Leaywiin Castle; The Deadlands: steal in The Bearer’s Rest in Fargrave, High Isle: loot Castle Navire, Galen: steal in Maltheo Rouillac's House in Vastyr). Necrom loot in Sailenmora Crypts (you have to start the "a thif to catch a thief" quest, but NOT finish it, otherwise you lose access to this place (very juicy from the start, now seriously nerfed))
Swap characters after blue or purple plan drop (the cooldown for blues is one hour per character). I would also suggest to swap characters after you start getting white furnishing plans. Slot “Homemaker” green CP star.
OTHER LONG-TERM ACTIVITIES:
- doing Museum quests for unique furnishing items and costumes ( https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Museums )
- farming bound collectibles fragments in public dungeons (https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Fragments)
- digging mythics and other antiquities (wolfie mount, music box, dance emote, face and body markings, cosmetics, and fancy furnishings, as there are many great-looking Antiquities furnishings)
- do the surveys and refine as much as you can to stock up your CraftBag (ideally to hold up till the next ESO+ free event)
- DO THE SOLO ARENAS: the Maelstrom Arena weapons are still great, also the Vateshran Hollows weapons are good and achievements (unlocking skin and dyes may be done on a veteran difficulty).
BlackRose Prison weapons are also good, but you would prefer to go with friend(s), as this group arena is noticeably harder than the soloable nDSA.
(reminder: Curated drops in Arenas work only on the final chest)
Completing veteran MA unlocks Maelstrom Baron polymorph, completing veteran VH unlocks Void Pathosis skin.
TIP: Set up your priorities!
As there are a LOT of things to be done and time is the essence, I’d suggest getting instant freebies first (it takes less than an hour) and then focus on what you consider the most important (like mythics, or trial/dungeons gear, or some free stuff requiring questing, or dailies, or just exploration, etc) as this depends on what brings you the most fun. The ESO is a MMO game, after all!
Be sure to check the comprehensive list of collectibles compiled by Benevolent Bowd (benevolentbowd):
https://benevolentbowd.ca/games/esotu/eso-making-the-most-of-it/
http://benevolentbowd.ca/games/esotu/esotu-unlockable-collectibles/
Friendly reminder: collectibles, mementos, emotes, dyes and currencies are account-wide.
If I have missed anything essential (I intentionally omitted Base Game, Vvardenfell and Imperial City things as they do not depend on ESO+), please, post that in the comments to help making this guide better. Thank you.
Good luck, friends.
Have fun
P.S. FAQ: the most frequent questions are:
- How to activate the ESO+ trial? - Normally the magic sequence is: inagme Crown Store, select the ESO Plus tab, select “Free Trial!” ( official instructionhttps://www.elderscrollsonline.com/en-us/news/post/66079 ) - How long does it last? - Normally seven days. Check the official site for precise information. Event ends on June 19 14:00 UTC - is this once in a lifetime promotion? - No. You can participate in all the subsequent ESO+ free trial events whenever they happen - How often such promotions do happen? – it is hard to say, normally 2-3 times a year, but there are no schedule and warranties. - I am already subscribed. Do I benefit from this event? - Not really. - Does this week adds to existing subscriptions? – Nope. - Does free ESO+ trial unlocks Warden & Necromancer classes ?– Nope. - How long does it take to pick up all of them instant loyalty rewards? - Normally less than an hour. - Any free mounts? - Ebon Dwarven Mount from Antiquities. There are also other mounts but it depends. Mounts are granted for trifectas DLC Trials achievements, but they are really hard to obtain, as it takes highly coordinated capable group to achieve vet HM speed-run no-death. Antiquties wolf mount could be unlocked in one week but this takes some serious no-lifing. :) - What will happen with the Craftbag? - it will go into “extract only” mode, you will not lose your materials. u/Kelinmiriel explained the order materials are consumed when crafting: the game uses 1) any stolen materials you're carrying, 2) materials from your craft bag, 3) non-stolen materials in your inventory. You have no choice about this. - Do I keep all these collectibles and items I have obtained? – Sure!
Stay safe, folx!
submitted by DinoZavr to elderscrollsonline [link] [comments]
Activation: ingame Crown Store -> ESO Plus tab → click “Free Trial!”.
INSTANT or QUICK Freebies:
Dungeons DLC: - Shadow of the Hist: Heroic personality -- Enter either the Ruins of Mazzatun or the Cradle of Shadows (Shadowfen) - Horns of the Reach: Bullhorns emote -- Enter either Falkreath Hold or Bloodroot Forge (Craglorn) - Dragon Bones: hat: Renegade Dragon Priest Mask -- Enter either Fang Lair or Scalecaller Peak (Bangkorai/Stormhaven) - Wolfhunter: Werewolf Hunter Hat -- Enter either Moon Hunter Keep or March of Sacrifices (Reaper’s March/Greenshade) - Wrathstone: hat: Ayleid Royal Crown -- Enter either Frostvault or Depths of Malatar (Eastmarch/Gold Coast) - Scalebreaker: outfit style: Dread-Aurelian Mask -- Enter either Lair of Maarselok or Moongrave Fane (Grathwood /Northern Elsweyr) - Harrowstorm: Emote: Wickerman Mishap -- Enter either Unhallowed Grave or Icereach (Bangkorai/Wrothgar) - StoneThorn: Pet: Energetic Dwarven Shock-Spider -- Enter either Castle Thorn or Stone Garden (Western Skyrim/Blackreach: Greymoor Caverns) - Flames of Ambition: Outfit weapon style Fire-Forged Maul -- Enter either The Cauldron or Black Drake Villa (Deshaan/Gold Coast) - Waking Flame: Scorion Pyreling non-combat pet – Enter either Red Petal Bastion or the Dread Cellar (Glenumbra/Blackwood) - Ascending Tide: Abyssal Embrace Face Markings - Enter either Coral Aerie or Shipwright's Regret (Summerset/Rivenspire) - Lost Depths: Mulberry Hermit Crab non-combat pet - Enter either Earthen Root Enclave or Graven Deep (both surface entries are in High Isle/Amenos, so if you don't own High Isle chapter use map to teleport inside or group with a friend, who is inside and teleport to them) - Scribes of Fate: has no “immediate” loyalty reward. Despite declaring the “Lost in the Woods” emote being granted for just visiting Bal Sunnar or Scrivener's Hall, actually it is rewarded on completing BOTH dungeons on Normal difficulty (relevant discussion: https://forums.elderscrollsonline.com/en/discussion/629124/official-discussion-thread-scribes-of-fate-update-37-now-live-on-pc-mac ) Entry points: Bal Sunnar – Stonefalls & Scrivener's - Hall The Rift. - Scions of Ithelia - Bascially, nothing. Completing both Oathsworn Pit and Bedlam Veil in Normal yeilds you only 10 Achievement points, nothing more.
Game-maps.com has ESO+ group dungeons color-coded on the Tamriel map: https://game-maps.com/ESO/Tamriel-ESO-World-Map.asp
Zone DLC:
- Orsinium: Pet: Echalette -- Enter Orsinium capital city (also: quests for Orzorga provisioning recipes, get Briarheart dagger quest reward for your StickerBook) - Thieves Guild: Pet: Jackal -- Enter Abah's Landing. Unlock TG skill line (also grants Thieves Guild Leathers costume) - Dark Brotherhood: Personality: Assassin -- Enter Gold Coast zone. Unlock DB skill line (the second quest in DB story unlocks the Shrouded Armor costume) - Clockwork City: Pet: Scintillant Dovah-Fly -- Enter the Brass Fortress (also do quests for provisioning recipes, the later are bound, so it worths the efforts). Collecting Precursor dummy fragments is up to you as it is quite time consuming and the dummy itself has too low HP. - Murkmire: Pet: Verdigris Haj Mota -- Enter Lilmoth (quest Death Among the Dead-Water rewards with a Fire Rock memento) - Dragonhold: Outfit Style: Topal Corsair Hat -- Enter Southern Elsweyr (questing unlocks other pages). Questing unlocks Mask of Alkosh hat and The Za’ji’s Dragonguard Uniform costume - Markarth: Outfit Style: Arkthzand Anfractuosity Shroud -- Enter The Reach (questing grants head and body markings, and Witchwise Headdress hat collectible) - The Deadlands – Oblivion Explorer’s Headwrap - Enter Fargrave for the first time (its’ wayshrine is unlocked) - Firesong- Firesong Obsidian Mask – Enter Galen
- Summerset: nothing immediate. fish in Artaeum for bound provisioning recipes (otherwise they are obtainable by purchasing Waterlogged Psijic Satchels, which is an expensive lottery), unlock Psijic skill line (progressing it also unlocks buying bound furnishing recipes at the Artaeum trader). Also one of three Antiquities leads for Music Box “In Dreams and Memories” drops in Summerset. And fast to obtain “Alinor Allemande” dance emote from the Antiquity lead.
- Elsweyr: nothing immediate. (Despite parts of Peryite Skeevemaster costume drop in Orcrest public dungeon, parts of a Grisly Mummy Tabby pet drop in Rimmen Necropolis all these are not bound and may be purchased from Guild Traders any time), zone quest unlocks Hall of the Lunar Champion housing (a free manor sized house!!), and Dragonslayer Style head & shoulders outfit styles. Three wings of the Hall of the Lunar Champion manor are unlocked by completing 1) Elsweyr story, 2) Dragonhold story, 3) completing both Lair of Maarselok and Moongrave Fane on normal difficulty. Also completing Sunspire Trial on normal unlocks purchases of the beautiful Akatosh Chancel doors (furnishing for housings) for 100K gold from Achievement furnisher in Rimmen.
- Greymoor - nothing immediate, but Antiquities are numerous.. It takes like 6 ..7 hours to level up Scrying and Excavation up to level 7 to be able to get mythics (faster moving speed is preferable – get crafted Adept Rider set or Coward's Gear set). I did it on 3 characters and stayed at Artaeum doing first greens, then cycling between greens and blues till a purple lead (one time per location) at level 5 scrying (normally 3..4 hours depending on how fast you do move). Then i preferred to stay at Artaeum for approx 3 more hours repeating green-blue cycles to get level 7 (the alternative is to go Green-Blue-Purple in the base game zones & Artaeum (purple part is non-repeatable on account) to unlock the 100,000 gold Al-Esh Ascension Coin lead, but you have to unlock Eyevea (by completing Mages Guild questline) and get 10 in scrying to dig for this gold), and, basically, as other zones are bigger and you would most likely have to kill mobs on your way – this method of skill line progression would take more time then staying in small cosy Artaeum. Well.. this is up to you to decide.
Alcast has a good & comprehensive Antiquties guide: https://alcasthq.com/eso-antiquities-system-guide-greymoor-chapte His guide also includes a link to the levelling guide, where author recommends green-blue-purple method. ESO Hub has good information about Mythics and theirs leads https://eso-hub.com/en/sets/category/mythic Friendly reminder: Mythics are reconstructable at any time (and theirs level is fixed CP160), but not deconstructable.
There are some cosmetic Antiquities items https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Antiquity_Leads#Cosmetics_and_Outfit_Styles
Also pick up the Alinor Allemande emote (Summerset), and, maybe Aldmeri Symphonia music box. Also get fancy crafting stations: Anvil of Old Orsinium, Druidic Provisioning Station, Daedric Enchanting Station, and the Shipbuilder's Woodworking Station. The Ebon Dwarven Wolf mount is 17 parts, so it might take you too much time to get them all in one week, though it is doable, if the random number generator is loyal to you. DisplayLeads addon is awesome and extremely helpful (https://www.esoui.com/downloads/info2651-DisplayLeads-withLocationInfo.html)
- Blackwood nothing seriously big, but you can get a free Bog Dog pet (Lost in the Wilds quest) and some nice furnishings (including a canoe). Companions are not on the table. To kill your time there is the 15 pieces Blackwood Tapestry antiquity furnishing (check Alcast for the guide if interested). Also Thrafey Debutante Gown is a stylish costume obatined with 50 Scaly Cloth Scraps (tradeable) fragments from the Silent Halls public dungeon.
- High Isle. Again, nothing immediate. Cosmetics include non-combat pet Jerall Rescue Dog acquired during Tales of Tribute questline, non-combat pet Coral Haj Mota: 25 Coral Haj Mota Decoys from the Spire Of The Crimson Coin and 25 Coral Haj Mota Lures from Ghost Haven Bay (these are tedious to get tradeable fragments)
Courtly Traveling Attire costume plus head and body marking you get during the zone story line quest Nighthunter's Cowl hat is one lead Antiquity
- Necrom. Nothing immediate. Long term offers include: Emissaries Enclave - big house, 28 quests 1.5M gold, The Fate Scryer Costume – completing the quest “Chronicle of Fate”, shroom tender style - different style pages unlocked by achievements, new ToT desk – Almalexia. nix-ox steed mount would be hard or, probably impossible to get, I can not tell for sure (please comment on that), Abyssal Cephaliarch’s Face Art – completing the quest “A Hidden Fate”, Body Art – completing the quest “A Calamity of Fate”. Also The Prism of Moribund Sapience – completing the quest “In a Troubled House”. The Meln’s Soul Gem memento – completing the quest “Spirit of Fate”
Necrom Master Angler achievememnt unlocks Shroomtender Shoes style, though i normally do not mention Master Angler achievements for DLC zones, as catching all them rare fishies consumes the enormous amount time and only one other Master Angler achievement rewards directly - becoming the Deadlands Master Angler allows to purhcase a Sulfur Pool achievement furnishing. So them fishing shoes style is for the most reckless of you, daredevils! I don't have that much time to complete that. :
Other Shroomtender style pages are unlocked by doing all deleves, world bosses, quests and other activities in Necrom zones.
Berylglow Nix-Ox Steed mount requires the Savior of Necrom achievement with 5 coditions. The third of these is Complete all 3 Daily Job achievements for Necrom's Stalwart Protector one of three requirements for that is "Complete 30 Bastion Nymic Daily Quests for Ordinator Tandasea in Necrom" (i doubt participating in your friends' shared daily Nymic counts, if you have already completed your own daily Nymic, so, here, in my understanding, is the catch. please, correct me if i am wrong and 30 Nymic (as well as 30 WB and Delves dailies) can be done in a week) link: https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Savior_of_Necrom (these 30 Nymic dailies also unlock a Obsidian Dwarven Sphere pet, though, again, i doubt it can be done withing a week)
UESP page with the images of loyalty rewards: https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:DLC_Loyalty_Rewards
What works:
- Thieves Guild, Dark Brotherhood, and Psijic Guild skill lines skill line will persist, allowing looting Thieves Troves and Psijic portals. Blade of Woe still continues to function (Please, keep in mind that is per character! Psijic quest (it is long) unlocking the line (and subsequent ones (long too)) is fun only first 9 times.., after that it starts becoming annoying)
- Housing purchased in DLC zones will persist, on exiting the house you would not enter a DLC zone, but teleport back to the location from which you have teleported to your house
- Furnishings exceeding non-ESO+ limits will stay, but you will not be able to re-add them if accidentally put away
- you would be able to allocate/deallocate Skill Points (with respec or by loading an Armory build) in the TG/DB/Psijic/JC/Scrying/Excavation skills you have already unlocked while progressing these skill lines.
- Antiquities will still allow you to scry from the map (though I am not sure it was intended by Zenimax)
thanks go to u/LordAsheye for the instructions: https://www.reddit.com/elderscrollsonline/comments/10kdvem/comment/j5rqmpd/?utm_source=share&utm_medium=web2x&context=3
What does not work:
- Jewelry Crafting skill line still requires Summerset (after ESO+ expires you can not access JC crafting stations if you don't own the DLC), but it makes a lot of sense to research Infused, Bloodthirsty and Swift traits for reconstructing stickerbook jewelry (thanks Kelinmiriel for this tip) as at any time you can buy the Transmute Station or visit your friends houses/guildhalls where the said station has been already deployed.
- You would not be able to further progress DB, TG and Psijic skill lines (if not maxed them) after free ESO+ trial ends.
- You can not play Tales of Trubute (if you have no access to High Isle) after trial end
- Companions of Blackwood and High Isle are decoupled from the zone for ESO+ Free trials (but, of course, work for the real subscriptions), Companions of Necrom are not accessible, because Necrom is the latest Chapter, which is not unlocked with ESO+ (trial or regular)
OTHER EASY THINGS to do:
- re-log with each character to make materials they carry to go into the Crafting Bag (after event it will turn into "extract-only" mode)
- unlock TG, DB and Psijic skill lines for each of your characters (looting a thieves trove is enough to unlock the TG line, so if you are lucky to spot the thing that saves a trip to Hew's Bane)
- collect skyshards, lorebooks, unlock exploration and questing dyes and achievements, check achievement furnishers (as they offer quite a lot of inexpensive and nice furnishings)
(LovelyNorth has an excellent achievement furnishers visual guide: http://lovelynorth.com/achievementfurnishings/)
- dye your costumes (this is done per character, so the same costume may be dyed differently on different characters)
- dye your Companions costumes (if you have Blackwood or High Isle or Necrom and unlocked them Companions)
- refine your raw materials, preferably on a character with the best refining passives and Meticulous Disassembly green CP star slotted
- if you do crafting dailies, then pack your CraftBag with everything. I’d suggest depositing a LOT of style stones (basic ones are 15g each at vendors located near crafting stations), potency runes (again, vendors), Ta runes, Mudcrab Chitin and Violet Coprinus. If you craft furnishings stock up with furnishing materials as well.
- pack your houses with 2x storage (utilize 2x furnishing limits at houses of any size)
- do the treasure maps (might be purchased at the Guild Traders) pointing to otherwise restricted zones
- if you decided to train Antiquities, then acquire new and do the existing leads in the unlocked DLC zones (if you decide to max up Antiquities skill lines (for the Ultimate difficulty furnishing leads) - the easy way to get level 7 lead (Void-Crystal Anomaly furnishing) is to harvest nodes in Coldharbour, as it drops surprisingly often there from resource nodes)
- attune your crafting stations to Order's Wrath (High Isle), Law of Julianos (Wrothgar) , New Moon Acolyte (Southern Elsweyr) (also: Clever Alchemist, Wretched Vitality, Mechanical Acuity (CWC), Coldharbor Favorite, Stuhn's Favor, Heartland Conqueror, and Ancient Dragonguard are quite good options too (imho), but that is you, who decides on that matter and most of the GuildHalls normally have them crafting stations).
- it is worth mentioning you can open your geodes to use doubled (1000) transmute crystal limit (though after the event you would not be able to add new crystals unless you consume the existing ones to make theirs number to drop below the “normal” 500 limit)
- purchasing alchemy ingredients to pack your CraftBag with is up to you (this may help to level up new characters uber-fast using batches of pre-crafted Master Achemy Writs), as well as buying uncommon style materials (for future gear crafting Master Writs). However, for both of these purposes I’d suggest just to subscribe to ESO+.
TIME-CONSUMING ACTIVITIES:
- collect Bound-On-Pickup group dungeons DLC gear for the collections book (unbound may be bought)
- quests and dungeons for rewards, achievements and collectibles (like Elsweyr free housing or Elsweyr+Dragonhold Epilogue free flying pet, undaunted trophies.. Pirharri the Smuggler assistant, etc etc..)
- doing DLC dungeons for bound gear, skillpoints, achievements (including skins for achievements in veteran DLC dungeons), motif pages drops and trophies
- if you are for good DPS sets: on normal Falkreath Hold (for Pillar of Nirn) is soloable, just block minotaurs heavy attacks. Frostvault (for Tzogvin's Warband) is soloable too, just get tanky to kill the troll. And you don’t need 60+ runs as you get armor pieces rather quick so you can reconstruct them later (for 50..60 crystals, not 25, but, anyway..). Weapons require more runs, though..
- doing DLC trials with friends for skins, gear and achievement. UESP: https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Trials
- Zones story quests reward with skillpoints (especially smaller zones: CWC -8, Murkmire – 7, Southern Elsweyr – 6+3, Markarth – 6+3, The Deadlands – 6+3, Firesong – 6+3 (6+3 means 6 from smaller zone DLC plus 3 from epilogue quests completing one year arc (if the appropriate big zone DLC story line completed))). (Thanks to u/RadioRy for this recommendation) Also: warning: it takes only several hours for these storylines if you rush the dialogues, however – rushing is not recommended if you are for stories or RP.
- do public dungeons group events in Summerset Isles, Northern Elsweyr, Greymoor, Blackwood, High Isle and Wrothgar for the skill points (Atoll of Immolation is, technically, a public dungeon too, but does not reward you with a skillpoint. Enter it from The Deadlands, not from Blackwood)
Game-Maps.com has the excellent public dungeons maps https://game-maps.com/ESO/ESO-Public-Dungeon.asp
On PC use the Urich's Skill Point Finder addon to check your quests, skyshards and dungeons skillpoints https://www.esoui.com/downloads/info1863-UrichsSkillPointFinder.html
- check UESP full list of mementos: https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Mementos (“DLC and Chapters” is a sepatare section), maybe you would like to unlock some
- completing skill lines (DB, TG, Psijic)
- complete maps (do world bosses if you please)
- complete fishing Achievements
- do DLC dungeons with friends on veteran difficulty for skins, costumes, titles and other nice rewards
Now some details about fashion for those, who might be interested in that stuff. Skip if not.
Five sections below do not include veteran hard-mode dungeons and trials rewards and achievements, as not 100% of the players do these activities. Let’s talk relatively easy things, OKay?
(Base Game, Morrowind, and Imperial City goodies are not included for the obvious reason – no connection with ESO+, though Shadowfen skeleton or Vvardenfell Scarlett Judge costume are mentioned in the comments each and every time). Dyes are too numerous, so I decided not to overload this document. Check UESP for dyes, please.
I also skipped titles, mementos and emotes to keep this text reasonably compact.
GETTING COSTUMES (not including the ones from the tradeable fragments)
- Antiquarian Field Garb & Antiquarian Robes - gained by progressing scrying and excavating antiquities - Regalia of the Orsimer King - completing Orsinium storyline quests - Cavalier of the Sworn Oath Old Orsinium Sentry Trinimac's Penitent Knight - questing in Wrothgar - Merchant Lord's Formal Regalia - obtained by progressing Thieves Guild story quest - Shrouded Armor - you get it at the very start of Dark Brotherhood story-line quests - Thieves Guild Leathers - you get it just by starting Thieves guild questline - Za'ji's Dragonguard Uniform - completing Southern Elsweyr questline - Oblivion Explorer Garb – obtained during The Deadlands zone story - Courtly Traveling Attire – complete High Isle zone story - Black Hand Robe – complete Dark Brotherhood story - The Fate Scryer Costume - obtained during Necrom zone quest
HATS (not including “instant” ones)
- Nighthunter's Cowl Hat – Antiquity on the High Isle - Ironclad Sarcoshroud – Antiquity in The Deadlands - Helm of the Black Fin – obtained during Blackwood zone quest line - Arkthzand Insight Vertex Shroud – Antiquity in Markarth DLC - Witchwise Headdress – obtained during The Reach story line quests - Dwemer Crown - the Antiquity lead drops from the group event boss in Nchuthnkarst public dungeon in Blackreach - Mask of Alkosh obtained by completing the Dragonhold main questline - Madgod’s Turban obtained with “The Lunacy of Two Moons” side quest in Northern Elsweyr - Psijic Skullcap is obtained on completing the Psijic Order quests line
NON-COMBAT PETS (not including “instant” ones)
- Phoenix Moth – awarded on completing Galen’s story line quests - Jerall Rescue Dog – obtained during Tales of Tribute quest line - Coral Haj Mota – combined from (tradeable) fragments from both High Isle public dungeons - Dremnaken Runt – obtained completing Blackwood + The Deadlands epilogue quest line - Bog Dog pet – obtained by exploration achievement in Blackwood (check ArzyeLBuilds guide https://arzyelbuilds.com/eso-lost-in-the-wilds-achievement-guide-blackwood-free-pet/) - Dwarven Scarab – 7 parts Antiquity from Markarth DLC. Thought Zeni claims they improved the drop rates, they still deserve much better :( - Somnolent Void Rot - obtained during Greymoor + Markarth epilogue quest line - Solitude Silver Wolf – obtained during Greymoor story line quests - Regal Dragon Imp flying pet obtained during Season of the Dragon Epilogue quests
FACE AND BODY MARKINGS (not including “instant” ones)
- Y’ffelon’s face and body marks obtained during Galen story quest line - Stonelore’s Legend Face and Body marks obtained during High Isle zone story - Fargrave Soullatice Face and Body obtained on completing The Deadlands story questline - Ysgramor’s Chosen Face Marking – antiquity lead in Western Skyrim - Ysgramor’s Chosen Body Marking obtained during Greymoor story quest - Dwemer Face Markings – antiquity lead from Colossus Charging Station WB in Blackreach - Dwemer Body Markings – antiquity lead from the boss of The Scraps delve in Western Skyrim - Face & Body Imprint of the Psijic Order are obtained during the Psijic Order quests line in Summerset - Abyssal Cephaliarch’s Face Art – completing the quest “A Hidden Fate” in Necrom - Body Art – completing the quest “A Calamity of Fate” in Necrom
SKINS
- Barkroot Blessing is 10 parts antiquity from Galen https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Barkroot_Blessing (i will be honest: I gave up with this skin after using 25+ Galen treasure maps with zero freakin’ lead drop; may the luck follow you, tamrielings!:)
OTHER COSMETICS
- Ascendant Lord’s Greatsword – style page awarded for completing High Isle + Firesong epilogue quests chain - Eldertide Style – shoulder style Antiquity from Galen Treasure Map I - Pelin’s Paragon outfit style pages drop from Tales of Tribute dailies rewards containers - Bog Blight Funerary Mask Style – hat style Antiquity from Blackwood - Leyawiin Brigadine Shield Style – obtained by completing Blackwood zone story line - Malign Ambitions Crow – major adornment obtained during story line quests in Blackwood - Antiquarian's Pickaxe is a two-handed weapon style acquired by reaching the max rank in the Excavation Skill Line - Wolf of Solitude Replica Sword is one-handed weapon style obtained during Greymoor storyline quests - Karthwatch Sigil Shield outfit style is also obtained during Greymoor storyline quests - Wolfcrown of Solitude adornment obtained on finishing Greymoor story line quests - Topal Corsair outfit style pages are awarded for completing different quests in Southern Elsweyr - Ancient & Pristine Moon Crescent Styles are sickle-like one-handed weapon styles obtained by completing side quests chain given by Vastarie NPC in Northern Elsweyr - Skyterror Dragonslayer Style are helm and shoulder outfit styles granted during Northern Elsweyr storyline quests - Mystic Eye Psijic Cuirass outfit Style is obtained during the Summerset zone story - Psijic Warden Gauntlets outfit Style is also obtained during the Summerset zone story - Shroomtender outfit pages are a reward for completing various achievements associated with the exploration of Necrom
DAILIES
UESP has a comprehensive list of dailies and how to unlock them: https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Repeatable_Quests
FURNISHING PLANS
(though I would not recommend this because of cooldowns and limited time of the Event, but this is still a good clean family entertainment to diversify your activities. Wrothgar: loot Old Orsinium; CWC: steal in Brass Fortress Basilica; Summerset loot Shimmerene Monastery; Murkmire: steal in Lilmoth and Bright-Throat Village; Northern Elsweyr: loot Rimmen Royal Palace (Dragonhold added no new furnishing plans); Greymoor: loot Nchuthnkarst; Markarth: loot Bthar-Zel (unlocked during the zone quest); Blackwood: steal in Leaywiin Castle; The Deadlands: steal in The Bearer’s Rest in Fargrave, High Isle: loot Castle Navire, Galen: steal in Maltheo Rouillac's House in Vastyr). Necrom loot in Sailenmora Crypts (you have to start the "a thif to catch a thief" quest, but NOT finish it, otherwise you lose access to this place (very juicy from the start, now seriously nerfed))
Swap characters after blue or purple plan drop (the cooldown for blues is one hour per character). I would also suggest to swap characters after you start getting white furnishing plans. Slot “Homemaker” green CP star.
OTHER LONG-TERM ACTIVITIES:
- doing Museum quests for unique furnishing items and costumes ( https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Museums )
- farming bound collectibles fragments in public dungeons (https://en.uesp.net/wiki/Online:Fragments)
- digging mythics and other antiquities (wolfie mount, music box, dance emote, face and body markings, cosmetics, and fancy furnishings, as there are many great-looking Antiquities furnishings)
- do the surveys and refine as much as you can to stock up your CraftBag (ideally to hold up till the next ESO+ free event)
- DO THE SOLO ARENAS: the Maelstrom Arena weapons are still great, also the Vateshran Hollows weapons are good and achievements (unlocking skin and dyes may be done on a veteran difficulty).
BlackRose Prison weapons are also good, but you would prefer to go with friend(s), as this group arena is noticeably harder than the soloable nDSA.
(reminder: Curated drops in Arenas work only on the final chest)
Completing veteran MA unlocks Maelstrom Baron polymorph, completing veteran VH unlocks Void Pathosis skin.
TIP: Set up your priorities!
As there are a LOT of things to be done and time is the essence, I’d suggest getting instant freebies first (it takes less than an hour) and then focus on what you consider the most important (like mythics, or trial/dungeons gear, or some free stuff requiring questing, or dailies, or just exploration, etc) as this depends on what brings you the most fun. The ESO is a MMO game, after all!
Be sure to check the comprehensive list of collectibles compiled by Benevolent Bowd (benevolentbowd):
https://benevolentbowd.ca/games/esotu/eso-making-the-most-of-it/
http://benevolentbowd.ca/games/esotu/esotu-unlockable-collectibles/
Friendly reminder: collectibles, mementos, emotes, dyes and currencies are account-wide.
If I have missed anything essential (I intentionally omitted Base Game, Vvardenfell and Imperial City things as they do not depend on ESO+), please, post that in the comments to help making this guide better. Thank you.
Good luck, friends.
Have fun
P.S. FAQ: the most frequent questions are:
- How to activate the ESO+ trial? - Normally the magic sequence is: inagme Crown Store, select the ESO Plus tab, select “Free Trial!” ( official instructionhttps://www.elderscrollsonline.com/en-us/news/post/66079 ) - How long does it last? - Normally seven days. Check the official site for precise information. Event ends on June 19 14:00 UTC - is this once in a lifetime promotion? - No. You can participate in all the subsequent ESO+ free trial events whenever they happen - How often such promotions do happen? – it is hard to say, normally 2-3 times a year, but there are no schedule and warranties. - I am already subscribed. Do I benefit from this event? - Not really. - Does this week adds to existing subscriptions? – Nope. - Does free ESO+ trial unlocks Warden & Necromancer classes ?– Nope. - How long does it take to pick up all of them instant loyalty rewards? - Normally less than an hour. - Any free mounts? - Ebon Dwarven Mount from Antiquities. There are also other mounts but it depends. Mounts are granted for trifectas DLC Trials achievements, but they are really hard to obtain, as it takes highly coordinated capable group to achieve vet HM speed-run no-death. Antiquties wolf mount could be unlocked in one week but this takes some serious no-lifing. :) - What will happen with the Craftbag? - it will go into “extract only” mode, you will not lose your materials. u/Kelinmiriel explained the order materials are consumed when crafting: the game uses 1) any stolen materials you're carrying, 2) materials from your craft bag, 3) non-stolen materials in your inventory. You have no choice about this. - Do I keep all these collectibles and items I have obtained? – Sure!
Stay safe, folx!
2024.06.07 20:30 some_kind_of_bird I'm recovering from amnesia related to autism. It's an incredible, positive, profound change. Also I'm not sure I can work anymore.
I lost my job recently after a profound, positive change in me and I don't know where to go from here. I'm not sure what I've written flows well so bear with me. I'll start with what the job was.
I had a really flexible, accommodating workplace. If I couldn't handle something I didn't usually have to do it. If I really needed a break I got one. I had good, supportive coworkers who tolerated my quirks and even compensated for them. It doesn't go as far as I like but it's related to my interests. I had a consistent schedule. There's only a few employees there, which I can usually handle socially. Abuse from customers wasn't tolerated.
I also didn't really find work the regular way. I was basically offered the job because I was friends with the then-manager. I was lucky I didn't get fired when I started because I had to ask things so so so many times and lost things and took ages to do anything quickly or adapt. I've seen other people start and it's not the same at all.
I don't know if I can find something like that again, and while I became good at it truth be told I was often in a haze and underperformed. It was very chaotic, by my measurement. You had to do things "when there was time" and it was constantly juggling eggs. I have a phone phobia and while it's not too bad in that context once I had a ton of practice, I still had to make myself do it. I varied a lot in how well I could do, and sometimes I was so stressed I could barely stand. By the end they usually let me stick to a task instead of juggling as much as everyone else. Perks of being the veteran.
Even if it's out there, I lucked out and was offered this job. I have tried and it's so hard even applying for jobs. Interviews are so fucking terrifying. I just can't do it, at least on my own.
Meanwhile at home I'm a fucking disaster. Work was the only thing I got right. I have ADHD and everything is a soup of misplaced objects. There's trash everywhere, kitchen counters covered in dishes, nothing is clean. A couple times a year I have to learn the lesson that if I don't take showers regularly I'll get painful sores on my head and my scalp feeling weird is what prompts a shower. Laundry is a matter of how long I can go before the embarrassment kicks in. I couldn't make appointments unless it's an emergency if I don't, even if I need it, and I still had to ask for help sometimes or put it off so long I'd have a gap in meds. When I started working at a different location and didn't go to the grocery store almost every day it became very difficult to go, even when it's for the pharmacy. I have to do something constantly to keep doing it, especially when there's social anxiety. It used to be that I couldn't go anywhere by myself at all, and now I only probably can't.
I was sometimes happy, but never really ok. Indulging in my interests helped a lot.
Here's where it gets VERY interesting. I lost that job when I couldn't go for too long. I couldn't go because I've had a bit of an "event" to put it mildly. To vastly simplify it, basically it turns out I masked SO hard I forgot I'm autistic, like FORGOT not in denial. I was diagnosed at 2 and I just found out at 31. Trauma around it, obviously. I'm recovering from that amnesia and the sheer amount of information is absurd. I've called people to verify the memories and yeah they're the real deal. There's like a merger of personalities kinda with my old memories. Autism explains SO much and I'm figuring out what unmasked me looks like. Apparently I'm a proper autism creature lol. I act so strangely now. I'm so much happier. I can't describe it.
My approach is so completely different now. I don't feel like I have to justify every single action. I've resolved trauma and it's like I can breathe for the first time. Normally there's so many gaps in time during the day, all staccato, but now it's more continuous. For a little while I had to stop myself from adding "man" to the end of every sentence because that's how I used to talk lol. Honestly trying to summarize it is impossible. Everything is different. I think I'm still the same person, but also not. It's beyond profound.
I'm kinda scared of masking again, too. It's not what it is, I think, but I'm ngl Dissociative Identity Disorder is looking a bit too relatable rn. What happens when I put my mind in that state? What's going to happen to me? I'm probably over-worrying, but I don't think it's an unreasonable concern. They aren't separate things exactly, like I've been able to link everything up, but it's a different subjectivity/perspective and set of habits and I want to be really careful that it stays conscious. I'm certainly not going to try until I'm ready and I'm sure I can make it back to this. Maybe it's better to try re-learning how to mask instead? I think I want to re-visit it eventually.
Another important development is that after what just happened to me I'm VERY keen on being nobody but myself at this point... so I'm reducing or maybe getting off of quetiapine(Seroquel). I'm sure I'll still take it sometimes, but I can't think deeply in a particular way that really matters to me, and it sort of "smears things out" in a way that's hard to describe.
It comes at a cost, though. Before the quetiapine my meltdowns were absolutely debilitating. I don't know how I'll be this time because I'm healthier now, and who the fuck knows what's up with my brain, but before I was on it I basically developed a fear of any stressor. I had to constantly isolate myself. Someone suggested to me that it'll be ok and I just need different meds, but tbh I really doubt I'll find something as good as quetiapine. It's almost perfect. I feel like the part of me it blurs is the same thing that causes meltdowns to happen. There's no fixing this.
Don't worry btw; I'm tapering and seeing how it goes. I'm being decisive but not reckless. With quetiapine I'm confident in how it works for me.
I was going to move far away anyway in a few months and have enough savings to coast, so now's kind of a big opportunity to fix shit. The move is my found family reuniting and trying to take care of each other. They mean the world to me. They're all disabled in various ways too and things were already looking shakey tbh. I don't know how things will develop from here, but it's been in planning for years.
More good news is I started vyvanse and it's great. It's a little dangerous because it enhances my hyperfocus and I'm having trouble drinking enough water because of that, but I can plan around that and I'm actually getting some shit done and making a routine. I still need to ask for help a lot, but for me it's life changing. I wasn't as worried before because I'm a disaster anyway but it seems like I'm actually establishing a routine and I'm so so so so scared of losing that with the move. If I have sufficient support and a few months I think I'll be ok, but tbh the amount of help I need before staying on top of things on my own might be more substantial than I have access to, and I might always need someone to check on me. I'm kinda realizing the extent of my disabilities and I can't believe I've gone this long.
Overall I'm doing really good and I think I might be coasting on hypomania rn which isn't a bad thing, but the routine isn't established yet and it's not easy to start. The new whiteboard and talking to myself helps. When I look at everything though, it's honestly just a completely unprecedented scenario. My new psychology is so much healthier, but it's new to me and I don't know how stable it is; I know I'll be changing a lot for a long time. I've still got this constant trickle of memories. Hypomania always ends eventually and I hope I don't crash into depression. I stim a LOT more than I used to and sometimes even that's not enough and I become overwhelmed. I'm in almost the best possible scenario trigger-wise. I feel like I'm on top of the world, but I'm not naive. If I don't make a routine and fix shit now it could go very badly. If I add in a couple stressors it could go very badly.
I should probably mention a relevant development. I made another post about it if you want the full story, but basically I decided to protect my hearing on a (evidenced) whim. Then all my defenses dropped and now I'm hypersensitive and need to wear earplugs, probably permanently. I feel better but yeah it's making some things difficult. With the level of dissociation I was on it's hard to tell how much sound was affecting me before, but it's certainly affecting me now. There's some changes in my sight too. Either I've become aware of something profoundly affecting me or I've just made myself more disabled. It's hard to say. It is beautiful, though, if overwhelming. I'm calmer. I think I'm glad it happened. Sight's a bit different, too. Not too bad so far.
Given the sensory changes and the dissociation changes and the amnesia I should probably talk to a neurologist or something too, huh? I think this is all psychological in origin but it seems like a good idea anyway. Also my tic changed from a brief shudder to a small grunt/shout so that's "cool." Adult-onset tic disorders are super rare but that's what the neurologist said it was when it started a few years ago. I'm not sure it's a normal tic tbh but I won't get into it unless someone's curious.
There's this government assistance case manager thing I'm trying to get set up on. I have a therapist now I see twice a week. Hopefully they can help me. I don't have insurance but the COBRA thing is in the mail, I'm told. I have a couple of friends that can help me now and then.
Oh I should mention that while I am diagnosed, I don't have the documentation. I tried looking into psychological testing but appointments go out beyond my move date, at least where I checked. At the start of this I became very interested in autism and there's really no question, but yeah it's not documented.
To review: Earth-shattering batshit amnesia autism thing happens; I've lost my job but am safe for a while; I'm happier and healthier than I've ever been but also more vulnerable and there's a LOT of unknowns; I've got a time limit of a few months before moving and I can't really handle moving. Any thoughts or insights or advice or questions or even a "wow that's whack" are welcome.
submitted by some_kind_of_bird to autism [link] [comments]
I had a really flexible, accommodating workplace. If I couldn't handle something I didn't usually have to do it. If I really needed a break I got one. I had good, supportive coworkers who tolerated my quirks and even compensated for them. It doesn't go as far as I like but it's related to my interests. I had a consistent schedule. There's only a few employees there, which I can usually handle socially. Abuse from customers wasn't tolerated.
I also didn't really find work the regular way. I was basically offered the job because I was friends with the then-manager. I was lucky I didn't get fired when I started because I had to ask things so so so many times and lost things and took ages to do anything quickly or adapt. I've seen other people start and it's not the same at all.
I don't know if I can find something like that again, and while I became good at it truth be told I was often in a haze and underperformed. It was very chaotic, by my measurement. You had to do things "when there was time" and it was constantly juggling eggs. I have a phone phobia and while it's not too bad in that context once I had a ton of practice, I still had to make myself do it. I varied a lot in how well I could do, and sometimes I was so stressed I could barely stand. By the end they usually let me stick to a task instead of juggling as much as everyone else. Perks of being the veteran.
Even if it's out there, I lucked out and was offered this job. I have tried and it's so hard even applying for jobs. Interviews are so fucking terrifying. I just can't do it, at least on my own.
Meanwhile at home I'm a fucking disaster. Work was the only thing I got right. I have ADHD and everything is a soup of misplaced objects. There's trash everywhere, kitchen counters covered in dishes, nothing is clean. A couple times a year I have to learn the lesson that if I don't take showers regularly I'll get painful sores on my head and my scalp feeling weird is what prompts a shower. Laundry is a matter of how long I can go before the embarrassment kicks in. I couldn't make appointments unless it's an emergency if I don't, even if I need it, and I still had to ask for help sometimes or put it off so long I'd have a gap in meds. When I started working at a different location and didn't go to the grocery store almost every day it became very difficult to go, even when it's for the pharmacy. I have to do something constantly to keep doing it, especially when there's social anxiety. It used to be that I couldn't go anywhere by myself at all, and now I only probably can't.
I was sometimes happy, but never really ok. Indulging in my interests helped a lot.
Here's where it gets VERY interesting. I lost that job when I couldn't go for too long. I couldn't go because I've had a bit of an "event" to put it mildly. To vastly simplify it, basically it turns out I masked SO hard I forgot I'm autistic, like FORGOT not in denial. I was diagnosed at 2 and I just found out at 31. Trauma around it, obviously. I'm recovering from that amnesia and the sheer amount of information is absurd. I've called people to verify the memories and yeah they're the real deal. There's like a merger of personalities kinda with my old memories. Autism explains SO much and I'm figuring out what unmasked me looks like. Apparently I'm a proper autism creature lol. I act so strangely now. I'm so much happier. I can't describe it.
My approach is so completely different now. I don't feel like I have to justify every single action. I've resolved trauma and it's like I can breathe for the first time. Normally there's so many gaps in time during the day, all staccato, but now it's more continuous. For a little while I had to stop myself from adding "man" to the end of every sentence because that's how I used to talk lol. Honestly trying to summarize it is impossible. Everything is different. I think I'm still the same person, but also not. It's beyond profound.
I'm kinda scared of masking again, too. It's not what it is, I think, but I'm ngl Dissociative Identity Disorder is looking a bit too relatable rn. What happens when I put my mind in that state? What's going to happen to me? I'm probably over-worrying, but I don't think it's an unreasonable concern. They aren't separate things exactly, like I've been able to link everything up, but it's a different subjectivity/perspective and set of habits and I want to be really careful that it stays conscious. I'm certainly not going to try until I'm ready and I'm sure I can make it back to this. Maybe it's better to try re-learning how to mask instead? I think I want to re-visit it eventually.
Another important development is that after what just happened to me I'm VERY keen on being nobody but myself at this point... so I'm reducing or maybe getting off of quetiapine(Seroquel). I'm sure I'll still take it sometimes, but I can't think deeply in a particular way that really matters to me, and it sort of "smears things out" in a way that's hard to describe.
It comes at a cost, though. Before the quetiapine my meltdowns were absolutely debilitating. I don't know how I'll be this time because I'm healthier now, and who the fuck knows what's up with my brain, but before I was on it I basically developed a fear of any stressor. I had to constantly isolate myself. Someone suggested to me that it'll be ok and I just need different meds, but tbh I really doubt I'll find something as good as quetiapine. It's almost perfect. I feel like the part of me it blurs is the same thing that causes meltdowns to happen. There's no fixing this.
Don't worry btw; I'm tapering and seeing how it goes. I'm being decisive but not reckless. With quetiapine I'm confident in how it works for me.
I was going to move far away anyway in a few months and have enough savings to coast, so now's kind of a big opportunity to fix shit. The move is my found family reuniting and trying to take care of each other. They mean the world to me. They're all disabled in various ways too and things were already looking shakey tbh. I don't know how things will develop from here, but it's been in planning for years.
More good news is I started vyvanse and it's great. It's a little dangerous because it enhances my hyperfocus and I'm having trouble drinking enough water because of that, but I can plan around that and I'm actually getting some shit done and making a routine. I still need to ask for help a lot, but for me it's life changing. I wasn't as worried before because I'm a disaster anyway but it seems like I'm actually establishing a routine and I'm so so so so scared of losing that with the move. If I have sufficient support and a few months I think I'll be ok, but tbh the amount of help I need before staying on top of things on my own might be more substantial than I have access to, and I might always need someone to check on me. I'm kinda realizing the extent of my disabilities and I can't believe I've gone this long.
Overall I'm doing really good and I think I might be coasting on hypomania rn which isn't a bad thing, but the routine isn't established yet and it's not easy to start. The new whiteboard and talking to myself helps. When I look at everything though, it's honestly just a completely unprecedented scenario. My new psychology is so much healthier, but it's new to me and I don't know how stable it is; I know I'll be changing a lot for a long time. I've still got this constant trickle of memories. Hypomania always ends eventually and I hope I don't crash into depression. I stim a LOT more than I used to and sometimes even that's not enough and I become overwhelmed. I'm in almost the best possible scenario trigger-wise. I feel like I'm on top of the world, but I'm not naive. If I don't make a routine and fix shit now it could go very badly. If I add in a couple stressors it could go very badly.
I should probably mention a relevant development. I made another post about it if you want the full story, but basically I decided to protect my hearing on a (evidenced) whim. Then all my defenses dropped and now I'm hypersensitive and need to wear earplugs, probably permanently. I feel better but yeah it's making some things difficult. With the level of dissociation I was on it's hard to tell how much sound was affecting me before, but it's certainly affecting me now. There's some changes in my sight too. Either I've become aware of something profoundly affecting me or I've just made myself more disabled. It's hard to say. It is beautiful, though, if overwhelming. I'm calmer. I think I'm glad it happened. Sight's a bit different, too. Not too bad so far.
Given the sensory changes and the dissociation changes and the amnesia I should probably talk to a neurologist or something too, huh? I think this is all psychological in origin but it seems like a good idea anyway. Also my tic changed from a brief shudder to a small grunt/shout so that's "cool." Adult-onset tic disorders are super rare but that's what the neurologist said it was when it started a few years ago. I'm not sure it's a normal tic tbh but I won't get into it unless someone's curious.
There's this government assistance case manager thing I'm trying to get set up on. I have a therapist now I see twice a week. Hopefully they can help me. I don't have insurance but the COBRA thing is in the mail, I'm told. I have a couple of friends that can help me now and then.
Oh I should mention that while I am diagnosed, I don't have the documentation. I tried looking into psychological testing but appointments go out beyond my move date, at least where I checked. At the start of this I became very interested in autism and there's really no question, but yeah it's not documented.
To review: Earth-shattering batshit amnesia autism thing happens; I've lost my job but am safe for a while; I'm happier and healthier than I've ever been but also more vulnerable and there's a LOT of unknowns; I've got a time limit of a few months before moving and I can't really handle moving. Any thoughts or insights or advice or questions or even a "wow that's whack" are welcome.
2024.06.07 20:26 psb_20 Started my weight loss journey-here's what I am doing. Let me know tips/suggestions!
Hello everyone. I'm 22 (male) years old, 5'7", and weigh 225 lbs. I used to be skinny but slowly my weight increased over the years. The two big jumps in my weight were when I was 12 years old and the second one was when I moved to the US at 18 years old.
After countless efforts of starting exercising and dieting, I finally have been committed to a plan for 5 days now (the longest I've stayed put yet). I've been eating less than 1500 calories per day. No processed sugars are involved, only Splenda and natural sugar. See the meals I'm eating below and lemme know what to take out or what to add. I'm planning to add firm tofu soon.
Regarding exercising, I walk 2-3 miles every day, and if I'm up for it, some quick 15-20 minutes of cardio in my room which includes planks, push-ups, sit-ups, and jumping jacks. I have dumbbells but don't know what exercise to do with them.
I feel great and have had no fast food cravings. My initial goal is 185 lbs and we'll go from there. I anticipate reaching there by December or early next year if, of course, I stick to this.
Any suggestions? I could use some insights and help. Thank you!
Some of my meals: (I'm vegetarian plus eggs)
-Milk tea (2% milk) with a few biscuits. (around 200 calories)
-Bowl of egg whites, sour cream, roasted chickpeas, guacamole, lettuce and feta cheese (around 400 calories).
-Bowl of rice, non-fat yogurt, Indian-style potato-broccoli mixture.
-Small bowl of greek yogurt, banana, and strawberries.
-Low calorie flavored Great Value yogurts like strawberry-banana.
-Protein cake-made of eggs, protein powder, bananas, semi-sweet chocolate chips, and oats.
-Corn Flakes with 2% milk.
submitted by psb_20 to loseweight [link] [comments]
After countless efforts of starting exercising and dieting, I finally have been committed to a plan for 5 days now (the longest I've stayed put yet). I've been eating less than 1500 calories per day. No processed sugars are involved, only Splenda and natural sugar. See the meals I'm eating below and lemme know what to take out or what to add. I'm planning to add firm tofu soon.
Regarding exercising, I walk 2-3 miles every day, and if I'm up for it, some quick 15-20 minutes of cardio in my room which includes planks, push-ups, sit-ups, and jumping jacks. I have dumbbells but don't know what exercise to do with them.
I feel great and have had no fast food cravings. My initial goal is 185 lbs and we'll go from there. I anticipate reaching there by December or early next year if, of course, I stick to this.
Any suggestions? I could use some insights and help. Thank you!
Some of my meals: (I'm vegetarian plus eggs)
-Milk tea (2% milk) with a few biscuits. (around 200 calories)
-Bowl of egg whites, sour cream, roasted chickpeas, guacamole, lettuce and feta cheese (around 400 calories).
-Bowl of rice, non-fat yogurt, Indian-style potato-broccoli mixture.
-Small bowl of greek yogurt, banana, and strawberries.
-Low calorie flavored Great Value yogurts like strawberry-banana.
-Protein cake-made of eggs, protein powder, bananas, semi-sweet chocolate chips, and oats.
-Corn Flakes with 2% milk.
2024.06.07 20:14 packmanwiscy r/NFL Top 100 Players of the 2023 Season - #100-91
Welcome to The 100-91 Reveal for the NFL Top 100 Players of the 2023 Season!
Players whose average rank landed them in places 100-91 are on this portion of the list revealed today. Players are associated with the team they finished playing for at the end of the 2023 seasonBelow you will see some write-ups from the community summarizing the players’ 2023 season and why they were among the best in 2023. Stats for each player are included below. Additionally, their ranks from previous years are available for y’all to see
METHODOLOGY
Link to more detailed writeup on our methodology- Step 1: A Call to Rankers right after the Conference Championship games
- Step 2: Rankers from each team nominated players to rank, with a 11 game minimum threshold. Players are associated with the team they played for in 2023
- Step 3: The Grind. We instructed users to tier positions groups into T25, T50, etc based on 2023 regular season play only. This took several weeks as the rankers tiered each position group and discussed them. There were no individual player threads and no arbitrary position caps. Just questions and rankings.
- Step 4: Users submitted their own personal Top 125 lists.
- Step 5: User lists were reviewed by myself, u/mattkud, and u/MikeTysonChicken . The rankers were expected to answer questions about their lists. They were allowed to make any changes to their list, and were not forced to make any changes
- Step 6: The Reveal… where we are now!
#100 - Stefon Diggs - Buffalo Bills - Wide Receiver
Previous Ranks| 2022 | 2021 | 2020 | 2019 | 2018 | 2017 | 2016 | 2015 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 22 | 38 | 10 | 74 | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
Following yet another offseason of cryptic tweets and drama, Stefon Diggs showed up from the onset of the 2023 season as red hot as the lasers he was catching off the arm of Josh Allen - making it clear he came to play and leave everything out on the field. However, 2023 was a tale of two Diggs’ - and that's not a reference to Stefon's brother, Trevon, who unfortunately was out for the season prior to their two teams facing off in week 15.
Through the first 6 games of the year, Stefon Diggs was averaging 8 catches, 104 Yards, and nearly a touchdown per game. During that time, the Bills passing offense funneled the ball through Diggs and relied on his ability to make plays all over the field to remain productive. Diggs answered the call and delivered the type of results we've come to expect of him, however just like the team itself, Diggs’ season would fall off pretty harshly following the team's week 6 match up against the Giants. In the 11 remaining games of the season, he failed to produce a single 100-yard outing and would only catch 3 more total touchdowns on the year. It's important to acknowledge that the Bills as a whole struggled offensively between weeks 5 and 10, directly leading to Offensive Coordinator Ken Dorsey's firing after Buffalo’s week 10, 24-22, loss to Denver - a game in which Diggs only caught 3 passes for a total of 34 yards.
Once Joe Brady stepped in as Interim Coordinator, the Bills offense began healing as a result of changes made to their strategy, changes which resulted in a more balanced attack that trusted the run game and prioritized spreading passes around to a wider selection of targets in the air. This shift meant Diggs was on the field less, in addition to receiving less targets when he was out there running routes. The impact of this change is most plainly obvious when comparing Diggs’ stats from weeks 1-8 to 9-16. While this adjustment ultimately worked out in Buffalo's favor (they would close out the last 7 games of the year with a 6-1 record), it did drive an unfortunate statistical drop for Diggs. Diggs would still flash his elite hands and skills often enough to finish the season respectively though, earning a spot in the pro-bowl as well as finishing #13 in total receiving yards and #7 in total receptions. Tragically, what he will probably be remembered most for this past year (at least in the minds of Bills Mafia) will be the ugly, game-altering drop he had late in the Divisional round matchup against Kansas City.
Throughout 2023 there were all manner of rumors on whether Diggs was playing through an undisclosed injury or experiencing a falling out with the organization, true or not, it would be foolish to claim that Diggs isn't still a premier pass catcher in the NFL. Now a Houston Texan, Stefon Diggs will serve as another weapon for C.J. Stroud to take advantage of in 2024. Assuming he doesn't destroy the culture in Houston by manifesting into some sort of target-hoovering diva-demon like all the tired sports media personalities predict, expect the former Bills Captain to be a key contributor for the Texans next year.
#99 - Lavonte David - Tampa Bay Buccaneers - Off-Ball Linebacker
Previous Ranks| 2022 | 2021 | 2020 | 2019 | 2018 | 2017 | 2016 | 2015 | 2014 | 2013 | 2012 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 60 | 95 | 43 | 76 | N/A | 35 | N/A | 99 | 27 | 11 | N/A |
After flirting with retirement and leaving Tampa Bay last offseason, Lavonte David stuck around for another year as a Buccaneer - year 12 (and soon to be year 13). And it paid off, yet again, as David stayed the impactful, complete LB he has been for over a decade.
Playing 956 (98%) defensive snaps, David was impactful across the board, recording 99 tackles (134 combined per pfr) with a 5.7% missed tackle rate, 4.5 sacks with 19 total pressures on only 76 pass rush opportunities, 5 forced incompletions and 1.1 yards per cover snap, and a ridiculous 61 run stops and 17 TFLs. His coverage stats took a bit of a dip from the past, but he was still solid while being incredibly impactful against the run. He's smart - see here how he diagnoses quickly, and beats the blocker to the spot before sticking the TE for a loss. He's exceptional at slithering through OLs - see here and here how he uses his speed and awareness to split through holes in the line and finish the play before it can start. Despite being 33, he's still really fast - if you're late on rotating in pass protection, he's already past you and sacking the QB. And he's always had a nose for the football.
David has been one of my favorite players of the 2010s and it will be sad to see him go. Few LBs are as complete as Lavonte has been for his career - he can do everything you want from an offball LB. Given that he's likely to retire pretty soon, this might be the last time he appears on this list, so I'm gonna break the rules a bit. Lavonte has always stood out statistically in two ways, by forcing fumbles and TFLs. As for FFs, the only LB with more is Cornelius Bennett, who was somewhat of a hybrid rushbacke4-3 OLB. Which means that among true off ball LBs, nobody has forced more fumbles than Lavonte David (tbf only tracked reliably since 1993). Similarly, I've never seen a player as adept at slicing through blockers to make a TFL. He has 160 career TFLs, 9th all time. No other offball LB is in the top 20, and only 4 other LBs have even 100. We might as well start giving out the "Lavonte David award" to whoever leads LBs in TFLs.
Put him in the HOF, cowards.
#98 - Bradley Chubb - Miami Dolphins - EDGE Rusher
Previous Ranks| 2022 | 2021 | 2020 | 2019 | 2018 |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
One word has followed Chubb throughout his career: Dynamic. Coming into his second year in a Dolphins jersey off a five-year, $110 million contract extension (recently restructured in the wake of injury)—Chubb managed to arguably elevate to higher levels of said dynamic play than even in previous seasons that saw him earn Pro Bowl recognition.
In 16 games this season, Chubb managed to thrive in a defense that utilized its front 7 in unconventional manners. Of the 837 snaps Chubb played: 36% of snaps against the rush, 57% against the pass, and 7% in pass coverage (top 20 in EDGE coverage snaps…over a dozen in the slot). Amongst his position, Chubb posted a top 10 pass rush win rate per ESPN along with top 15 pass rush and top 5 coverage grades per PFF respectively. This showed with 11 sacks, 73 total tackles, 44 hurries, and 6 forced fumbles (t-1st in NFL) over the season.
Chubb has an uphill battle going into the next season with a torn ACL acquired in Week 17 against the Ravens. Still in the prime of his career and a leader within the locker room, Chubb certainly seeks to return to this level of form as soon as possible. There's a lot of money on the table for him.
#97 - Kolton Miller - Las Vegas Raiders - Offensive Tackle
Previous Ranks| 2022 | 2021 | 2020 | 2019 | 2018 |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
Offensive tackles have always been highly sought after for one important reason; to keep their franchise quarterback healthy. Miller had a slightly different objective; keep Jimmy Garoppolo handsome, it's fine if he misses the season since he was far from a franchise quarterback; but Miller excelled, allowing the least pressures (only 16 pressures per PFF, compared to 18 for Tyron Smith and Trent Williams) out of any premier tackle. While he missed a few games due to a shoulder injury, Miller put in enough work to prove he's a top 100 player in the league.
Always one of the more underappreciated OTs in the league, Miller's impact was best felt by his absence; in the first missed game of his career, Jets defenders got to Aidan O'Connell several times, and the rest of the offensive line just looked flimsy.
Combining agile, quick footwork with enough armpower to seal off some of the biggest men in the NFL, Miller quietly dominated opposing pass rushers, and #74 could even scale multiple levels on the run to help his team generate big plays. Even when it didn't seem like there was much worth fighting for, Miller never gave up hope.
#96 - Dion Dawkins - Buffalo Bills - Offensive Tackle
Previous Ranks| 2022 | 2021 | 2020 | 2019 | 2018 | 2017 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
The shnowman cracks the top 100 this year after a dominating performance in the trenches all season long. While offensive line play can be hard to parse and judge, Dawkins ranked 4th in the league among OTs in pass rush win rate at 93% and only allowed 1 sack. The 30-year-old from New Jersey (famously the home of the Giants and Jets) also provided numerous rare O-line highlights, such as the absolute shnowplow of a block he delivered against the Cowboys’ Damone Clark. His arguably career-best season also saw him named to the Pro Bowl for the third straight year.
The Bills shook up their skill positions on offense this off-season, but the core of the offensive line remains largely the same, and Dawkins will certainly be a leader of the unit. This off-season he signed a 3-year, $60.5 million extension, making him one of the highest-paid offensive linemen in the league. He has played in at least 15 games each season of his career so far, and Buffalo is clearly banking on his production to continue as the rest of the offense takes a new shape.
This year, Dawkins was also Buffalo's nominee for the Walter Payton Man of the Year award, due in large part to his foundation Dion's Dreamers, which provides mentoring services to troubled youth. Dawkins has become highly involved in the Buffalo community since being drafted in the 2nd round in 2017.
#95 - James Cook - Buffalo Bills - Running Back
Previous Ranks| 2022 |
|---|
| N/A |
Being a running back in Josh Allen’s offense is a bit tricky. Allen is virtually a one-man offense, willing to not only sling the rock deep but also bruise out some yards on the ground for himself. For most of Allen’s tenure in Buffalo, Bills running backs haven’t been the most productive, failing to produce a single season with more than 1,100 scrimmage yards. When Buffalo selected James Cook in the 2nd round of the draft last year, they sought to give Allen a workhorse back that could efficiently eat touches and take the load off of Allen just a bit. After a timeshare in the first year, the Bills let Devin Singletary walk and gave Cook the lead back role, and he did not disappoint.
James Cook is a true modern running back. His lightning quick acceleration allows him to hit holes hard and bounce outside if they’re plugged. He’s not the biggest or strongest back, but he can still shrug off arm tackles and churn for extra yards. Pass catching out of the backfield is a key part of his game as well, for a running back he’s very proficient at route running, catching the ball in stride, and running after the catch. He does everything you want out of a running back in the 2020’s NFL, and he rewarded the Bills with the 6th most scrimmage yards in the league. He’ll have to do quite a bit to pass his brother in career stats, but this season was a great start.
#94 - Elgton Jenkins - Green Bay Packers - Offensive Guard
Previous Ranks| 2022 | 2021 | 2020 | 2019 |
|---|---|---|---|
| N/A | N/A | 77 | N/A |
One of the most powerful and positionally versatile offensive linemen in the NFL, Elgton Jenkins’ value to, and dominance on, the Packers OL has more than earned him his place on this list. Elgton is the engine that makes the Packers' run game go. Whether it be trapping, wrapping, or pulling to lead, Elgton is the Packers’ most-pulled lineman and their best (and one of THE best in the league) elevator to the second level on inside zone and duo run plays. Finally able to hunker down and stay, more or less, in the same position for a full season, Elgton was the driving influence on the Packers finishing top 10 in yards per attempt and top half in overall rushing offense, even while being near the bottom of the NFL in called run plays. It has yet to be mentioned how great he was in pass protection this year, as well. With a younger QB who at times held the ball a bit too long, Elgton allowed 0 sacks and had one of the lowest pressure rates allowed in football.
As mentioned before, Elgton is a dominant player in the run game because of the power he executes his blocks. His main weakness throughout his career has been his feet and ability to play in space, but this year he was tasked with reaching, trapping, and pulling to lead more than ever before. And as demonstrated here, he excelled in that role. The Packers were at their best when Jenkins was tasked with doubling and elevating or climbing to the second level immediately. Here, he displaces the LOS, comes off the 3T, and gets to the backer to create a lane for the back to follow into the endzone. In this example, the player engaged with the LT does not cross the LT’s face, so he quickly climbs to backer and creates a cut back lane for the back to gain 6-7 yards. As you can see, much of what the Packers did in the run game centered around 74, and he delivered time and time again.
In the pass game, Elgton used his strong anchor and well-timed striking to shut down every interior defensive lineman he faced. 0 sacks allowed, an absurdly low 4.4% pressure rate allowed, and the sheer dominance he displayed on tape has led many experts to call him a top 3 pass protecting guard in all of football. This is probably his biggest area of growth once making it to the NFL, as he always had the power in his lower half, but has improved his base and hand placement to truly stonewall any bull rushes he faces. And if you try and get cute by swimming or, god forbid, knowing your beat and jumping to swat the ball. Well, you will probably end up on your ass. He rose to the highest levels of competition, repeatedly shutting down (three examples there) the likes of Aaron Donald on a game-by-game basis.
Overall, Elgton Jenkins continues to push the established elite at the guard position, and with continued technical improvement, he looks to rise even higher on this list next season.
#93 - Will Anderson Jr - Houston Texans - EDGE Rusher
Previous RanksN/A
Will Anderson. What a full grown manderson. Only a rookie, but already the most electric pass rusher we've had since JJ Watt. His early season stats didn't quite show it, but since week 1 he's performed at a high rate already producing one of the top pressure rates in the league and opening up opportunities for the rest of the banderson. In four months, people went from criticizing Demeco and Caserio for trading a supposedly massive draft haul to Arizona for Anderson to realizing the incredible positive impact that the trade had. All according to planderson.
In his first season, Anderson showcased great pass rush ability, always working his way into the pocket, stuffed the run effectively, and even blocked a field goal; WAJ Swat, amirite? In fact, Lil Jon is rumored to be working on a song called "Turn Down for Wanderson", Daniels music video and all. JJ Watt is one of the all-time greats, but are the Terminator-Megawatt comparisons valid? Can Area 51 stand on the same ground as the Milkman?
(Yes, those are all real nicknames.)
Anderson's rookie year compares nicely with JJ’s , both on stat sheets and the eye test, and both got even better as the year went on; WAJ also walked away with the DROY award (though he didn't have to compete with Von Miller and... Aldon Smith?) Will he follow the same trajectory as JJ? In fact, he doesn't need to. It's fine if he doesn't. We don't need the greatest defensive end of the century, because Will Anderson is already damn good, does his job, and is certain to improve even further. Maybe he'll end with a gold jacket in Canton, maybe he won't, but we don't need that. What expectations we do have of him, he's easily exceeding, and on his current trajectory -- whether JJ-like or not -- he'll continue to exceed them for a long, long, time.
#92 - Deebo Samuel - San Francisco 49ers - Wide Receiver
Previous Ranks| 2022 | 2021 | 2020 | 2019 |
|---|---|---|---|
| N/A | 10 | N/A | N/A |
Deebo Samuel's 2023 season saw him compile 1117 total yards and 12 total touchdowns in 15 games (though that 15 includes a weird injured decoy game with 0 targets, a game with 9 snaps, and a quarter in a meaningless week 18). The best metric to summarize the impact that he has on the team: the 49ers were 11-1 when Deebo played more than 33% of snaps in a game and 1-4 when he did not.
8.8 yards after the catch per reception ranked first among receivers, making this the fourth consecutive season that Deebo holds that distinction (and he was 2nd as a rookie). The ascension of Brandon Aiyuk and full season from offensive player of the year Christian McCaffrey shrunk the role of one of the league's most exciting players, but he made the most of the opportunities he got, ranking 8th in yards per target among players with 1000 yards.
The most memorable game of the year for him is undeniably his hat trick against the Eagles amidst a tense race for the 1 seed, capped off by a 46 yard all-YAC touchdown. Contrary to popular belief, this is actually not how he gets all of his touches. His longest touchdown of the season, a 54 yarder against Seattle, and one of his back shoulder TDs (a new feature off the offense this year!) put the wide in wide back to remind fans (and a couple loud players) that Deebo is more than capable of killing you on traditional routes.
This was the final season for #19 in the Bay Area (because he's changing his jersey number to 1) and he once again left it all out there, putting together enough production to clinch a spot on this list despite a diminished role.
#91 - Justin Simmons - Denver Broncos - Safety
Previous Ranks| 2022 | 2021 | 2020 | 2019 | 2018 | 2017 | 2016 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 69 | 59 | 55 | 24 | N/A | N/A | N/A |
Winners are remembered. The glory of sports comes from hoisting a trophy at the end, and everyone who touches it becomes immortal. To those who never touch it, they can still create a legacy through winning in other ways: big regular season games to get into the playoffs, and perhaps even winning a couple games in the tournament.
In this lens — losers have no space. Those who come up short get nothing. Sports are zero-sum. There are always winners and losers. Every immortality comes with a death.
Justin Simmons played 118 games with the Denver Broncos since 2016. In his rookie year, the team went 9-7 but missed the playoffs. In every subsequent season, the Broncos had a losing record. Despite his All-Pro play, Simmons never played in a meaningful football game in late December or January. In a team with a history of winning — Justin Simmons was a loser.
A ball on a memorial in 2021. Spending a weekend at charity events in the city months after getting cut. Maybe the problem is the binary. Pursuit of immortality driving everyone mad to the point of blindness. There is the trophy and that matters, but there are more things in life too. There are the connections. There are the emotions.
Justin Simmons never won a big game in Denver. He never played in one. But in 2023 — as he had done throughout his career — he proved himself worthy of immortality in the Ring high above.
Link to Positional Tracker Sheet
Link to Ranker Reveal Sheet
Link to Hub
Link to Previous Post (Honorable Mentions)
2024.06.07 19:49 Hellisfullsohereiam Obsession
Obsession
Prologue
The room was impersonal, white and deathly hot. One table, three chairs, two people.
Intense eyes that are seemingly devoid of light. Hands, sticky and red folded in a semblance of calm. Tears sliding over an emotionless face dragging lines in the blood that didn’t dry yet.
The question that gets asked by the strict face on the other end of the table hangs in air between them, the air smells of iron.
‘why?’
after what seemed like an hour there comes a monotone answer:
‘Because i loved her’
Today is the day the world will end, and I will be the one to do it. The realization of what we are about to do sits heavy in my stomach but it is the only way, the only way She can be.
My girlfriend, I can't fathom why She would even choose me. We are traveling in my car, She is so beautiful. I feel guilty, She deserves so much better. She falls asleep, trusts me enough to be alone with me. She is my life, my death. My beginning and my end.
I gently shake her awake, we are there. The wind blows, white blonde hair tries to escape. Her scars shine in the sun, glitter and make her surrealistic. Broken and glued back together with gold. She takes my hand and laughs, her eyes change into little half moons.
A short walk from the meticulously picked parking lot, to the end. I am enjoying my time, She is here.The world is happy, despite everything.The world feels real. She does it, She saves me.
I relish in her now that it is still possible. We are prepared. We have to walk a little, a last cup of coffee, a conversation about everything except our plans. I can’t help but stare at her. Will I be able to honor my promise? I can do anything, for her
Who am i to reject her.
I can see her enjoying her time, something I haven't seen in a long time. I edge it into my memories.This day is special to her. Sacred, a last chance, a last wish
We walk on, she takes my hand again, warm and comfortable. I look at her as much as i can, white blonde hair, green blue eyes, a light scatter of freckles. Remember it, never forget it.
It has been a long time since i have seen her laugh this much, I love her. A tree and a street. We are at the place we have to be. I ask her one last time, are you sure? and i think; are you able to do this to me? Are you sure you are able to do this to me? Is it worth it? Is it worth the end of the world?
I look at her scars, woven gold on her body and know, the last scar will be the last and most beautiful i will reach in this life. I don't see a way out, I don't see any choices. Captured in her will, her love, her revenge. Her will and her desperation is the only worth I have. So I ring the doorbell. My hand goes to my bag, Just in case. She already has it in her hand
The door opens and there is a man. Elegant and put together. A wolf in sheep's clothing. Her eyes betray fear, desperation, rage and sorrow hiding her smile. She changes into stone, and fire and hell.
Before I know it there is a syringe in his neck, and he gets pushed inside. Tears stream over her cheeks, rivers of grief, weakness and fury. She becomes even more beautiful and powerful. A Goddess of vengeance, blood and the end.
I walk behind her and close the door, lock it and help her drag the body of the man that broke her. I know what he has done.
She didn’t have a chance, no hope, no mercy. When he was done with her she was a broken soul, smashed to pieces. Violated and murdered again and again. The only thing that remained was a hollow cocoon.
And i fell for her. I wanted to fill her up, glue her together with gold and rubies. And this is how, this is her only chance for peace, for vengeance and the peaceful nothing.
I am her last chance.
And I love her too much, I am not selfish enough. So I help her drag him, plant his paralyzed body on the couch and wait for her to return.
Is she wearing a white dress on purpose?
The world becomes unreal with the first stab, even more surreal then it already was. I stare, transfixed and obsessed. I follow how the knife goes in and out of the body. Staring at how her dress slowly changes into the color of life and death. How her rage spreads with the smell of blood. Until she is completely exhausted. And she laughs, in a way I have never heard her laugh before. Free and exuberant, all chains broken.
Then she walks up to me, still holding the knife.And in a split second of madness, I feel fear. Dread I had never felt before. Fear of death and damnation. But she turns the knife around and gives me the handle.
This is my hour, this is my time. This is the most important thing I will ever do in my life.
We agreed to this. This is her last wish, a last effort to give her happiness and bliss. There is no way I am going to decline, I don't have the right. So I take the knife, the sharpness and the cold that signal the ending of my world.
She falls on her knees before me. The trust and weakness she shows me by exposing her throat to me makes my heart swell with love. I caress her neck and give her one last heartwarming kiss full of passion, trust and surrender. I look pleadingly at her for one last time and ask with tears that keep streaming without end: ‘ Are you sure?, are you able to do this to me? Are you sure you are able to destroy my world for your freedom? Please tell me you want to live, please tell me that you can live for me?
She shakes her head, and I don't have a choice. My life is hers and she is my world. She wants to lay the world to ruin, so who am I to deny her that.
One last kiss, one last hug, and one last touch.
Then the knife slits through her throat, my face fills with tiny splashes of her life, tears won’t stop coming. As if a dam has broken in my soul.
The world is dead, the end is here.
Regret slithers through my veins, like a deadly poison. I try to stop the bleeding in a blind panic, I cry, and kiss and hug.
I am a monster.
As if I have been drained, a feeling of emptiness dawns on me, I am numb and calm, as I have never been before. It is as if I am in a trance, the world becomes unreal, the blood around me is a movie, a nightmare without end.
submitted by Hellisfullsohereiam to horrorstories [link] [comments]
Prologue
The room was impersonal, white and deathly hot. One table, three chairs, two people.
Intense eyes that are seemingly devoid of light. Hands, sticky and red folded in a semblance of calm. Tears sliding over an emotionless face dragging lines in the blood that didn’t dry yet.
The question that gets asked by the strict face on the other end of the table hangs in air between them, the air smells of iron.
‘why?’
after what seemed like an hour there comes a monotone answer:
‘Because i loved her’
Today is the day the world will end, and I will be the one to do it. The realization of what we are about to do sits heavy in my stomach but it is the only way, the only way She can be.
My girlfriend, I can't fathom why She would even choose me. We are traveling in my car, She is so beautiful. I feel guilty, She deserves so much better. She falls asleep, trusts me enough to be alone with me. She is my life, my death. My beginning and my end.
I gently shake her awake, we are there. The wind blows, white blonde hair tries to escape. Her scars shine in the sun, glitter and make her surrealistic. Broken and glued back together with gold. She takes my hand and laughs, her eyes change into little half moons.
A short walk from the meticulously picked parking lot, to the end. I am enjoying my time, She is here.The world is happy, despite everything.The world feels real. She does it, She saves me.
I relish in her now that it is still possible. We are prepared. We have to walk a little, a last cup of coffee, a conversation about everything except our plans. I can’t help but stare at her. Will I be able to honor my promise? I can do anything, for her
Who am i to reject her.
I can see her enjoying her time, something I haven't seen in a long time. I edge it into my memories.This day is special to her. Sacred, a last chance, a last wish
We walk on, she takes my hand again, warm and comfortable. I look at her as much as i can, white blonde hair, green blue eyes, a light scatter of freckles. Remember it, never forget it.
It has been a long time since i have seen her laugh this much, I love her. A tree and a street. We are at the place we have to be. I ask her one last time, are you sure? and i think; are you able to do this to me? Are you sure you are able to do this to me? Is it worth it? Is it worth the end of the world?
I look at her scars, woven gold on her body and know, the last scar will be the last and most beautiful i will reach in this life. I don't see a way out, I don't see any choices. Captured in her will, her love, her revenge. Her will and her desperation is the only worth I have. So I ring the doorbell. My hand goes to my bag, Just in case. She already has it in her hand
The door opens and there is a man. Elegant and put together. A wolf in sheep's clothing. Her eyes betray fear, desperation, rage and sorrow hiding her smile. She changes into stone, and fire and hell.
Before I know it there is a syringe in his neck, and he gets pushed inside. Tears stream over her cheeks, rivers of grief, weakness and fury. She becomes even more beautiful and powerful. A Goddess of vengeance, blood and the end.
I walk behind her and close the door, lock it and help her drag the body of the man that broke her. I know what he has done.
She didn’t have a chance, no hope, no mercy. When he was done with her she was a broken soul, smashed to pieces. Violated and murdered again and again. The only thing that remained was a hollow cocoon.
And i fell for her. I wanted to fill her up, glue her together with gold and rubies. And this is how, this is her only chance for peace, for vengeance and the peaceful nothing.
I am her last chance.
And I love her too much, I am not selfish enough. So I help her drag him, plant his paralyzed body on the couch and wait for her to return.
Is she wearing a white dress on purpose?
The world becomes unreal with the first stab, even more surreal then it already was. I stare, transfixed and obsessed. I follow how the knife goes in and out of the body. Staring at how her dress slowly changes into the color of life and death. How her rage spreads with the smell of blood. Until she is completely exhausted. And she laughs, in a way I have never heard her laugh before. Free and exuberant, all chains broken.
Then she walks up to me, still holding the knife.And in a split second of madness, I feel fear. Dread I had never felt before. Fear of death and damnation. But she turns the knife around and gives me the handle.
This is my hour, this is my time. This is the most important thing I will ever do in my life.
We agreed to this. This is her last wish, a last effort to give her happiness and bliss. There is no way I am going to decline, I don't have the right. So I take the knife, the sharpness and the cold that signal the ending of my world.
She falls on her knees before me. The trust and weakness she shows me by exposing her throat to me makes my heart swell with love. I caress her neck and give her one last heartwarming kiss full of passion, trust and surrender. I look pleadingly at her for one last time and ask with tears that keep streaming without end: ‘ Are you sure?, are you able to do this to me? Are you sure you are able to destroy my world for your freedom? Please tell me you want to live, please tell me that you can live for me?
She shakes her head, and I don't have a choice. My life is hers and she is my world. She wants to lay the world to ruin, so who am I to deny her that.
One last kiss, one last hug, and one last touch.
Then the knife slits through her throat, my face fills with tiny splashes of her life, tears won’t stop coming. As if a dam has broken in my soul.
The world is dead, the end is here.
Regret slithers through my veins, like a deadly poison. I try to stop the bleeding in a blind panic, I cry, and kiss and hug.
I am a monster.
As if I have been drained, a feeling of emptiness dawns on me, I am numb and calm, as I have never been before. It is as if I am in a trance, the world becomes unreal, the blood around me is a movie, a nightmare without end.
2024.06.07 19:42 LawyerVet36 The Chaos Begins - Saturday Morning
It's been a couple days since my last post because it took me so long to get everything down that happened just between the time I woke up and lunch on Saturday. I'd like to tell you that the rest of the weekend went by with less going on but that's just not so. Oh, and since it's Friday I can tell you that things just keep getting stranger, but I'm not going to jump ahead. Here's the first half of Saturday, I'm working on the second half.
Saturday Morning
I woke up to the sound of my phone ringing and immediately noticed that the sun was high enough that light was pouring through my windows. Since I normally wake up before the sun rises, I was a little disoriented as I grabbed my phone and fumbled to answer it.
It was Emily, letting me know she’d be at my apartment in 30 minutes and asking if I wanted her to pick anything up. I told her I was fine but that if she wanted anything other than black coffee, she should stop on the way, I’d pay her back. She thanked me, said she’d swing by the grocery store on the way, and hung up.
I looked at my phone and saw it was around 7:45. I ran the dogs downstairs quickly so they could do their business. The first thing I noticed was that Craig was gone, but his replacement was standing by the door. I realized that having a guard outside my door was going to be too obvious and made a mental note to talk to John about how to handle the security more discreetly.
Running back upstairs, I quickly showered and got dressed. Dropping a pod in the coffee maker, I scrolled through my missed calls while the cup filled. Emily was going to have her hands full if things kept up at this pace. I noticed that the calls continued until almost 2 am and that several were from my oldest brother (half-brother), including the last one.
Just a little before 8:30, I heard a knock on the door. I assumed it was Emily but was surprised to see the security guy standing there. “Good morning, sir. There is a young lady downstairs who says she’s related to you and supposed to be here. I asked her to wait for a moment while I confirmed. I’m sorry to disturb you, but I’m afraid you didn’t answer when I called, and we don’t have a calendar for you or a list of approved guests.”
I hadn’t even thought about security when I told Emily to come by. “That’s totally my fault. I’m not used to this at all yet. That’s my niece Emily. She’ll be working for me over the summer. Please make sure I get your number before you leave so I can put it in my phone. You can go ahead and send her up.”
“No problem, sir. I’ll do so right away.” He turned and went back downstairs. I left the door open, and a moment later Emily walked in looking confused.
“Ummm, Alex, who was that?”
I took the grocery bags from Emily and put them on the counter. Grabbing another mug from the cabinet, I made a second cup of coffee and told Emily to fix it any way she wanted. She pulled out the cream and sugar along with a box of pastries. I realized I was hungrier than I thought and grabbed one as I answered.
“That was our security. They’ll be here for at least the immediate future or until things settle down. They know who you are now and that you’re working for me for the summer.”
Emily seemed to accept that and finished fixing her coffee before grabbing a pastry of her own.
I explained that I was going to be meeting Mark for breakfast but that Sam was going to stop by and keep her company this morning while she was getting settled in and that I’d be back right after we were done.
I handed her my phone and gave her the passcode. I told her I wanted her to go through all the calls and write down the numbers and how many times each had called. If there wasn’t a contact or caller ID with it, then to reverse search the number and see if any of them came up. I also told her to go through all the voicemails and write down who called and what their message was.
I asked her to delete the ones that were just “call me back” messages but save the rest in case I needed to listen to them. After we finished our coffee and pastries, I helped her gather her stuff and the pastries so we could head downstairs to the office.
John was already there to relieve the other guy and recognized Emily from yesterday, and I could tell she remembered him too. He smiled at her, and she offered up a pastry. He thanked her but declined and asked if I had a schedule for the day yet. I explained I’d be meeting the Chief of Police in about 30 minutes and then returning to the office.
He said he’d like to get about 30 minutes of my time at some point to discuss some security plans, and I promised we’d sit down before lunch.
Unlocking the office, I took Emily’s bag and the groceries from her before asking her to run back upstairs and grab Charlie and Cooper so they wouldn’t be sitting alone while we were in the office. We set up in the conference room, I realized we’d probably need to get some more office furniture soon. She walked back in with the dogs a second later, they were clearly thrilled to be out of the apartment.
I explained we’d be ordering more furniture and a computer for her shortly. My office was clean, organized (mostly), and functional but pretty basic. I only had my desk, some chairs in the foyer for people waiting to meet, and a conference room for larger meetings, closings, etc.
Emily would have to work in the conference room until we could set up another office for her. There were two other vacant offices and a break room. It had been way more space than I needed before, but now I imagined that would change. Just as I was starting to worry about having enough room for a foundation, assistant, etc., I remembered that the entire building was mine, not just the office I was “renting”, I still couldn’t wrap my head around it.
Setting her up with the laptop, I told her where the office supplies were and promised I’d be back shortly, but that I’d be leaving my phone with her, so I wouldn’t be reachable. Then I remembered John and realized she could get hold of him if there was an emergency.
John was in the foyer, and I got his cell number and passed it on to her. I was getting ready to leave when she looked embarrassed for a second and started to speak but then stopped herself. I asked her what was up, and she hesitated before asking quietly if I was going to see if maybe her mom could get out of jail today.
CRAP, I had completely forgotten about Debbie. I told her to hold on one second and grabbed my phone. I had about 10 minutes to get to Carol’s and needed to talk to Dad first. Fortunately, he answered when I called and sounded a lot less stressed than he did yesterday.
“Hey Dad, good morning. Have you got just a minute? We need to talk about Debbie.”
I could almost hear his eyes roll through the phone. “Sure, I guess we need to get her out. Do you want me to handle it?” he asked. I sighed with relief. I was afraid he was going to dig his heels in and want her to stay in jail for the weekend. “No, Dad, I’m meeting Mark in 5 minutes. I should be able to take care of it. I’ll let you know how it goes. I’m sorry to cut this short, but I’ve got to hustle to not be late.”
“No problem, son. I’ll be having a conversation with her as soon as she gets out. Tell Mark I said hi.”
I rushed the phone back to Emily and told her I’d work on getting her mom out. She looked relieved as I hurried out the door. Carol’s was only a couple of streets up, but it got packed on the weekend. It had been in that location for almost 70 years, with the third generation now behind the counter and the fourth getting ready to be.
I got there right at 9, and the line was around the block with peppily dressed weekenders waiting to eat, staring at their phones and ignoring their families waiting right next to them. Mark was already inside at his usual table (being chief had its privileges), but even if Mark hadn’t been sitting in his usual booth, he would have been easy to spot. At nearly 6’ 4” and built like an Abram’s tank, he was sure to stand out in any crowd.
Grabbing a seat, I let out a big sigh and relaxed. Mark quirked an eyebrow at me and said, “What’s up with you? I’ve never seen you look so tense.”
“How long have we got, Mark?” I asked with a wry chuckle.
Mark looked a little concerned and said, “All day and night if we need it, spill it.”
“Ok, but before we get into it, I need to ask you a professional question. We’re not going to press charges against Debbie. The night in jail should have been the wake-up call she needed, and if not, my dad’s going to deliver one when he sees her. Are you planning on charging her?”
Mark didn’t even answer; he just picked up his phone and called his duty desk. “Hey Steven, go ahead and cut Debbie Walker loose on my say. Put the papers on my desk, and I’ll sign off when I come back in. Make sure she knows she might still face charges from the DA and that she’d be wise to stay in town.”… “Nope, that’s it, thanks – I’ll stop in on my way home. Hope it’s a quiet today. See ya’.”
“There, one problem off your plate?”
I grinned. “Thanks, Mark. I don’t know if the problem is off my plate, but I know she’s out of your jail and that’s a start. Let’s get our order in, and then I’ve got the story of a lifetime for you.”
For the next 10 minutes, I gave Mark a 30,000-foot view of what had happened yesterday. He sat there quietly listening, only occasionally asking a question. When I got into the numbers, he stopped me and asked me to repeat myself.
I told him how surreal it was and that none of this had really sunk in yet. I mentioned Michael and Debbie getting turned away from the meeting by the security that JA had lined up and told him that the firm had insisted they keep security on me until things cooled down.
Mark nodded and asked if I had let them do that. I said I had reluctantly agreed, and Mark asked if they were here now. I pointed John out; he was standing outside the door and said that JA told me he’s a deputy from a nearby county. Mark’s eyes narrowed, and I saw him nod slightly. I asked him if he knew John.
“Oh yeah, I know him, and while I guess technically he is a deputy of sorts, he runs one of the top private security firms within 300 miles. He’s as good as you can get.” I asked how he knew him, and Mark simply said, “We served together,” and left it at that. “If he’s out here personally, then someone he respects, or someone important, must have asked him to handle your detail.”
“I’m supposed to talk to him when we get done here. He wants to discuss the security plan, but I’m not sure I’d call one guy a detail.”
“Do you mind if I join you?” asked Mark. “I’d like to know what he’s thinking and be ready to brief my officers if necessary.”
“Uh, sure…. Thank you.” I was aware that security was a concern; in addition to the family issues, there was a risk (even if it was small) of kidnapping, blackmail, increased potential for robbery, etc., but I was surprised that JA hadn’t been more direct about who he’d hired. Maybe he had more concerns than he wanted to share.
Breakfast came out right about then, delivered by Sandy, a pretty girl in her early thirties that I’d known most of my life. She was a few years younger than me with a bright smile and a positive energy that made people light up when they saw her. After college, she’d gone to work for one of the largest restaurant operators in the U.S. She’d spent nearly ten years there before leaving as a regional director to return home last year. Her grandparents had started Carol’s, and today Sandy and her cousin ran it. The rumor mill was that they had plans to expand, and that’s what had brought her home.
“Morning Chief… Hey Alex,” she said as she put the plates down. She paused for a moment before she put her hand on my shoulder and said, “Alex, I’m so sorry about Joe. He came in here almost every day. I loved spending time talking to him – when I was working here in high school, he’d tell stories about the old downtown and loved to remind me that he was one of the first people through the door back when my grandparents first opened. I remember mentioning him to my grandmother back then, and she laughed and started talking about him and those dogs. You know no one ever had the heart to tell him he shouldn’t bring them in with him. I hope you’ll bring Charlie by to see me soon. I miss his big head.”
I promised I’d bring him by this week. She refilled our coffees and was walking away when she turned back and said, “I’ll look forward to seeing him, and you!”
Mark laughed behind his coffee cup and took it as an opportunity to give me a hard time. “Watch out, buddy… that girl might have eyes for you!” I protested, but I was wondering what she had meant by that too. Not that it matters, I’m committed to finding out if Sam and I are right for one another. We have a lot of history, but each of us has changed a lot in the last 18 years, and even though we’re both excited about reconnecting, I don’t think either of us is ready to rush into anything.
I filled Mark in on my date with Sam last night and her reaction to the news, which I’d best describe as “cautiously supportive,” and told him she might be at the office right now sitting with Emily, who was going to be working with me for the summer.
We talked a bit more about what Joe had done. He had some questions about the land and asked if I knew which properties were involved. I told him what I knew, which was still pretty limited at that point (I don’t know a lot more now; there’s a lot to take in).
At about that time, Mark’s phone rang. He answered it and got serious real fast as he listened. “Ok, I understand. I’m with Alex right now. Call JA and tell him what happened. Alex and I will head out there in a bit.”
“Finish up, buddy – there’s no rush, but it looks like there was trouble at your uncle’s place again early this morning. This time, the security guard got hurt. He’s just banged up, maybe a concussion. I’ve got officers on-site, and the sheriff is sending over a detective. Whoever did it got scared off before he got into the house.”
We finished eating, and I grabbed the check before Mark could. He told me he’d let me get this one since my family was causing him so much trouble but not to get used to it. Paying at the register, I turned to leave and caught Sandy looking at me. When she saw me catch her, she just smiled and waved. Caught off guard, I waved back.
On the way out, we stopped, and John and Mark shook hands and smiled. “Mark, good to see you doing well! I heard you’d made Chief and figured there was no way we were going to pry you away after that!” It looks like Mark was holding out a little too.
“Yep, the Valley is home. I don’t like the idea of uprooting. It looks like you might be here for a while too; things aren’t calming down just yet. Alex and I have to head out to his uncle’s place. Someone attacked the security guard last night but ran off before going in. You’re welcome to ride with us unless you want to follow.”
John took the information in calmly and nodded. “I’ll follow behind you. I’m sure Alex will be fine riding with the chief of police, and of course, one of the best…”
Mark cut him off. “That’s enough of that; let’s just roll.”
I told Mark I needed to borrow his phone and called my cell. “Emily, hey it’s Alex. How is it going there?” Emily said that she’d gone through all the voicemails and that there were a few I definitely needed to hear. She sounded shaken up but said that Sam was also there. I asked her to hand the phone to Sam. Once she was on, I explained that we were on our way to Joe’s place and told her there had been an incident. “You’ve got to be kidding me. What the hell is going on?” I could hear the aggravation in her voice.
I explained I’d be back as soon as I could but that I had to go check out Joe’s place, and if she needed me, she should call Mark’s cell. She told me to be safe and said she’d stay with Emily until we got back. I made one other quick call to the Verizon store near my office to add 2 lines to my account. One for Emily and a new one for me. Emily’s phone was on her father’s plan, and I didn’t want them to see her calls and texts. I asked them to get them ready quickly, and that I’d be by in the next hour to pick them up.
Handing the phone back to Mark, I noticed how serious he was looking. “Alex, this is serious. I’m not sure that this is related to the will, but I wouldn’t bet against it. You need to have a very real conversation with John. I’m probably going to agree with his security recommendations. This is about more than just your security; it’s also about the people around you.”
I sat quietly for a moment. “I got you. When we get back, we’ll all sit down, and you guys can tell me what you want to do. You have my full support.” I paused, “Mark, I’m really sorry about this. I’m sorry you’re spending your Saturday doing this. I’m sorry your officers had to deal with Debbie, and I’m sorry someone got hurt.” Mark’s face softened as much as it could. “Even if this wasn’t my job, you’re my closest friend, and I’m not letting anything happen to you. Let’s just make sure no one else gets hurt either.”
We pulled up to Joe’s place, and the EMT was still there along with the police and sheriff’s deputies. The security guard was sitting on the back of the ambulance, holding a cold pack on the back of his head and speaking with the police. Mark jumped out of the car and went over to their huddle.
I hung back and went to speak to John. “You and Mark and I can work on detailing how to handle security when we get back to my office. I realize this may be unrelated to the will, but I also know it’s not worth taking risks while we figure things out.”
John nodded. “It’s highly unlikely that it’s unrelated, Alex. I’m not a big believer in coincidence.” We moved toward the ambulance where everyone was gathered. As we got closer, Mark stepped toward us as they continued talking to the guard.
“Evidently, the guard had left his car to check the perimeter when he stumbled onto the intruder trying to jimmy the lock on the back door of the house. He was more surprised than the burglar, who spun around and dropped him before he could even say anything.
“When he came to, the burglar was gone. He followed his tracks to where he parked, but there was no sign. We do have footage from the 360-degree camera on his security vehicle, and we’re hoping to get a good look at the car as soon as they upload a copy to us. We’ve gotten his statement and a rough description of the suspect. They’re going to take him for a CT scan as a precaution, but he appears to be fine other than a nasty cut on his head.”
John interrupted, “Before he leaves, can I ask him a couple of questions?”
Mark agreed and walked him over to the ambulance while I turned to walk the property. I didn’t see anything damaged other than a terra cotta pot on the back porch that had likely been used to knock out the guard, but I still wanted to check the garage.
When I got there, I knew there was a problem. Years of living there made it obvious that something had happened. The door was closed, but I could see that the lock was broken. Using my foot to push it open further, I walked inside, waiting for my eyes to adjust to the filtered light.
The Jag had been searched, with the contents of the glove box thrown around carelessly. The trunk was open, and the tool kit and spare tire had been dumped on the ground. The same was true for Joe’s truck.
Heading upstairs, I saw that my old room had been ransacked as well. My uncle hadn’t really touched anything after I moved out. I recognized a few personal belongings that hadn’t just been tossed on the ground; they’d been utterly destroyed.
I went back downstairs and straight to Mark and John. I told them what I’d found and mentioned how some of my personal belongings had been specifically destroyed. John was standing nearby and exchanged looks with Mark, who said, “This was personal. We’re going to treat this as another issue related to the will. That means this was probably someone in the family; anyone else wouldn’t have known to destroy your things.”
John nodded. “I’ll contact my operations team to bring in additional personnel. I’m going to have someone on your office and home 24/7 as well as someone with you. We’ll also be installing cameras at both properties. Do you have access to the entire building?”
“No, just my offices and apartment, but the building evidently belongs to his estate, and I guess to me. I’ll contact JA and see if he has keys.”
“Ok, I think the security guards should be fine for this property. The guard said there were replacements on the way. Incidentally, JA had already told me that whatever I deemed necessary to keep you safe would be paid for by the estate until it settles. We can discuss longer-term planning after that.” I appreciated John’s reassurances about the cost. I lived comfortably but didn’t have the money to pay for all this security.
Something else occurred to me. “Guys, something else about this is bothering me. Whoever was here was looking for something and obviously didn’t find it since they were trying to get into the house when they got interrupted.” I paused, then continued, “I don’t think it’s valuables or another copy of the will. They searched glove boxes, trunks, and my old room. I don’t know what they’re after, but it must be important.”
“We probably won’t figure that out until we catch whoever it is,” Mark said. “Do you want to go into Joe’s place now?”
“I guess I should do a quick walk-through, but I really need to get back to Emily and Sam.” Unlocking the door to the house, I did a quick scan. I could see glass on the floor from Aunt Debbie’s “visit,” and in the den, I could see the hammer marks on the safe (seriously???).
I told John that I’d probably be moving out here soon and that he might as well start taking a look at security measures for this place as well. I asked Mark when I could get back the things Debbie had gathered up (they were in evidence), and he said as soon as the DA confirmed that they weren’t planning on charging her, they’d release them and I could pick them up for JA.
I didn’t see anything else out of place, so I locked up the house, and we were getting ready to go when two additional cars from the guard’s agency pulled up. John stepped over to speak with them while Mark told his officers and the deputies we were leaving but that he’d check in later.
We pulled out just as the ambulance was taking the guard to the hospital for evaluation. When we hit town, I got Mark to stop so I could run in and grab the phones before we went back to my office. They had them sitting on the counter waiting for me, so I was in and out.
At this point, it was getting close to noon, and breakfast seemed like it was hours ago. We pulled up at the office and went inside to find Sam and Emily sitting at the conference room table laughing. When they saw us come through the door, they both jumped up and started asking questions. After a brief recap of what had happened that morning, I handed Emily her work phone, gave everyone my new number, and asked them to keep it private.
Emily said she’d listened to all the messages on my old phone and that there were a few I needed to hear but a couple that really worried her. Mark asked her to play them for us.
The first one was from my cousin David: “You’re a damn asshole, Alex. Kissing up to that old man so the rest of us don’t get shit. I’m going to kick your ass next time I see you! This isn’t over.”
David’s a hothead, but I really wasn’t concerned about his threats, although both Mark and John were taking notes.
The next one was more of a concern though. It was my half-brother Michael, the one that had shown up late for the meeting. He’d been raised by his mother and hadn’t spent much time with our father growing up, or any of us. He was over 20 years older than me and had been in and out of trouble his whole life. I always had the feeling he blamed us for his relationship with Dad. He’d left the message late on Friday night.
“I’m done getting screwed by this family. I’m just as much a Russell as the rest of you bastards. You took what was rightly mine, but you’re not going to take everything. I know there’s more, and I’m going to get it. If you get in my way, I promise it will be the last thing you ever do.”
Mark and John exchanged looks, and I knew they were taking this call seriously. Emily was going through the rest of the messages; some were from clients, some were from family telling me that they knew how much I meant to Joe and him to me, and that they were happy for me. My Aunt Patricia called almost a dozen times, begging me to call her.
There were a few other callers that I suspect had heard the rumors, but I had no idea who they were and would figure out how to handle them later.
As Emily was wrapping up, Mark’s phone rang. He answered and listened for a minute. “Ok, listen, just a hunch, but run Michael Russell’s name and see what cars are registered to him. I’ll hold.” After a moment, he said, “Yep – it was a good hunch. Put out a BOLO and tell the Sheriff’s office we’re going to want to have a talk with him. Call me if you find him.”
Getting off the phone, Mark shared that, “We’ve got footage of a car leaving the area right around the time the guard was attacked. There was a partial plate visible from one of the camera angles on the guard’s car. I had them run Michael’s DMV records, and they came back with a match. We’ll pick him up as soon as we see him. If we can connect him with the attack, he’ll be facing charges.”
Looking over at me, he said, “Alex, I don’t have to tell you this isn’t like the situation with Debbie. If Michael attacked that guard he’s going to be prosecuted.”
Emily’s face fell, and she looked down as if she wanted to hide. Mark saw her reaction, and realized that he’d forgotten Debbie was Emily’s mom. “Sweetie, I’m sorry, your mom just made a silly mistake. I don’t know if you’ve talked to your dad yet, but he’s probably already picked her up. Either way, it has nothing to do with you. You’ve got nothing to be embarrassed about.”
I had forgotten to tell Emily that Debbie was being released, and her face immediately lit up. “No, I didn’t hear from Dad. We’re not really talking right now, but I’ll call Mom in a bit!” she said excitedly.
This whole time Sam had been sitting quietly, taking it all in. I had no idea what she was thinking and frankly wasn't sure I wanted to know.
I hadn’t even had lunch yet, and I’d gotten Aunt Debbie out of jail, a guard had been attacked at my uncle’s house, my brother was a suspect in a serious assault, and for some reason, Emily’s father wasn’t speaking to her.
Add to that, I have no idea what Michael is talking about or what he’s looking for. I'll have to tell you more about him soon.
There were obviously a lot more issues in the family than I ever knew. I was going to have to start figuring things out, and fast.
submitted by LawyerVet36 to InTheValley [link] [comments]
Saturday Morning
I woke up to the sound of my phone ringing and immediately noticed that the sun was high enough that light was pouring through my windows. Since I normally wake up before the sun rises, I was a little disoriented as I grabbed my phone and fumbled to answer it.
It was Emily, letting me know she’d be at my apartment in 30 minutes and asking if I wanted her to pick anything up. I told her I was fine but that if she wanted anything other than black coffee, she should stop on the way, I’d pay her back. She thanked me, said she’d swing by the grocery store on the way, and hung up.
I looked at my phone and saw it was around 7:45. I ran the dogs downstairs quickly so they could do their business. The first thing I noticed was that Craig was gone, but his replacement was standing by the door. I realized that having a guard outside my door was going to be too obvious and made a mental note to talk to John about how to handle the security more discreetly.
Running back upstairs, I quickly showered and got dressed. Dropping a pod in the coffee maker, I scrolled through my missed calls while the cup filled. Emily was going to have her hands full if things kept up at this pace. I noticed that the calls continued until almost 2 am and that several were from my oldest brother (half-brother), including the last one.
Just a little before 8:30, I heard a knock on the door. I assumed it was Emily but was surprised to see the security guy standing there. “Good morning, sir. There is a young lady downstairs who says she’s related to you and supposed to be here. I asked her to wait for a moment while I confirmed. I’m sorry to disturb you, but I’m afraid you didn’t answer when I called, and we don’t have a calendar for you or a list of approved guests.”
I hadn’t even thought about security when I told Emily to come by. “That’s totally my fault. I’m not used to this at all yet. That’s my niece Emily. She’ll be working for me over the summer. Please make sure I get your number before you leave so I can put it in my phone. You can go ahead and send her up.”
“No problem, sir. I’ll do so right away.” He turned and went back downstairs. I left the door open, and a moment later Emily walked in looking confused.
“Ummm, Alex, who was that?”
I took the grocery bags from Emily and put them on the counter. Grabbing another mug from the cabinet, I made a second cup of coffee and told Emily to fix it any way she wanted. She pulled out the cream and sugar along with a box of pastries. I realized I was hungrier than I thought and grabbed one as I answered.
“That was our security. They’ll be here for at least the immediate future or until things settle down. They know who you are now and that you’re working for me for the summer.”
Emily seemed to accept that and finished fixing her coffee before grabbing a pastry of her own.
I explained that I was going to be meeting Mark for breakfast but that Sam was going to stop by and keep her company this morning while she was getting settled in and that I’d be back right after we were done.
I handed her my phone and gave her the passcode. I told her I wanted her to go through all the calls and write down the numbers and how many times each had called. If there wasn’t a contact or caller ID with it, then to reverse search the number and see if any of them came up. I also told her to go through all the voicemails and write down who called and what their message was.
I asked her to delete the ones that were just “call me back” messages but save the rest in case I needed to listen to them. After we finished our coffee and pastries, I helped her gather her stuff and the pastries so we could head downstairs to the office.
John was already there to relieve the other guy and recognized Emily from yesterday, and I could tell she remembered him too. He smiled at her, and she offered up a pastry. He thanked her but declined and asked if I had a schedule for the day yet. I explained I’d be meeting the Chief of Police in about 30 minutes and then returning to the office.
He said he’d like to get about 30 minutes of my time at some point to discuss some security plans, and I promised we’d sit down before lunch.
Unlocking the office, I took Emily’s bag and the groceries from her before asking her to run back upstairs and grab Charlie and Cooper so they wouldn’t be sitting alone while we were in the office. We set up in the conference room, I realized we’d probably need to get some more office furniture soon. She walked back in with the dogs a second later, they were clearly thrilled to be out of the apartment.
I explained we’d be ordering more furniture and a computer for her shortly. My office was clean, organized (mostly), and functional but pretty basic. I only had my desk, some chairs in the foyer for people waiting to meet, and a conference room for larger meetings, closings, etc.
Emily would have to work in the conference room until we could set up another office for her. There were two other vacant offices and a break room. It had been way more space than I needed before, but now I imagined that would change. Just as I was starting to worry about having enough room for a foundation, assistant, etc., I remembered that the entire building was mine, not just the office I was “renting”, I still couldn’t wrap my head around it.
Setting her up with the laptop, I told her where the office supplies were and promised I’d be back shortly, but that I’d be leaving my phone with her, so I wouldn’t be reachable. Then I remembered John and realized she could get hold of him if there was an emergency.
John was in the foyer, and I got his cell number and passed it on to her. I was getting ready to leave when she looked embarrassed for a second and started to speak but then stopped herself. I asked her what was up, and she hesitated before asking quietly if I was going to see if maybe her mom could get out of jail today.
CRAP, I had completely forgotten about Debbie. I told her to hold on one second and grabbed my phone. I had about 10 minutes to get to Carol’s and needed to talk to Dad first. Fortunately, he answered when I called and sounded a lot less stressed than he did yesterday.
“Hey Dad, good morning. Have you got just a minute? We need to talk about Debbie.”
I could almost hear his eyes roll through the phone. “Sure, I guess we need to get her out. Do you want me to handle it?” he asked. I sighed with relief. I was afraid he was going to dig his heels in and want her to stay in jail for the weekend. “No, Dad, I’m meeting Mark in 5 minutes. I should be able to take care of it. I’ll let you know how it goes. I’m sorry to cut this short, but I’ve got to hustle to not be late.”
“No problem, son. I’ll be having a conversation with her as soon as she gets out. Tell Mark I said hi.”
I rushed the phone back to Emily and told her I’d work on getting her mom out. She looked relieved as I hurried out the door. Carol’s was only a couple of streets up, but it got packed on the weekend. It had been in that location for almost 70 years, with the third generation now behind the counter and the fourth getting ready to be.
I got there right at 9, and the line was around the block with peppily dressed weekenders waiting to eat, staring at their phones and ignoring their families waiting right next to them. Mark was already inside at his usual table (being chief had its privileges), but even if Mark hadn’t been sitting in his usual booth, he would have been easy to spot. At nearly 6’ 4” and built like an Abram’s tank, he was sure to stand out in any crowd.
Grabbing a seat, I let out a big sigh and relaxed. Mark quirked an eyebrow at me and said, “What’s up with you? I’ve never seen you look so tense.”
“How long have we got, Mark?” I asked with a wry chuckle.
Mark looked a little concerned and said, “All day and night if we need it, spill it.”
“Ok, but before we get into it, I need to ask you a professional question. We’re not going to press charges against Debbie. The night in jail should have been the wake-up call she needed, and if not, my dad’s going to deliver one when he sees her. Are you planning on charging her?”
Mark didn’t even answer; he just picked up his phone and called his duty desk. “Hey Steven, go ahead and cut Debbie Walker loose on my say. Put the papers on my desk, and I’ll sign off when I come back in. Make sure she knows she might still face charges from the DA and that she’d be wise to stay in town.”… “Nope, that’s it, thanks – I’ll stop in on my way home. Hope it’s a quiet today. See ya’.”
“There, one problem off your plate?”
I grinned. “Thanks, Mark. I don’t know if the problem is off my plate, but I know she’s out of your jail and that’s a start. Let’s get our order in, and then I’ve got the story of a lifetime for you.”
For the next 10 minutes, I gave Mark a 30,000-foot view of what had happened yesterday. He sat there quietly listening, only occasionally asking a question. When I got into the numbers, he stopped me and asked me to repeat myself.
I told him how surreal it was and that none of this had really sunk in yet. I mentioned Michael and Debbie getting turned away from the meeting by the security that JA had lined up and told him that the firm had insisted they keep security on me until things cooled down.
Mark nodded and asked if I had let them do that. I said I had reluctantly agreed, and Mark asked if they were here now. I pointed John out; he was standing outside the door and said that JA told me he’s a deputy from a nearby county. Mark’s eyes narrowed, and I saw him nod slightly. I asked him if he knew John.
“Oh yeah, I know him, and while I guess technically he is a deputy of sorts, he runs one of the top private security firms within 300 miles. He’s as good as you can get.” I asked how he knew him, and Mark simply said, “We served together,” and left it at that. “If he’s out here personally, then someone he respects, or someone important, must have asked him to handle your detail.”
“I’m supposed to talk to him when we get done here. He wants to discuss the security plan, but I’m not sure I’d call one guy a detail.”
“Do you mind if I join you?” asked Mark. “I’d like to know what he’s thinking and be ready to brief my officers if necessary.”
“Uh, sure…. Thank you.” I was aware that security was a concern; in addition to the family issues, there was a risk (even if it was small) of kidnapping, blackmail, increased potential for robbery, etc., but I was surprised that JA hadn’t been more direct about who he’d hired. Maybe he had more concerns than he wanted to share.
Breakfast came out right about then, delivered by Sandy, a pretty girl in her early thirties that I’d known most of my life. She was a few years younger than me with a bright smile and a positive energy that made people light up when they saw her. After college, she’d gone to work for one of the largest restaurant operators in the U.S. She’d spent nearly ten years there before leaving as a regional director to return home last year. Her grandparents had started Carol’s, and today Sandy and her cousin ran it. The rumor mill was that they had plans to expand, and that’s what had brought her home.
“Morning Chief… Hey Alex,” she said as she put the plates down. She paused for a moment before she put her hand on my shoulder and said, “Alex, I’m so sorry about Joe. He came in here almost every day. I loved spending time talking to him – when I was working here in high school, he’d tell stories about the old downtown and loved to remind me that he was one of the first people through the door back when my grandparents first opened. I remember mentioning him to my grandmother back then, and she laughed and started talking about him and those dogs. You know no one ever had the heart to tell him he shouldn’t bring them in with him. I hope you’ll bring Charlie by to see me soon. I miss his big head.”
I promised I’d bring him by this week. She refilled our coffees and was walking away when she turned back and said, “I’ll look forward to seeing him, and you!”
Mark laughed behind his coffee cup and took it as an opportunity to give me a hard time. “Watch out, buddy… that girl might have eyes for you!” I protested, but I was wondering what she had meant by that too. Not that it matters, I’m committed to finding out if Sam and I are right for one another. We have a lot of history, but each of us has changed a lot in the last 18 years, and even though we’re both excited about reconnecting, I don’t think either of us is ready to rush into anything.
I filled Mark in on my date with Sam last night and her reaction to the news, which I’d best describe as “cautiously supportive,” and told him she might be at the office right now sitting with Emily, who was going to be working with me for the summer.
We talked a bit more about what Joe had done. He had some questions about the land and asked if I knew which properties were involved. I told him what I knew, which was still pretty limited at that point (I don’t know a lot more now; there’s a lot to take in).
At about that time, Mark’s phone rang. He answered it and got serious real fast as he listened. “Ok, I understand. I’m with Alex right now. Call JA and tell him what happened. Alex and I will head out there in a bit.”
“Finish up, buddy – there’s no rush, but it looks like there was trouble at your uncle’s place again early this morning. This time, the security guard got hurt. He’s just banged up, maybe a concussion. I’ve got officers on-site, and the sheriff is sending over a detective. Whoever did it got scared off before he got into the house.”
We finished eating, and I grabbed the check before Mark could. He told me he’d let me get this one since my family was causing him so much trouble but not to get used to it. Paying at the register, I turned to leave and caught Sandy looking at me. When she saw me catch her, she just smiled and waved. Caught off guard, I waved back.
On the way out, we stopped, and John and Mark shook hands and smiled. “Mark, good to see you doing well! I heard you’d made Chief and figured there was no way we were going to pry you away after that!” It looks like Mark was holding out a little too.
“Yep, the Valley is home. I don’t like the idea of uprooting. It looks like you might be here for a while too; things aren’t calming down just yet. Alex and I have to head out to his uncle’s place. Someone attacked the security guard last night but ran off before going in. You’re welcome to ride with us unless you want to follow.”
John took the information in calmly and nodded. “I’ll follow behind you. I’m sure Alex will be fine riding with the chief of police, and of course, one of the best…”
Mark cut him off. “That’s enough of that; let’s just roll.”
I told Mark I needed to borrow his phone and called my cell. “Emily, hey it’s Alex. How is it going there?” Emily said that she’d gone through all the voicemails and that there were a few I definitely needed to hear. She sounded shaken up but said that Sam was also there. I asked her to hand the phone to Sam. Once she was on, I explained that we were on our way to Joe’s place and told her there had been an incident. “You’ve got to be kidding me. What the hell is going on?” I could hear the aggravation in her voice.
I explained I’d be back as soon as I could but that I had to go check out Joe’s place, and if she needed me, she should call Mark’s cell. She told me to be safe and said she’d stay with Emily until we got back. I made one other quick call to the Verizon store near my office to add 2 lines to my account. One for Emily and a new one for me. Emily’s phone was on her father’s plan, and I didn’t want them to see her calls and texts. I asked them to get them ready quickly, and that I’d be by in the next hour to pick them up.
Handing the phone back to Mark, I noticed how serious he was looking. “Alex, this is serious. I’m not sure that this is related to the will, but I wouldn’t bet against it. You need to have a very real conversation with John. I’m probably going to agree with his security recommendations. This is about more than just your security; it’s also about the people around you.”
I sat quietly for a moment. “I got you. When we get back, we’ll all sit down, and you guys can tell me what you want to do. You have my full support.” I paused, “Mark, I’m really sorry about this. I’m sorry you’re spending your Saturday doing this. I’m sorry your officers had to deal with Debbie, and I’m sorry someone got hurt.” Mark’s face softened as much as it could. “Even if this wasn’t my job, you’re my closest friend, and I’m not letting anything happen to you. Let’s just make sure no one else gets hurt either.”
We pulled up to Joe’s place, and the EMT was still there along with the police and sheriff’s deputies. The security guard was sitting on the back of the ambulance, holding a cold pack on the back of his head and speaking with the police. Mark jumped out of the car and went over to their huddle.
I hung back and went to speak to John. “You and Mark and I can work on detailing how to handle security when we get back to my office. I realize this may be unrelated to the will, but I also know it’s not worth taking risks while we figure things out.”
John nodded. “It’s highly unlikely that it’s unrelated, Alex. I’m not a big believer in coincidence.” We moved toward the ambulance where everyone was gathered. As we got closer, Mark stepped toward us as they continued talking to the guard.
“Evidently, the guard had left his car to check the perimeter when he stumbled onto the intruder trying to jimmy the lock on the back door of the house. He was more surprised than the burglar, who spun around and dropped him before he could even say anything.
“When he came to, the burglar was gone. He followed his tracks to where he parked, but there was no sign. We do have footage from the 360-degree camera on his security vehicle, and we’re hoping to get a good look at the car as soon as they upload a copy to us. We’ve gotten his statement and a rough description of the suspect. They’re going to take him for a CT scan as a precaution, but he appears to be fine other than a nasty cut on his head.”
John interrupted, “Before he leaves, can I ask him a couple of questions?”
Mark agreed and walked him over to the ambulance while I turned to walk the property. I didn’t see anything damaged other than a terra cotta pot on the back porch that had likely been used to knock out the guard, but I still wanted to check the garage.
When I got there, I knew there was a problem. Years of living there made it obvious that something had happened. The door was closed, but I could see that the lock was broken. Using my foot to push it open further, I walked inside, waiting for my eyes to adjust to the filtered light.
The Jag had been searched, with the contents of the glove box thrown around carelessly. The trunk was open, and the tool kit and spare tire had been dumped on the ground. The same was true for Joe’s truck.
Heading upstairs, I saw that my old room had been ransacked as well. My uncle hadn’t really touched anything after I moved out. I recognized a few personal belongings that hadn’t just been tossed on the ground; they’d been utterly destroyed.
I went back downstairs and straight to Mark and John. I told them what I’d found and mentioned how some of my personal belongings had been specifically destroyed. John was standing nearby and exchanged looks with Mark, who said, “This was personal. We’re going to treat this as another issue related to the will. That means this was probably someone in the family; anyone else wouldn’t have known to destroy your things.”
John nodded. “I’ll contact my operations team to bring in additional personnel. I’m going to have someone on your office and home 24/7 as well as someone with you. We’ll also be installing cameras at both properties. Do you have access to the entire building?”
“No, just my offices and apartment, but the building evidently belongs to his estate, and I guess to me. I’ll contact JA and see if he has keys.”
“Ok, I think the security guards should be fine for this property. The guard said there were replacements on the way. Incidentally, JA had already told me that whatever I deemed necessary to keep you safe would be paid for by the estate until it settles. We can discuss longer-term planning after that.” I appreciated John’s reassurances about the cost. I lived comfortably but didn’t have the money to pay for all this security.
Something else occurred to me. “Guys, something else about this is bothering me. Whoever was here was looking for something and obviously didn’t find it since they were trying to get into the house when they got interrupted.” I paused, then continued, “I don’t think it’s valuables or another copy of the will. They searched glove boxes, trunks, and my old room. I don’t know what they’re after, but it must be important.”
“We probably won’t figure that out until we catch whoever it is,” Mark said. “Do you want to go into Joe’s place now?”
“I guess I should do a quick walk-through, but I really need to get back to Emily and Sam.” Unlocking the door to the house, I did a quick scan. I could see glass on the floor from Aunt Debbie’s “visit,” and in the den, I could see the hammer marks on the safe (seriously???).
I told John that I’d probably be moving out here soon and that he might as well start taking a look at security measures for this place as well. I asked Mark when I could get back the things Debbie had gathered up (they were in evidence), and he said as soon as the DA confirmed that they weren’t planning on charging her, they’d release them and I could pick them up for JA.
I didn’t see anything else out of place, so I locked up the house, and we were getting ready to go when two additional cars from the guard’s agency pulled up. John stepped over to speak with them while Mark told his officers and the deputies we were leaving but that he’d check in later.
We pulled out just as the ambulance was taking the guard to the hospital for evaluation. When we hit town, I got Mark to stop so I could run in and grab the phones before we went back to my office. They had them sitting on the counter waiting for me, so I was in and out.
At this point, it was getting close to noon, and breakfast seemed like it was hours ago. We pulled up at the office and went inside to find Sam and Emily sitting at the conference room table laughing. When they saw us come through the door, they both jumped up and started asking questions. After a brief recap of what had happened that morning, I handed Emily her work phone, gave everyone my new number, and asked them to keep it private.
Emily said she’d listened to all the messages on my old phone and that there were a few I needed to hear but a couple that really worried her. Mark asked her to play them for us.
The first one was from my cousin David: “You’re a damn asshole, Alex. Kissing up to that old man so the rest of us don’t get shit. I’m going to kick your ass next time I see you! This isn’t over.”
David’s a hothead, but I really wasn’t concerned about his threats, although both Mark and John were taking notes.
The next one was more of a concern though. It was my half-brother Michael, the one that had shown up late for the meeting. He’d been raised by his mother and hadn’t spent much time with our father growing up, or any of us. He was over 20 years older than me and had been in and out of trouble his whole life. I always had the feeling he blamed us for his relationship with Dad. He’d left the message late on Friday night.
“I’m done getting screwed by this family. I’m just as much a Russell as the rest of you bastards. You took what was rightly mine, but you’re not going to take everything. I know there’s more, and I’m going to get it. If you get in my way, I promise it will be the last thing you ever do.”
Mark and John exchanged looks, and I knew they were taking this call seriously. Emily was going through the rest of the messages; some were from clients, some were from family telling me that they knew how much I meant to Joe and him to me, and that they were happy for me. My Aunt Patricia called almost a dozen times, begging me to call her.
There were a few other callers that I suspect had heard the rumors, but I had no idea who they were and would figure out how to handle them later.
As Emily was wrapping up, Mark’s phone rang. He answered and listened for a minute. “Ok, listen, just a hunch, but run Michael Russell’s name and see what cars are registered to him. I’ll hold.” After a moment, he said, “Yep – it was a good hunch. Put out a BOLO and tell the Sheriff’s office we’re going to want to have a talk with him. Call me if you find him.”
Getting off the phone, Mark shared that, “We’ve got footage of a car leaving the area right around the time the guard was attacked. There was a partial plate visible from one of the camera angles on the guard’s car. I had them run Michael’s DMV records, and they came back with a match. We’ll pick him up as soon as we see him. If we can connect him with the attack, he’ll be facing charges.”
Looking over at me, he said, “Alex, I don’t have to tell you this isn’t like the situation with Debbie. If Michael attacked that guard he’s going to be prosecuted.”
Emily’s face fell, and she looked down as if she wanted to hide. Mark saw her reaction, and realized that he’d forgotten Debbie was Emily’s mom. “Sweetie, I’m sorry, your mom just made a silly mistake. I don’t know if you’ve talked to your dad yet, but he’s probably already picked her up. Either way, it has nothing to do with you. You’ve got nothing to be embarrassed about.”
I had forgotten to tell Emily that Debbie was being released, and her face immediately lit up. “No, I didn’t hear from Dad. We’re not really talking right now, but I’ll call Mom in a bit!” she said excitedly.
This whole time Sam had been sitting quietly, taking it all in. I had no idea what she was thinking and frankly wasn't sure I wanted to know.
I hadn’t even had lunch yet, and I’d gotten Aunt Debbie out of jail, a guard had been attacked at my uncle’s house, my brother was a suspect in a serious assault, and for some reason, Emily’s father wasn’t speaking to her.
Add to that, I have no idea what Michael is talking about or what he’s looking for. I'll have to tell you more about him soon.
There were obviously a lot more issues in the family than I ever knew. I was going to have to start figuring things out, and fast.
2024.06.07 19:42 Key-Competition-7489 (Record of Ragnarok RS) Chapter 24: Burning Bright
 | As Arthur concluded his speech, there was a silence across the battlefield. As Nezha blinked a few times whilst properly processing the king's words, slowly he lifted his spear closer to his face. The constant clashes between him and Arthur had gradually chipped away at certain spots of the top most layer of metal, revealing all the spear's original colorations that were hidden away. submitted by Key-Competition-7489 to ShuumatsuNoValkyrie [link] [comments] Under the newer golden layer, lay the silver and aqua blue metal that the spear still had, the red dye that was painted over the spear's handle has also gradually chipped off, revealing parts of its original oak color underneath. All of them, reminders of his past friendship with Ao Bing, and all had been hidden away and covered up. To ensure that he would not be reminded of the good times they once shared, and could go back to cursing the Dragon Prince's memory undisturbed. For a moment, Nezha felt a wave of nostalgia, and even a small twinge of sadness as he continued to gaze at the spear in his hand, all those old memories he shared with Ao Bing slowly flooding back into his mind. But shaking his head, he ignored those thoughts once again as he got back into a fighting stance. He currently had a fight to win right now, there would be time for reflection and regret after he was victorious. Taking the Qiankun Ring that hung from his side, Nezha willed it to shrink in size and diameter as he lifted it over the stump that used to be his left arm, allowing the ring to shrink till it fit snugly around it before letting go. "Odd, what is Nezha doing?" Heimdall questioned as the rest of the audience murmured in agreement, sharing his curiosity. In the sea of confusion, only Nezha's family, the Jade Emperor and Erlang Shen knew what was happening. " OH HO!" Erlang said with a grin, "Could it be? Nezha's really gonna use THAT here and now?" "H-huh?" Jinzha exclaimed by his side, "You aren't referring to what I THINK you are referring to are you? To attempt that with the damage he sustained… That would be suicide on Nezha's part!" The Jade Emperor's eyebrows knitted in concern as well, "Quite correct Jinzha, With the amount of blood he had lost and his severed limb? Doing such a risky move would be MOST unwise… But if there is anyone with the sheer will and determination to pull it off… It is without a doubt your brother, the Third Lotus Prince!" While the rest of the godly audience yelled their support for Nezha, it was still Li Jing whose eyes shone with worry and uncertainty for his son. Noticing this, Lady Yi gently squeezed her husband's arm, trying to help soothe his nerves. "Do not fret my love," She said, "Our son will make it out of this and return to us, he always has. No matter how strong or dangerous his foe is, he will always find a way to come out on top." Li Jing nodded, seemingly calmed by his wife's words as his face morphed back to a stern expression, "Y-yes, quite correct my love, forgive me for dampening the mood. Nezha will show that human the true extent of his strength!" With that, the two joined the rest of their friends and family to show their support for Nezha. But even though he seemed to have calmed his nerves, on the inside of his mind, the Pagoda-Bearing King's mind was still plagued with uneasiness and shame. "I am so sorry, my son," Li Jing silently thought to himself, "I never imagined that my actions would have impacted you so negatively. I beg, in the name of all of Heaven itself, that you emerge victorious so that I may have a chance to right my wrongs." "Haven't done this in a while," Nezha grunted in the battlefield below, as he felt a small twinge in his arm due to the pressure being applied on his wound from the ring , "And there's the fact I don't have my left arm anymore, but let's see if I still got it in me." Re-adjusting his spear to proper positioning, Nezha gazed back at Arthur with a confident grin, his eyes glowing with an eerie red light, "That's the second big heroic speech you gave during our battle, do you take classes for them or something? Don't worry though, I'll give your words some more thought once I WIN THIS FIGHT!" Finishing his sentence, the Fire and Wind wheels roared to life as Nezha ignited the tip of his spear and charged, preparing for another assault upon the King of camelot. Arthur merely smirked in response, despite Nezha's facade of indifference and cockiness, the momentary pause from before was all the king needed to know that his words had their intended effect on the Third Lotus Prince. "Never doubted you for a minute, Third Lotus Prince!" He roared, as he swung his sword to meet his foe, "Now don't you dare disappoint! WALLS OF CAMELOT, ACTIVATE!" As he said this, the embossed design on the Shield of Avalon glowed with bright blue light, and once again, two tall and wide forcefields of the same color materialized, stretching across the length of the battlefield. "And we are back to the cagefighting!" Heimdall yelled, "Arthur has activated the forcefield capabilities of his shield, quite the smart play if you ask me! Right now, with the loss of his left arm, Nezha is at a HUGE disadvantage, as it means that he can no longer use his Qiankun Ring to its fullest potential! Pair with the fact that Arthur STILL has one last healing charge remaining in Excalibur's scabbard, the outcome of this match doesn't seem favorable for the Third Lotus Prince!" Inside the forcefield created by the Shield of Avalon, the two fighter's traded blow for blow as they constantly tried to outdo their opponent. Arthur had chosen to re-use the same strategy as he had done before whilst using the Shield's ability, the King of Camelot placed himself behind his shield whilst jabbing blow after blow towards Nezha with Excalibur, trying to force his foe back against the walls where he could deliver the decisive blow. This still proved to be a challenge, as with the loss of his left arm, Nezha had completely abandoned any of his previous fancy spins, instead beginning to focus on delivering quick consecutive jabs at Arthur. Nezha also started employing the use of large arching sweeps with his spear to help generate more power for his attacks, helping to make up for the amount he'd lost due to his severed arm. And with the speartip still ablaze, Arthur found himself having to lean back or shield his face everytime Nezha made these swipes to prevent himself from getting burnt. The King of Camelot gritted his teeth as he felt himself get pushed backwards by Nezha's constant strikes, while the loss of his arm had hindered the Third Lotus Prince's fighting style to a some degree, it most certainly had not dampened his battle spirit or drive in the slightest… Yet in spite of all of this, Arthur could not help but smile, for this was exactly how he liked it! "Urgh… That human really did a number on Nezha!" A few of the young gods in the audience that had previously been at the Lotus Prince's party groaned as they watched the fight continue, "He looks so unsightly now that he's missing an arm! And his technique is all sloppy and uncivilized now without those cool spins and turns!" The Jade Emperor snorted loudly as he heard this, turning to face the young gods with a disapproving look, "It seems you youngsters have no clue about even the simplest things these days, I see. The art of combat isn't just about fancy moves and pretty kicks, it also requires careful thought and strategising. With the loss of his left arm, Nezha's center of balance had been altered dramatically, so if he were to continue with his previous attacking style. The Third Lotus Prince would most likely find himself toppling to the ground due to his left side being lighter than his right. " All of the younger gods blushed in embarrassment whilst silently nodding their heads, after all being lectured by the Chief God of the Chinese Pantheon himself would be a very humiliating ordeal for most people. The Jade Emperor meanwhile, merely shook his head as he turned back to watch the battle, "Do not think the fight already over young ones, the Third Lotus Prince still has one final trick up his sleeves, or should I say sleeve." As he said this, out of the corner of his eyes, a small flicker of flames seemed to briefly flash around the Qiankun Ring that was fitted around Nezha's left shoulder, before just as quickly disappearing from view. Seeing this caused the Jade Emperor to give a light smirk. "Quite the impressive man and fighter you are, King of Camelot," The Jade Emperor said to himself, "But let's see how all your resolve fares against the fires that burnt even the Great Sage Equal to Heaven!" As Nezha lifted his spear overhead to deliver a heavy downward swing, Arthur flung his right hand, along with the Shield of Avalon which he still held within that hand, to meet that swing. "CLANG!" As Nezha's spear clashed with Arthur's shield, the King of Camelot felt his teeth chatter from the recoil experienced from the blow, and it took all his willpower and strength to stand his ground. Even though the sheer force Nezha was applying on the Shield of Avalon with his spear made retreating seem like a much more favorable option, Arthur grunted with effort as he persevered and held his own against the weight of the attack. Arthur's choice to tank Nezha's attack was not without reason, as with them locked in a standstill, and the loss of the Third Lotus Prince's left arm. Nezha virtually had nothing to protect his unguarded left from Excalibur's mighty blade, which the king gripped tightly in his own left hand, waiting for this exact moment. With a triumphant roar, Arthur swung Excalibur forward, hoping to cut straight through Nezha's midriff with a single strike and end the fight right then and now. But as he did, with his blade drawing closer to Nezha's flesh. Time seemed to go into slow-motion, and just barely out of his line of vision, did Arthur, like the Jade Emperor before him, also glimpse a small flicker of flames gathering around the Qiankun Ring that looped around the stump that used to be Nezha's left arm. But as he continued watching it, to Arthur's amazement and horror, the entire Qiankun Ring around Nezha's shoulder suddenly burst into flames, engulfing the entirety of it before spreading down the length of his arm, if he still had one of course. And these flames were not the same regular orange ones that blazed around the Fire-tip Spear's head from before, rather these flames were a vibrant light blue, with a slightly orange tip around the ends that burnt bright and strong. In a blink of an eye, the strange blue fire had grown and shifted into a fully functioning and capable prosthetic arm, one made of fire and flames, constantly flickering and crackling as it radiated pure power and divine energy. It was from this that Arthur knew just from seeing it, that this strange new power Nezha had unleashed was incredibly dangerous. https://preview.redd.it/xfld7kw7s65d1.png?width=1024&format=png&auto=webp&s=ad4da6152902468b49dd5af31f183c6ae529ae17 Right as Excalibur was about to make contact with its target, Nezha's new flaming left hand shot forth, skillfully catching hold of Arthur's blade right within his fiery grasp and holding it fast. Instantly a loud sizzling noise was heard, as the sheer hot temperature from Nezha's arm had placed the divine metal of Excalibur under immense pressure. Arthur's eyes could only widened in shock as Nezha, hand still firmly holding onto Excalibur, forcibly pushed his sword out of the way, and with his right arm still locked in it's prior position, under heavy strain holding the Shield of Avalon against Nezha's Fire-tip Spear. The King of Camelot realized with a start, that his own strategy had been turned against him! Out of nowhere and as quick as a bullet, Nezha's knee flew straight into Arthur's gut from below, causing the king's face to grimace in pain as the blow connected and sent him stumbling backwards and doubling over as a result of the low blow. However, the Third Lotus Prince would not give Arthur the luxury of recovering again, immediately following up from the previous move, Nezha rushed forward with how new left arm reared back. The disorientated Arthur barely had time to look up before he realized that a flaming blue fist was speeding straight towards his face, it was only thanks to his instinct and quick reaction time was he able to lift the Shield of Avalon in an attempt to block the attack. "BANG!" A heavy metallic sound exploded across the arena, as the entire arena could only watch in shock as Nezha's fiery first tore straight through the Divine Weapon as though it were paper. As luck would have it though, the shield still had managed to do its job of protecting Arthur from the main brunt of the attack. However, the King of Camelot was still sent flying further backwards,crashing heavily into the arena wall, much to the distress of the human audience members, and especially his Knight of the Round Table. "No, no, no!" Galahad groaned loudly, while simultaneously cowering at the sight of Nezha's new arm, "what the hell was that! How the hell did that god manage to tear through a Divine Weapon with just fire alone while his spear and rings failed to do the same?" "No… That fire… E-even with all my years mastering the art of sorcery and magic, I have never seen anything like it before.." Those words had come from Merlin, whose face had become just as pale as it was when he and Arthur realized that the Scabbard of Excalibur had gone missing all those years ago, "S-such regal and divine power… Yet… I can't help but feel… INTIMIDATED by the obvious danger it exudes!" The Knights of the Round Table all shuddered at Merlin's words, all except for Lancelot, who was focused solely on his friend, slumped slightly against the wall he had been roughly thrown against, with eyes full of concern and faith. "Come on, Arthur, you can't give up now… Get up… GET UP!" "W-WHAT?" Pandora exclaimed in shock from their balcony, "SINCE WHEN COULD NEZHA DO THAT?" The girl turned towards her companions who looked equally worried, "A substitute hand made out from the fires of his own Qiankun Ring?" Göll said as she nervously chewed her thumb, "The Third Lotus Prince is even more resourceful than we thought!" "No….." Prometheus replied through gritted teeth, "It's even worse than that, if I'm not mistaken, those flames that Nezha has right now in place of his arm aren't just ANY regular fire… Rather, they are ones of incredible power! "THE TRUE FLAMES OF SAMADHI!" "T-true flames of Samadhi?" The two girls said simultaneously, "W-what's that?" "Only the most powerful form of fire-magic that a select few can master," Prometheus answered gravelly, "The Samadhi flames spread at an incredible speed , capable of burning down nearly anything unfortunate enough to stand in its way! But unlike normal flames, it cannot be so simply extinguished by water , in fact its flames are only intensified when exposed to rain! One would need an entire ocean's worth of water to even hope to dampen its strength!" Göll and Pandora paled at the Titan's words as they looked back down at the arena, the both of them having only one thought running through both of their minds as they continued to watch the fight. "This is BAD!" "This round just keeps getting better and BETTER folks!" Heimdall yelled as the God's audience cheered seeing their fighter's comeback, "Nezha has pulled out his ultimate trump card in the form of the Samadhi Flames! And it's done some SERIOUS damage to Arthur's shield! Also for anyone who doesn't know what the Samadhu Flame is, think fire! But HOT, HOT, HOTTER!" Whilst Heimdall was busy commentating, Nezha who stood in the middle of the arena, rotated his left shoulder, slowly willing the fires on his left arm to die down just a little bit at the moment. Most of the time when he did make use of the awesome power of the Samadhi Flames, it would usually be on one of his many weapons to help boost its prowess in battle. But never before had he tried to use it directly on himself, much less as a substitute for a severed limb. Regardless, he still seemed able to keep the power of the flames under control, preventing it from spreading across the entire arena uncontrollably. Though, it definitely would be in his best interest not to use it more than he had to. Suddenly, coughing from the arena walls made everyone's head turn to the other side of the arena, just as Arthur stumbled away from the mess of cobwebs that were the cracks on the arena wall, resulting from his heavy impact against them. "Heh, heh…" Foolish of me to assume that you would be any weaker after my previous stunt, Third Lotus Prince." Arthur complimented as he staggered back upright on his two feet. "Who'd you think you're fighting, King of Camelot? Some rank amateur god?" Nezha responded with a grin, "Even if you cut off both my arms, you better BELIEVE that I'm still gonna give you the fight of your life!" "Oh definitely," Arthur chuckled, holding up the Shield of Avalon to reveal the sizeable hole that was punched straight through the metal, around it were blackened char marks that still had smoke sizzling and burning off it, "That is some serious firepower you have there, pun not intended." "Yep, definitely was a risk putting myself out there once again after you severed my left arm," Nezha replied, "But I needed the fuel for the fire that was my fighting spirit to be able to use the Samadhi Flame, fuel provided from a epic battle against a foe such as yourself, King of Camelot." "Your words flatter me, Third Lotus Prince," Arthur said, as he raised Excalibur in a light taunt, "Now, won't you be a gentleman and so kindly show me more of what this Samadhi Flame of yours has in store?" Nezha's smirk widened, "You asked for it.." In a blink of the eye, Nezha was suddenly in front of Arthur, his flaming fist flung far behind his head as he prepared to unleash a devastating strike straight towards the king's face. Arthur just barely managed to move out of harm's way once again, by quickly rolling across the arena floor. And as he Lifted his head, he was just in time to see the Lotus Prince's fist slam straight through the solid marble and concrete that made up the arena's walls, the sheer force caused the entire section of the arena to quiver slightly, which in turn caused various audience members seated there to scream in fear, as the subsequent crater that was left behind from the impact was a mess of cracks and burnt rubble, blackened with soot. "H-hey be careful with that fist of yours, Prince Nezha!" Heimdall called out nervously, "We don't want to end up hurting the audience members now, do we?" "Sorry Heimdall!" Nezha replied as he proceeded to use his left arm as a shield to block a counterattack from Arthur, as soon as Excalibur's blade came into contact with the Samadhi Flames, loud sizzling noises could be heard once again, as the sheer heat from the fire began turning the divine metal used to craft the king's sword red-hot. Prompting Arthur to quickly disengage from their clash, as well as quickly lifting his shield to block a follow up attack from Nezha's spear. Realizing that a close quarter fight against Nezha now, would be extremely disadvantageous for himself. Arthur frantically began racking his brains to come up with a suitable plan to counter this new threat, as he continuously dodged and ducked incoming blows from the Third Lotus Prince, but all of them just didn't seem to cut it! Direct combat against the Third Lotus Prince was an obvious no go, although Excalibur had served him well through many a battle, constant contact with the Samadhi Flames might end badly for his faithful sword if he continued on. As for his other Divine Weapon, the Shield of Avalon may be damaged, but it would still fare well against Nezha's spear. However, one more punch from his left hand, and that could be all it takes for his shield to shatter into pieces. Speaking of the Shield of Avalon, perhaps the Walls of Camelot might have some use? But if his intention was to avoid fighting face to face, then using the shield's ability would defeat the entire purpose! If only he could find a way to have the Walls of Camelot separate him and his opponent, rather than trapping them both in an enclosed area… Hmm… Wait a minute… Suddenly, inspiration struck Arthur, quick as a wink he raised Excalibur, managing to directly parry another blow from Nezha's fist, a heavy, "BOOM!" reverberated across the arena, as the heavy recoil that ensued sent both fighters flying apart from one another, with Nezha landing on the right side, whilst Arthur landed on the left. As he did, Arthur quickly got to his feet, but strangely instead of positioning himself with his shield and sword facing towards his opponent, the King of Camelot had instead chosen to go with perhaps the strangest possible option he could by having his side facing Nezha, whilst the front of his body stood facing the arena walls, much to the confusion of everyone in the audience. "Fufu, Looks like the heatwaves from the Third Lotus Prince's fire has finally driven that foolish human mad, or perhaps he has just realized that victory is impossible," Amaterasu snickered as she and the other two Sun Gods observed the match. "No… I don't think so, Amy," Huitzilopochtli replied as he began chewing the food in his mouth faster in anticipation, as Nezha began moving forward, once again towards Arthur, "I think that guy still has some kind of trick in store for Nezha." As the Aztec Chief God said this, the Shield of Avalon glowed bright blue once again, as Arthur activated the Walls of Camelot, materializing the two force fields back into the arena. Except that this time, due to the direction Arthur now stood in, instead of the forcefields keeping the two fighters trapped in a small lane, they now stood perpendicular to the Third Lotus Prince. With Arthur safely behind them for the time being, while his opponent was kept out! Nezha skidded to a halt as he saw this, his eyebrows cocked in surprise at what the king had done. Meanwhile, Arthur turned his head to face his opponent as he raised Excalibur with his left arm. With the sword not being made of flesh nor bones, it could still pass through the forcefield to strike Nezha, while the Third Lotus Prince could not! Seeing this, Nezha could help but smirk at Arthur's quick thinking and ability to adapt, "What's the matter, King Arthur?" He said with a light taunt, "You aren't flaking out on me now, are you?" Arthur responded with a smirk of his own through heavy pants, "Well… i'll admit this is rather underhanded, but it was the best thing I could think of to assist me now after seeing just how dangerous that Samadhi Flame of yours is!" Nezha chuckled as he flexed his left arm, "Ah, true I guess, this stuff is pretty dangerous…" As he said this, he casually tossed his spear from his right hand to his left, "So I totally get why even a brave warrior like yourself would cower at the sight of it…But that shield isn't gonna be able to protect you for much longer." As he said this, Nezha left hand tilted the Fire-tip spear at an extreme level, with the handle being almost perpendicular to the ground below as it rested on the back of his arm. RIght after this, The fires that made up Nezha's left hand slowly began to morph, the fingers fusing together to form a singular tip, much like a snake's tail. The positioning of his new hand also began to change, with his grip slowly moving downwards till it curled around the base of the spearhead, as his fiery hand began to grow in length till it was nearly the same as the length of his spear. Once this was done, Nezha's entire left arm slowly began to curl around and around the handle of his spear like a snake, slowly covering the entire polearm in blue fire, till it seemed that the Fire-Tip spear itself had fused together with Nezha's arm and become one with the Third Lotus Prince. https://preview.redd.it/gn123dfyr65d1.png?width=1024&format=png&auto=webp&s=a3cbe4333acffec695a6f92a87bfef8a684b0e38 As Arthur and the audience members watched in disbelief, Nezha slowly raised his new and improved left arm, elbow bent, and level with the ground. Slowly the flames that covered his spear began to spin and spin, getting faster and faster with each second, till the Lotus Prince's arm now resembled a flaming vortex with a sharp speartip at the center. Nezha's eyes glowed with an even more intense red, as the ground beneath his legs began to crumble whilst he crouched. "BOOM!" Without warning, a sonic explosion boomed across the arena, as Nezha flew forward from whence he stood. Left arm now outstretched, flames spinning faster than ever before, and with them the sharp point of the Fire-tip Spear as well, whirling around and around like a spinning drill head. Later on when interviewed, spectators of the round even swore up and down that as Nezha rushed towards the forcefield, they could perfectly visualize in front of them the gaping maw of nine roaring dragons. All made purely from the blue fires of the Samadhi flame that too formed Nezha's left arm, charging straight towards Arthur and his forcefield, jaws opened wide, whilst following the Lotus Prince's lead. Regardless of what they saw, that moment would soon go down in the books as the day Heaven first bore witness to Nezha's ultimate technique, originally born from the childhood memories shared between the son of a military general and the heir to the Dragon King. It had now become a incredible force of pure firepower that was to be reckoned with, it was called: "THE NINE DRAGONS HOLY FIRE SPEAR!" Arthur's eyes widened in horror as he flung his arms upwards, crossing his shield and sword in front of his body to shield himself from the impending attack, but it was useless. The moment the tip of the spear touched the forcefield, a cobweb of cracks splintered across the entire structure, expanding faster than the eye could see before with a resounding, "CRACK!" the entire structure shattered into pieces, dissolving into nothingness as Nezha shot forth aiming directly for the King of Camelot himself. "FWOOSH!" Humanity could only scream in horror, as they watched their fighter getting engulfed entirely in the fires of the Samadhi Flame. Before seeing through the flickering flames, the outline of Nezha's spear pierced straight through Arthur's chest, as the Lotus Prince blew straight past the King of Camelot, and landed heavily on the ground behind him. As the flames finally settled, mankind was horrified to see what remained of their fighter, standing in the middle of the battlefield, was a blackened and charred figure riddled with third degree burns, that used to be King Arthur Pendragon, with a large hole in the middle of it's chest as it stood upright. In it's hands was the hilt of the sword that used to be Excalibur, it's crystal blue blade almost completely shattered from the grievous blow, with a short jagged length still remaining. On the ground in front of the figure, was pieces of the round disc that was the Shield of Avalon, already damaged from Nezha's previous attack, and now reduced to bits and pieces on the floor. Silence in the arena, besides the crackling of flames spread across the battlefield that had resulted from Nezha's attack. As everyone stared open-mouthed at what had become of Arthur, some of the Knights of the Round Table even began breaking down into tears, believing it to be the end of their king. "A-arthur…M-my boy…" Merlin whimpered sorrowfully as he slumped in his chair. "No… It's not over yet, it CAN'T BE!" Lancelot yelled hysterically as he got up from his seat and rushed over to the edge of the stand, cupping his hands around his mouth as he yelled out to the statue that was his friend, "ARTHUUUUR! DON'T YOU DARE DIE ON ALL OF US NOW! WAKE UP! WAKE UPPPPPP!" "I-is it over?" Heimdall whimpered after a moment or two, "Did Nezha finally clinch the third victory in the row for the gods with his incredible firepower?" "No…" Nezha breathed heavily to himself, "Not just yet…" Right on que, answering both the desperate pleas of Lancelot, and the confidence Nezha had in his foe. Two slits on the figure's grievously burnt face suddenly burst open, revealing Arthur's eyes as his scorched d lips split apart, allowing him to let out a strangled gasp as he fell to his knees. Slowly, in a rather morbid display that made quite a few spectators pale, the King of Camelot's burnt skin began flaking off his body as new flesh, tissue and skin began to replace his old ones. From his face, a brown stubble began to sprout from his scalp, beard and upper lip as new hair follicles grew in to substitute the ones that were singed off. In a matter of minutes, the Scabbard of Excalibur's final healing charge of the day proved once again the incredible miracles it could perform, as what was once an unrecognizable and scorched statue, now stood Arthur Pendragon as he once was, slightly dazed and disorganized. But nevertheless, in near perfect condition as before, though his clothing was all but burnt away, save for his trousers, which gave the King of Camelot some dignity. "Y-you…You…You ABSOLUTE DICKHEAD!" Arthur burst out laughing as he finally managed to catch his breath, shocking the audience once more, "You KNEW my scabbard still had one last charge left! Why the bloody hell would you go and waste your ultimate technique on that then? That really HURT you know!" Nezha grinned, his face riddled with fatigue from pulling off such a powerful move, "I'm gonna be 100% honest with you right now… I kinda got way too caught up in the heat of the moment, and it just completely slipped my mind…" Arthur guffawed at the Third Lotus Prince's response, "Never change, Prince Nezha, never change… Well, what are you waiting for? Come and end the fight right now, I'm unarmed and undefended, and more importantly, I've no more tricks to play." Nezha shook his head, as a fiery glare appeared on his face, "Nah… There's no honor in striking down a fallen foe… If I am to be truly victorious, I want it to be with the both of us standing tall and proud, after having given it our all! SO COME ONE, KING OF CAMELOT! You haven't been one to give up when our match first began! SO WHY THE HELL START NOW? I know you've still got SO MUCH MORE to give!" Arthur smiled as he slowly got up to his feet, turning to face his opponent with a look of respect, "Then I thank you, Third Lotus Prince, Nezha. For giving me this chance to redeem myself, in a final clash against you for the sake of my people." "T-this is SUCH AN AMAZING SCENE!" Heimdall yelled with tears in his eyes, "The miraculous power of the Scabbard of Excalibur has once again saved King Arthur from certain doom! And the incredible display of sportsmanship and respect from the Third Lotus Prince, Nezha is truly heartwarming! But one cannot deny the truth, with no more healing charges from his scabbard, and his two Divine Weapons shattered. How in all of HEAVEN can Arthur possibly make a comeback from this and achieve victory for mankind?" The Watchman of the Apocalypse soon got his answer, as Arthur removed the Scabbard of Excalibur on the right side of his belt, and gently sheathed and covered the broken blade of his faithful sword. Before standing in his fighting stance, readying himself for battle. "Well then Third Lotus Prince," The king said as he now held up his makeshift blade with both hands, "If this truly be the finale of our battle, then let us both make sure that we end it with everything we got, and our hearts burning strong! So READY WHEN YOU ARE! LET'S FINISH THIS!" Nezha wore a smile of pure delight, as he leveled his flaming spear and prepared to charge, "LIKEWISE! My only regret is not meeting a worthy foe like you sooner!" With a loud battlecry, both fights rushed towards each other with their weapons drawn, as some spectators leaned forwards in anticipation to witness what many assumed to be their final clash. Meanwhile others, mostly humans, covered their eyes, unable to bear to watch their fighter get annihilated for real this time. "EXCALIBUR'S JUDGMENT!" "THE NINE DRAGONS HOLY FIRE SPEAR!" As the two weapon's met, a brilliant surge of bright blue light exploded from within the Scabbard of Excalibur, engulfing the entirety of the arena and forcing everyone to shut their eyes from the sheer intensity of the light. But as the audience opened their eyes, to see what now lay in front of them, they were left speechless… |
2024.06.07 19:31 eco-friendlytravel The 8 Most Eco-Friendly Cities in the USA You Need to Visit Now
 | https://preview.redd.it/3y3ivgo8q65d1.jpg?width=8064&format=pjpg&auto=webp&s=b0f15dafcdcb9ba9f4d912316562744471858da6 submitted by eco-friendlytravel to u/eco-friendlytravel [link] [comments] In a world where sustainability is increasingly prioritized, eco-friendly travel destinations offer a unique appeal. The United States boasts several cities known for their commitment to environmental consciousness and green living. Let's explore the top eight eco-friendly cities in the USA that you should consider visiting for a truly enriching experience. Portland, Oregon: Embracing Sustainable LivingPortland, Oregon, stands out as a beacon of sustainability in the Pacific Northwest. Renowned for its extensive network of bike lanes, public transportation, and eco-conscious initiatives, Portland encourages residents and visitors alike to minimize their carbon footprint. Explore the city's lush green spaces, thriving farmers' markets, and innovative eco-friendly businesses.San Francisco, California: Leading the Way in Green InnovationSan Francisco, California, takes pride in its role as a leader in green innovation. From its comprehensive recycling programs to its commitment to renewable energy sources, the city sets a high standard for environmental stewardship. Enjoy breathtaking views of the Golden Gate Bridge and explore the city's vibrant neighborhoods, all while supporting eco-friendly businesses and initiatives.Seattle, Washington: A Hub of Sustainable PracticesSeattle, Washington, embraces a culture of sustainability and environmental awareness. Home to companies like Starbucks and Amazon, Seattle prioritizes green initiatives and eco-friendly policies. Visitors can experience the city's iconic landmarks, such as the Space Needle and Pike Place Market, while also exploring its thriving arts scene and natural beauty.Minneapolis, Minnesota: A Model for Eco-Friendly Urban PlanningMinneapolis, Minnesota, showcases the potential for eco-friendly urban planning. With an extensive network of bike paths, green spaces, and LEED-certified buildings, Minneapolis demonstrates a commitment to sustainable living. Visitors can enjoy outdoor activities year-round, from kayaking on the Mississippi River to exploring the city's numerous parks and trails.Boston, Massachusetts: Preserving Historic Charm with Modern SustainabilityBoston, Massachusetts, seamlessly blends historic charm with modern sustainability practices. As one of the oldest cities in the United States, Boston has embraced green initiatives while preserving its rich cultural heritage. Explore iconic landmarks like Fenway Park and the Freedom Trail, all while supporting local businesses committed to eco-friendly practices.Austin, Texas: Fostering a Culture of Environmental ResponsibilityAustin, Texas, prides itself on fostering a culture of environmental responsibility and eco-conscious living. Known for its vibrant music scene and bustling food scene, Austin also prioritizes sustainability through initiatives like its single-use plastic ban and commitment to renewable energy. Visitors can enjoy live music venues, outdoor dining experiences, and scenic outdoor attractions.Boulder, Colorado: Surrounded by Natural Beauty and Environmental AwarenessBoulder, Colorado, offers a perfect blend of natural beauty and environmental awareness. Nestled against the backdrop of the Rocky Mountains, Boulder encourages outdoor recreation and sustainable living. Explore the city's extensive trail system, vibrant arts scene, and commitment to organic dining options.Burlington, Vermont: A Small City with a Big Focus on SustainabilityBurlington, Vermont, may be small in size, but it has a big focus on sustainability. As the first city in the United States to source 100% of its electricity from renewable sources, Burlington leads by example in environmental stewardship. Visitors can enjoy the city's charming downtown area, scenic Lake Champlain waterfront, and thriving local food scene.In conclusion, these eight eco-friendly cities in the USA offer more than just sustainable living—they provide enriching experiences for visitors seeking to explore the intersection of culture, nature, and environmental consciousness. Whether you're passionate about green initiatives or simply looking for a unique travel experience, consider adding these destinations to your bucket list. |
2024.06.07 19:25 Accurate_Implement64 Chance Me for TAMU engineering (I might be cooked)
Demographics: Indian male, rising senior, competitive TX high school
Stats:
submitted by Accurate_Implement64 to TAMUAdmissions [link] [comments]
Stats:
- 3.81 UW gpa, 4.8 W gpa on 6.0 scale 😭 (screwed up by taking high school classes in middle school)
- rank: school does not rank outside top 10%, I'm concerned about TAMU engineering since my GPA is 4.8 and the top 25% is 4.9, which is a shame since my grades before high school are a big reason why my GPA is so low.
- 1450 SAT (700 EBRW, 750 M), trying to get 800 on math on august test
- 18 AP Courses + 2 DE: AP HuG (4) , APWH (5), AP Spanish Lang (1 lmfao), AP Calc AB (BC exam), AP Physics 1, AP Seminar, APUSH, AP Bio, AP CSA, AP Lang, AP CSP, AP Gov/Econ, AP Stats, AP Physics C (Mech/E&M), APES, AP Lit, Calc III (dual enrollment), Differential Equations (dual enrollment), Data Structures and Algorithms (weighted as 6.0)
- Created website and app for a non-profit organization that has over 1000 users and 20 contributors. Been doing this for 3 years as the lead developer of the project, and more than anything it has allowed me to learn more coding languages and use my programming skills in a way that requires more precision and accuracy, since there are many people out there genuinely using my software.
- Interning at T50 CS lab and collecting data from social media which I can then use to make insights and deliver a presentation at the end of the internship. Kinda vague since I just started it lol
- Active addon creator for Microsoft Flight Simulator - Developed many addons such as aircraft liveries, realistically modeled airports, and performance optimization mods, with my biggest mod being a graphics mod to make the sim look more realistic. ~3000 downloads for all mods
- Part of Computer Science UIL at my high school for 3 years and attending pretty much every club meeting and competition that my school has related to programming. Did this mostly for fun with friends lol
- Personal Computer Science projects that I made using various languages such as R, Python, Java, JavaScript, and some webdev stuff with python flask.
- Peer tutor for physics on the weekends. Created a comprehensive doc that takes all the important parts from our lessons and puts them into one doc that makes concepts easier to understand. I have tutored about ~30 people at this point and I hope to grow it even more during senior year.
- Volunteering for ~105 hours as a part of the warehouse crew at a food packing facility
- Volunteering for 30 hours at NHS events or at our local temple
- Am a part of the Cybersecurity club, National Science Honor Society, table tennis club, and National Honor Society at my school. Again, this was mostly for fun and I didn't plan on getting any leadership positions here, which I regret :(
- Completed Harvard CS50's introduction to programming back in freshman year (might leave this off since the course was almost useless)
2024.06.07 19:12 markintalkintul Conservative Donors Flirt With Farage as Fight for UK Election Money Heats Up
At a fundraising dinner for big Conservative Party donors on May 21, UK Foreign Secretary David Cameron gave an upbeat speech. The economy was improving and the government’s plans were working he told the gathering. The party’s chief strategist Isaac Levido reinforced the message while party grandees such as Andrew Feldman and Stanley Fink — both with fundraising track records — were also present. The indication was that an Autumn election was on the cards.
It turned out Rishi Sunak had a different plan. Within 24 hours the prime minister had taken the country, and some members of his own cabinet, party and donor list by surprise, calling a snap general election for July 4. To some donors, Conservative Party strategy seemed at best confused.
Already a subscriber or Bloomberg Anywhere client? Sign In
updated 41 minutes ago
Home
BTV+
Market Data
Opinion
Audio
Originals
Magazine
Events
submitted by markintalkintul to u/markintalkintul [link] [comments]
It turned out Rishi Sunak had a different plan. Within 24 hours the prime minister had taken the country, and some members of his own cabinet, party and donor list by surprise, calling a snap general election for July 4. To some donors, Conservative Party strategy seemed at best confused.
More From Bloomberg
updated 41 minutes agoTop Reads
HomeBTV+Market DataOpinionAudioOriginalsMagazineEventsNewsMarketsEconomicsTechnologyPoliticsGreenCryptoAIWork & LifeWealthPursuitsBusinessweekCityLabEqualityPursuitsWork ShiftMarket DataStocksCommoditiesRates & BondsCurrenciesFuturesSectorsEconomic CalendarExploreNewslettersExplainersThe Big TakeGraphicsSubmit a TipAbout UsTerms of ServiceDo Not Sell or Share My Personal InformationTrademarksPrivacy PolicyCareersMade in NYCAdvertiseAd ChoicesHelp©2024 Bloomberg L.P. All Rights Reserved.Already a subscriber or Bloomberg Anywhere client? Sign In
Continue reading with one of the options below
FREE ACCOUNT
- Read this article
- Free newsletters
SUBSCRIPTION
- Unlimited access to Bloomberg.com
- Unlimited a
- At a fundraising dinner for big Conservative Party donors on May 21, UK Foreign Secretary David Cameron gave an upbeat speech. The economy was improving and the government’s plans were working he told the gathering. The party’s chief strategist Isaac Levido reinforced the message while party grandees such as Andrew Feldman and Stanley Fink — both with fundraising track records — were also present. The indication was that an Autumn election was on the cards.
More From Bloomberg
updated 41 minutes ago
Top Reads
Home
BTV+
Market Data
Opinion
Audio
Originals
Magazine
Events
2024.06.07 19:11 NewBorder793 Tips for Getting Healthy
Introduction
Getting healthy can seem like a daunting task, but it doesn’t have to be. Whether you’re looking to make big changes or just small tweaks, focusing on your health can improve your quality of life significantly. In this article, we’ll explore practical tips and strategies to help you on your journey towards better health. Ready to take the first step? Let’s dive in!Understanding Your Current Health
Assessing Your Physical Health
Before you can improve your health, you need to understand your starting point. Schedule a check-up with your doctor to get a comprehensive picture of your physical health. Pay attention to metrics like blood pressure, cholesterol levels, and body mass index (BMI).Evaluating Mental Well-being
Your mental health is just as important as your physical health. Take a moment to assess your stress levels, emotional well-being, and overall mental state. Consider using mental health apps or speaking with a therapist for a more in-depth evaluation.Tracking Daily Habits
Start tracking your daily habits, including your diet, exercise, sleep, and screen time. This will help you identify areas for improvement and track your progress over time.Setting Realistic Health Goals
Importance of Goal Setting
Setting goals gives you direction and motivation. Without clear goals, it’s easy to lose focus and give up.Short-term vs Long-term Goals
Balance short-term goals (like drinking more water every day) with long-term goals (like losing 20 pounds in six months). Short-term goals keep you motivated, while long-term goals help you achieve significant changes.SMART Goals Framework
Make your goals Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Relevant, and Time-bound. This framework helps you set clear and attainable goals.Nutrition: Fueling Your Body Right
Basics of a Balanced Diet
A balanced diet includes a mix of fruits, vegetables, lean proteins, whole grains, and healthy fats. Avoid processed foods and focus on natural, nutrient-dense options.Importance of Hydration
Water is essential for all bodily functions. Aim to drink at least eight 8-ounce glasses of water a day, and more if you’re active or live in a hot climate.Meal Planning Tips
Plan your meals in advance to ensure you’re eating a balanced diet. This also helps you avoid the temptation of unhealthy snacks or takeout.Superfoods to Include in Your Diet
Incorporate superfoods like berries, leafy greens, nuts, seeds, and fatty fish into your diet. These foods are packed with nutrients and can boost your overall health.Exercise: Moving Towards Fitness
Benefits of Regular Exercise
Exercise improves cardiovascular health, strengthens muscles, enhances flexibility, and boosts mental health. It’s a crucial component of a healthy lifestyle.Types of Exercise
- Cardio: Activities like running, swimming, and cycling increase your heart rate and improve endurance.
- Strength Training: Lifting weights or doing body-weight exercises builds muscle and boosts metabolism.
- Flexibility Exercises: Yoga and stretching improve flexibility and reduce the risk of injury.
Creating an Exercise Routine
Find activities you enjoy and create a routine that fits your schedule. Aim for at least 150 minutes of moderate aerobic activity or 75 minutes of vigorous activity each week, plus muscle-strengthening activities on two or more days a week.Staying Motivated to Work Out
Set fitness goals, track your progress, and reward yourself for milestones. Find a workout buddy or join a fitness community to stay motivated.Mental Health: Cultivating Inner Peace
Importance of Mental Health
Your mental health affects every aspect of your life. Prioritize it as much as your physical health.Stress Management Techniques
Try techniques like deep breathing, meditation, yoga, and journaling to manage stress. Find what works best for you and incorporate it into your daily routine.Practicing Mindfulness and Meditation
Mindfulness and meditation help you stay present and reduce anxiety. Start with just a few minutes a day and gradually increase the time as you become more comfortable.Seeking Professional Help When Needed
Don’t hesitate to seek help from a therapist or counselor if you’re struggling with mental health issues. Professional support can make a significant difference.Sleep: The Foundation of Health
Importance of Quality Sleep
Sleep is essential for physical and mental recovery. Aim for 7-9 hours of sleep per night.Tips for Better Sleep Hygiene
Establish a regular sleep schedule, create a calming bedtime routine, and keep your bedroom dark and cool. Avoid screens and caffeine before bed.Creating a Sleep-friendly Environment
Invest in a comfortable mattress and pillows, use blackout curtains, and consider white noise machines or earplugs if you’re easily disturbed by noise.Healthy Relationships: Building a Support System
Importance of Social Connections
Strong relationships improve mental health, provide support, and increase life satisfaction. Make time for friends and family.Communicating Effectively
Good communication is key to healthy relationships. Practice active listening, express your feelings openly, and resolve conflicts calmly.Building Strong Relationships
Nurture your relationships by spending quality time together, showing appreciation, and supporting each other’s goals and dreams.Avoiding Harmful Habits
Identifying Harmful Habits
Recognize habits that harm your health, such as smoking, excessive drinking, and poor diet choices.Strategies for Breaking Bad Habits
Replace bad habits with healthier alternatives. For example, swap smoking for chewing gum or drinking for engaging in a hobby.Replacing Bad Habits with Good Ones
Focus on building new, positive habits that promote health, like regular exercise, healthy eating, and stress management.Preventative Health Measures
Importance of Regular Check-ups
Regular check-ups can catch potential health issues early, making them easier to treat.Vaccinations and Screenings
Stay up-to-date on vaccinations and health screenings. These preventative measures protect you from serious illnesses.Importance of Dental Health
Good dental health is crucial for overall health. Brush and floss daily and visit your dentist regularly.Staying Informed and Educated
Reliable Sources for Health Information
Use reliable sources for health information, such as government health websites, reputable medical organizations, and healthcare providers.Continuous Learning and Adaptation
Health recommendations change as new research emerges. Stay informed and be willing to adapt your habits accordingly.Myths and Facts about Health
Be wary of health myths and misinformation. Verify facts with trusted sources before making changes to your health routine.2024.06.07 19:03 Serious-Bullfrog5919 I regret purchasing an offset smoker.
It’s like tending to a new born child. It needs attention every 15 minutes. How do y’all have enough time to baby these things? For context, I purchased a Horizon offset (1/4 steel). After using it several times, I’ve had enough with wasting my days trying to tend to the fire and maintain temperatures. My go to has been my big green egg and pit boss pellet grill, which I think I’ll stick with.
submitted by Serious-Bullfrog5919 to smoking [link] [comments]
2024.06.07 18:56 Spooker0 Grass Eaters: Orbital Shift 4 Funny Business I
Previous
First Series Index Galactic Map RoyalRoad Patreon Discord
++++++++++++++++++++++++
“Hey Eupprio, wake up. Wakey wake.”
Eupprio’s eyes fluttered open, greeted by Fleguipu’s persistent nudges. Her body, still cloaked in the remnants of sleep, rebelled against the intrusion. She blinked away the grogginess and asked with a hoarse voice, “What’s going on?”
“We’re passing that ringed planet you said you wanted to look at,” Fleguipu said, pointing a claw at the image of Saturn on the full color external camera display mounted on the hull wall.
Eupprio took in its rings for a minute. The labyrinthine tapestry of shimmering ice and rock, stretching for thousands of kilometers in every direction. The rings appeared like a river of stardust, its particles ranging from tiny pieces of granulated ice to boulders the size of houses, the uneven distribution a result of cosmic collisions and gravitational dances that birthed it eons ago. Amidst them, the Cassini Division stood out as a dark ribbon of emptiness contrasting the luminous ice around it.
“Not bad, eh?” Aida called out across from her. “You have one of these in your Federation?”
“A few,” Eupprio said, not taking her eyes off the spectacle on the screen. “None in Malgeiru though.”
“Yeah, the most famous one in Malgeir space is occupied: Uidquu-8,” Fleguipu added with a hint of sadness. “Maybe we’ll get it back one day.”
As they sailed closer, they noticed that several sections in the rings were dotted with signs of Terran civilization.
Stretched out along the B-ring were a series of mining and habitation stations, like a string of pearls, each one teeming with exterior activity. Their metal surfaces reflected light from the planet, giving them an ethereal glow amidst the natural brilliance of the ring.
Amid the drifting ice and rock, ships darted like gleaming fish in a cosmic pond. Some were lumbering transport vessels, slowly shuttling people and goods between neighboring ring settlements. Others were more rugged, built for the rigors of interplanetary travel, their hull silhouettes followed by the characteristic blooms of their constant acceleration drives.
“Are we going to do a close fly-by?” Eupprio asked curiously.
“Somewhat. It’ll only boost our speed a little for our journey to Mars, but… it saves on fuel.”
Fleguipu’s brow creased in concern. “Isn’t this area supposed to be dangerous? Pirates? Terrorists?”
“Danger is a relative concept,” Aida responded with nonchalance. “We’re going pretty fast, and the smart ones usually don’t mess with our ships. We should be fine.”
++++++++++++++++++++++++
She was proven wrong about an hour later.
Abe’s voice broke through the intercom, “LT, there are a couple of bogeys burning to intercept. Zero decimal four two light seconds. Likely pirates.”
“Damn it,” Aida cursed under her breath as she looked at her alien charges. “Now that’s just embarrassing. Pilot, what transponder codes are they squawking?”
“No codes yet. They’re not that close: we have twenty minutes before we’d have to make a decision. After that, they’ll get close enough for it to get dicey. I’m on the lookout for other traps, but nothing so far. I think it’s just these guys. Should we go evasive?” Abe’s voice crackled through the speaker.
“Nah, save the fuel,” Aida decided swiftly. “Call our guys in the Navy. Free target practice for them.”
Eupprio asked nervously, “Everything alright, Aida?”
“A couple pirates are headed our way. You were briefed on decompression procedures, right?”
“Decompression?!” Eupprio’s voice climbed an octave. “Don’t we have weapons on the shuttle?”
“Only point defense. But don’t worry. I’m handling it.”
Abe’s voice returned, tinged with a hint of urgency. “Navy’s busy right now. They can have a patrol transit through the area in about six hours. Should we ask them to drop by?”
Aida shook her head. “That’s too long. They’re too far away. What are the bogeys mounting?”
“No foxes. Two gunpods each.”
She whistled at the brazenness. “These guys must be new. Fresh outta Titan.”
“Should I start burning now?” Abe asked.
“Not yet, I don’t want an extra deceleration burn,” Aida insisted. “Call them on the radio.”
The cargo bay fell into a tense silence, broken only by the sound of Abe’s attempts to establish contact with the approaching ships.
A gruff, distorted voice eventually crackled through the intercom. “You know the drill, yea? Let’s save us all some time.”
“This is Lieutenant Aida Naser, flying with Black Hole Sun. Who am I speaking to?”
“None of your damn business, merc!” They could hear the pirate spitting into his microphone.
“All due respect, but you made it my business when you started burning your ships towards me on an intercept course. Now, I don’t negotiate with strangers I don’t know the names of.”
“Fine! The name is Greer. Greer Thatch. Of uh… Thatch Enterprises. That’s who you’re dealing with!”
Aida looked around the cargo bay at the other troopers. There were a lot of shrugs and questioning looks in the exchanged glances.
Aida rejoined the conversation with politeness. “Sorry, how do you spell that? Is that two E’s or e-a-r? I can’t find you in our database—”
“Shut up! You know what we’re here for, yea?”
“Please, spell it out for me, Greer. I don’t want there to be any misunderstanding between us when… everything goes down.”
Greer seemed to hesitate and waver at her confidence, but he continued, “We’re going to board you and take your cargo. I suggest you cut engine thrust and comply with our demands.”
The cargo bay filled with laughter, some of the Terran contractors slapping each other on the backs in amusement. A couple did perfunctory checks on their weapons. Aida silenced them all with an impatient wave of her hand.
“That’s cute,” Aida retorted. “But before you try that, you should check our public registration and manifest. The only cargo we have is eighteen direct action troopers coming home from an extrasolar deployment, so unless you have a whole company of boarding specialists hiding in your skiffs, I’d suggest you come up with an alternate retirement plan, Greer.”
A tense silence stretched on the call. “You’re lying!”
Aida remained silent.
After a minute, Greer’s voice returned, tinged with frustration. “Man, that’s some bullshit… But we’re not going home empty. We won’t board you, but we can still blow up your shuttle! Dump your fancy centerline fuel pods or we’ll put a hole in your reactor!”
Aida sighed, her voice dripping with theatrical exasperation. “But what use are our fuel pods to you when our missiles find you?”
“You aren’t carrying anti-ship missiles on that tiny shuttle, no way!” There was a noticeable crack in the pirate’s voice.
“Not on this shuttle,” Aida conceded freely. “But check your charts, we’re within the coverage zones of at least six Black Hole Sun long-range missile batteries in the Red Zone. They’re not just going to let you go after you open fire on us. The only reason they haven’t fired on you yet is because… ah, two reasons actually: one, missiles are expensive, and two, it might make the company look bad on the evening news in Titan. Now, if you had a Charlie-rated or higher constant acceleration drive, you could probably outrun a couple of those missiles…”
Judging by the ensuing lack of reply from the other end, that was clearly not the case.
Aida continued steadily, “In any case, you’re on our radar now. Maybe we’ll just pass your registration on to the Navy, and they’ll come use you for target practice. Now… I know you did your orbital calculations… and you figure the Navy won’t show up within an hour or so. And you’d probably be right about that. But I bet their schedule clears up real quick once those guns of yours go off. And their missiles can get here a lot faster than their ships can too: I hear they aren’t as stingy with their munitions budget as we are.”
More silence.
“Or maybe we don’t call the Reps at all; instead, we pay a few people… find out where you live… Now I won’t get to decide which one of those it’ll be, because I’ll be dead, but in all likelihood, so will you—”
Obvious panic tinged the pirate’s voice now. “No— no wait. Let’s talk this through.”
“I’m listening.”
“First, no funny merc business. And no Navy reports!”
“What do we get in return?” Aida asked nonchalantly.
“We uh— we’ll clear out.”
“Not good enough. That ship has sailed, boys. I’ve already had to call in a couple contacts. This has cost me time and resources, so it’s going to cost you. And the closer you get to us, the more it’s going to cost both of us.”
“Wait, no, we’ll back off!” The sound of hurried movements crackled through the line before the microphone went dead.
From the cockpit, Abe relayed the update. “Looks like they’re cutting their acceleration. They’re no longer on an intercept course.”
The amateur pirate’s voice came through again, desperation clear. “We’ve stopped! We’ve stopped.”
“Good, now let’s talk about conditions.”
“What— What else do you want, merc? We can dump our cargo.”
“What would I want your cargo for,” Aida snorted in derision. “It’ll cost me more in time just to slow down to retrieve them. Nah, I think we’ll just pass the word to the Navy. Have a good afternoon or morning or whenever it is wherever you come from—”
“Wait, no, please! Don’t hang up! We’re just trying to make a living out here! Please, tell us how we can make it up to you!”
“Hm…” Aida pretended to think for a moment. “I guess I can take your dinky boarding skiffs. Might come in handy one day. Here’s what you’re going to do: burn straight back to Pandora Station, dock in ports Charlie-two and Charlie-three, leave the keys in the ignition, and I’ll give you a week to find your own way off the station before I call the cops.”
A strangled, frustrated cry echoed through the line. “But it took us forever to buy and fix up these ships! This is so unfair!”
“Sweetie, you should have thought of that before you got into this line of work.” Aida replied, her voice a blend of sternness… and sympathy, “Tell you what, I’m feeling extra generous today. You can keep one of your ships… your pick of which one. But both your crews better be on that ship and out of Pandora by the end of the business day.”
There must have been some disagreement between the two ships about which one of them was going to lose their spacecraft, but whatever it was, they resolved it in record time.
“Deal! No funny business as we leave, merc!”
“No funny business,” Aida promised. “You know our reputation; we don’t screw around like that. But don’t think you’ll get away with sabotaging my future ship if that’s what you’re thinking. I’ll be billing you for any damage I find when I get to Pandora.”
“We took good care of our ships!” the pirate replied wistfully.
“Aww. Come now, don’t be so melodramatic. Think of it as me doing you a personal favor: I really don’t think this whole piracy thing was going to work out for you anyway. If I were you, I’d suggest something in the tourism industry. Lots of potential for growth… Anyway, good doing business with you, and I hope for your sake we never see you again. Buh bye!”
She severed the connection.
Eupprio regarded Aida with curiosity. “You’re still going to report them to your Navy, aren’t you?”
Aida shrugged nonchalantly. “Nah. Probably not.”
“No?” Eupprio asked, surprised.
“Yeah, in the Red Zone, even now that it’s stabilized, you’re good as your word. People live and die by their reputation out here. I get these guys killed; that’ll probably get some of our other guys killed somewhere else.”
“I guess… that makes sense. Just too bad for some other traders coming by, right?”
“Maybe. Maybe not. You have to understand, these guys probably won’t ever get to do it again. They’re bankrupt: the people they owe money to are not the kind where you can just shuffle assets and declare bankruptcy. And it’s not just this crew. Most pirates are constantly a couple bad hauls away from financial disaster because it’s fundamentally not that great a business model, even if you don’t count the risk to their lives.”
“It’s not?! Seemed like an easy way to make some quick money!”
Aida shook her head, a wry smile on her lips. “Oh yeah, that’s what many of them thought too before their first haul. Nah, the returns are terrible. There’s some glamor if you’re one of the big fish, yes, but fighting in space… it’s expensive. Flying anywhere burns money, and chasing ships?” Aida shook her head. “So many credits. You can see most of them coming, and truckers usually run just because they know it’s too expensive for pirates to chase them; they figure if they’re going to lose money, better to waste it getting to their destination quicker than let the pirates get their stuff. And the weapons… oh God, the munition cost! When we first started in space like a century ago, weapons were literally anything you can bolt onto a ship frame. But after decades of fighting here, effective weapons have gotten increasingly expensive.”
“That makes sense,” Eupprio said, nodding in understanding. “More sophisticated weapons cost more.”
“Yup, as an average cargo pirate now, if you have to fire a missile out here, you’ve already lost… Financially ruined, even if you’re not getting hunted by the Navy. I’m not joking: the big pirate gangs literally buy and sell legit insurance products that pay out for when you fire missiles out here. Gunpods work, but you have to hope they don’t run and let you get in real close, which is rare. I think small-time hostage takers can still make a living… that’s if you don’t get on the radar of those Republic counter-terrorism operators itching for training opportunities, but everything else sucks.”
“Why do they do it then?” Eupprio asked. “If it’s such a raw deal for the average pirate as you say.”
“Nobody gets into this life hoping to be the average cargo pirate,” Aida explained. “There are two types of people out here bucking the long arm of the Republic. First, you have the ones out here for credits. There’s piracy and there’s smuggling—”
“Is smuggling generally unprofitable too?” Eupprio asked, once again recalling the security briefing she’d gotten before the trip.
“Oh no, smuggling is a whole different beast. Smuggling… now, that’s a lucrative business if you want to make some real money in the Red Zone. But you need to have contacts and you need to know the right people. Need some starting capital for deposits, to cover insurance, to pay off the gangs to leave you alone. Need lots of security so people don’t think you’re a pushover or they can screw you over just because you don’t have a lot of legal options.”
Fleguipu looked up sharply at her. “Sounds like you uh… know a lot about the business.”
Aida grinned shamelessly. “Heh yeah. If I hadn’t joined Black Hole Sun after my time in the Marines was up… Anyway, smugglers and pirates, most of them are small-time operations; a few get bigger. The big ones march over to the transport corporations and demand protection fees. They’re not supposed to, but some of these companies pay.”
“You said there were two types of criminals out here.”
“The true believers. Or as they call themselves, the Resistance,” Aida’s face turned dark. “The pirates who are here for money and excitement — they kick up a ruckus from time to time, but they don’t hold a candle to the psychos out here who actually believe every word they say. The ones who are willing to blow up stations and colonies full of innocent people simply because they have a problem with authority and want the Republic gone so they can run things around here. Nothing is off the table for the terrorists.”
“Didn’t your people say those groups are mostly extinct?” Eupprio asked nervously.
“That’s what the tourism brochure says,” Aida smiled thinly at her. She looked out the window at the retreating image of Saturn. “But we all know they’re still out there. Plenty of rocks to hide in the Red Zone. They have their own ships, their own bases. Thousands of their cells, just running cold and hiding in the dark, maybe more. Sure, they haven’t really done anything in years after the last Navy sanitation campaign, but we all know it’s a matter of time before they strike again.”
++++++++++++++++++++++++
Previous
submitted by Spooker0 to HFY [link] [comments]
First Series Index Galactic Map RoyalRoad Patreon Discord
++++++++++++++++++++++++
Shuttle Oathkeeper-32, Sol (4,700 Ls)
POV: Eupprio, Malgeir (Executive)“Hey Eupprio, wake up. Wakey wake.”
Eupprio’s eyes fluttered open, greeted by Fleguipu’s persistent nudges. Her body, still cloaked in the remnants of sleep, rebelled against the intrusion. She blinked away the grogginess and asked with a hoarse voice, “What’s going on?”
“We’re passing that ringed planet you said you wanted to look at,” Fleguipu said, pointing a claw at the image of Saturn on the full color external camera display mounted on the hull wall.
Eupprio took in its rings for a minute. The labyrinthine tapestry of shimmering ice and rock, stretching for thousands of kilometers in every direction. The rings appeared like a river of stardust, its particles ranging from tiny pieces of granulated ice to boulders the size of houses, the uneven distribution a result of cosmic collisions and gravitational dances that birthed it eons ago. Amidst them, the Cassini Division stood out as a dark ribbon of emptiness contrasting the luminous ice around it.
“Not bad, eh?” Aida called out across from her. “You have one of these in your Federation?”
“A few,” Eupprio said, not taking her eyes off the spectacle on the screen. “None in Malgeiru though.”
“Yeah, the most famous one in Malgeir space is occupied: Uidquu-8,” Fleguipu added with a hint of sadness. “Maybe we’ll get it back one day.”
As they sailed closer, they noticed that several sections in the rings were dotted with signs of Terran civilization.
Stretched out along the B-ring were a series of mining and habitation stations, like a string of pearls, each one teeming with exterior activity. Their metal surfaces reflected light from the planet, giving them an ethereal glow amidst the natural brilliance of the ring.
Amid the drifting ice and rock, ships darted like gleaming fish in a cosmic pond. Some were lumbering transport vessels, slowly shuttling people and goods between neighboring ring settlements. Others were more rugged, built for the rigors of interplanetary travel, their hull silhouettes followed by the characteristic blooms of their constant acceleration drives.
“Are we going to do a close fly-by?” Eupprio asked curiously.
“Somewhat. It’ll only boost our speed a little for our journey to Mars, but… it saves on fuel.”
Fleguipu’s brow creased in concern. “Isn’t this area supposed to be dangerous? Pirates? Terrorists?”
“Danger is a relative concept,” Aida responded with nonchalance. “We’re going pretty fast, and the smart ones usually don’t mess with our ships. We should be fine.”
++++++++++++++++++++++++
She was proven wrong about an hour later.
Abe’s voice broke through the intercom, “LT, there are a couple of bogeys burning to intercept. Zero decimal four two light seconds. Likely pirates.”
“Damn it,” Aida cursed under her breath as she looked at her alien charges. “Now that’s just embarrassing. Pilot, what transponder codes are they squawking?”
“No codes yet. They’re not that close: we have twenty minutes before we’d have to make a decision. After that, they’ll get close enough for it to get dicey. I’m on the lookout for other traps, but nothing so far. I think it’s just these guys. Should we go evasive?” Abe’s voice crackled through the speaker.
“Nah, save the fuel,” Aida decided swiftly. “Call our guys in the Navy. Free target practice for them.”
Eupprio asked nervously, “Everything alright, Aida?”
“A couple pirates are headed our way. You were briefed on decompression procedures, right?”
“Decompression?!” Eupprio’s voice climbed an octave. “Don’t we have weapons on the shuttle?”
“Only point defense. But don’t worry. I’m handling it.”
Abe’s voice returned, tinged with a hint of urgency. “Navy’s busy right now. They can have a patrol transit through the area in about six hours. Should we ask them to drop by?”
Aida shook her head. “That’s too long. They’re too far away. What are the bogeys mounting?”
“No foxes. Two gunpods each.”
She whistled at the brazenness. “These guys must be new. Fresh outta Titan.”
“Should I start burning now?” Abe asked.
“Not yet, I don’t want an extra deceleration burn,” Aida insisted. “Call them on the radio.”
The cargo bay fell into a tense silence, broken only by the sound of Abe’s attempts to establish contact with the approaching ships.
A gruff, distorted voice eventually crackled through the intercom. “You know the drill, yea? Let’s save us all some time.”
“This is Lieutenant Aida Naser, flying with Black Hole Sun. Who am I speaking to?”
“None of your damn business, merc!” They could hear the pirate spitting into his microphone.
“All due respect, but you made it my business when you started burning your ships towards me on an intercept course. Now, I don’t negotiate with strangers I don’t know the names of.”
“Fine! The name is Greer. Greer Thatch. Of uh… Thatch Enterprises. That’s who you’re dealing with!”
Aida looked around the cargo bay at the other troopers. There were a lot of shrugs and questioning looks in the exchanged glances.
Aida rejoined the conversation with politeness. “Sorry, how do you spell that? Is that two E’s or e-a-r? I can’t find you in our database—”
“Shut up! You know what we’re here for, yea?”
“Please, spell it out for me, Greer. I don’t want there to be any misunderstanding between us when… everything goes down.”
Greer seemed to hesitate and waver at her confidence, but he continued, “We’re going to board you and take your cargo. I suggest you cut engine thrust and comply with our demands.”
The cargo bay filled with laughter, some of the Terran contractors slapping each other on the backs in amusement. A couple did perfunctory checks on their weapons. Aida silenced them all with an impatient wave of her hand.
“That’s cute,” Aida retorted. “But before you try that, you should check our public registration and manifest. The only cargo we have is eighteen direct action troopers coming home from an extrasolar deployment, so unless you have a whole company of boarding specialists hiding in your skiffs, I’d suggest you come up with an alternate retirement plan, Greer.”
A tense silence stretched on the call. “You’re lying!”
Aida remained silent.
After a minute, Greer’s voice returned, tinged with frustration. “Man, that’s some bullshit… But we’re not going home empty. We won’t board you, but we can still blow up your shuttle! Dump your fancy centerline fuel pods or we’ll put a hole in your reactor!”
Aida sighed, her voice dripping with theatrical exasperation. “But what use are our fuel pods to you when our missiles find you?”
“You aren’t carrying anti-ship missiles on that tiny shuttle, no way!” There was a noticeable crack in the pirate’s voice.
“Not on this shuttle,” Aida conceded freely. “But check your charts, we’re within the coverage zones of at least six Black Hole Sun long-range missile batteries in the Red Zone. They’re not just going to let you go after you open fire on us. The only reason they haven’t fired on you yet is because… ah, two reasons actually: one, missiles are expensive, and two, it might make the company look bad on the evening news in Titan. Now, if you had a Charlie-rated or higher constant acceleration drive, you could probably outrun a couple of those missiles…”
Judging by the ensuing lack of reply from the other end, that was clearly not the case.
Aida continued steadily, “In any case, you’re on our radar now. Maybe we’ll just pass your registration on to the Navy, and they’ll come use you for target practice. Now… I know you did your orbital calculations… and you figure the Navy won’t show up within an hour or so. And you’d probably be right about that. But I bet their schedule clears up real quick once those guns of yours go off. And their missiles can get here a lot faster than their ships can too: I hear they aren’t as stingy with their munitions budget as we are.”
More silence.
“Or maybe we don’t call the Reps at all; instead, we pay a few people… find out where you live… Now I won’t get to decide which one of those it’ll be, because I’ll be dead, but in all likelihood, so will you—”
Obvious panic tinged the pirate’s voice now. “No— no wait. Let’s talk this through.”
“I’m listening.”
“First, no funny merc business. And no Navy reports!”
“What do we get in return?” Aida asked nonchalantly.
“We uh— we’ll clear out.”
“Not good enough. That ship has sailed, boys. I’ve already had to call in a couple contacts. This has cost me time and resources, so it’s going to cost you. And the closer you get to us, the more it’s going to cost both of us.”
“Wait, no, we’ll back off!” The sound of hurried movements crackled through the line before the microphone went dead.
From the cockpit, Abe relayed the update. “Looks like they’re cutting their acceleration. They’re no longer on an intercept course.”
The amateur pirate’s voice came through again, desperation clear. “We’ve stopped! We’ve stopped.”
“Good, now let’s talk about conditions.”
“What— What else do you want, merc? We can dump our cargo.”
“What would I want your cargo for,” Aida snorted in derision. “It’ll cost me more in time just to slow down to retrieve them. Nah, I think we’ll just pass the word to the Navy. Have a good afternoon or morning or whenever it is wherever you come from—”
“Wait, no, please! Don’t hang up! We’re just trying to make a living out here! Please, tell us how we can make it up to you!”
“Hm…” Aida pretended to think for a moment. “I guess I can take your dinky boarding skiffs. Might come in handy one day. Here’s what you’re going to do: burn straight back to Pandora Station, dock in ports Charlie-two and Charlie-three, leave the keys in the ignition, and I’ll give you a week to find your own way off the station before I call the cops.”
A strangled, frustrated cry echoed through the line. “But it took us forever to buy and fix up these ships! This is so unfair!”
“Sweetie, you should have thought of that before you got into this line of work.” Aida replied, her voice a blend of sternness… and sympathy, “Tell you what, I’m feeling extra generous today. You can keep one of your ships… your pick of which one. But both your crews better be on that ship and out of Pandora by the end of the business day.”
There must have been some disagreement between the two ships about which one of them was going to lose their spacecraft, but whatever it was, they resolved it in record time.
“Deal! No funny business as we leave, merc!”
“No funny business,” Aida promised. “You know our reputation; we don’t screw around like that. But don’t think you’ll get away with sabotaging my future ship if that’s what you’re thinking. I’ll be billing you for any damage I find when I get to Pandora.”
“We took good care of our ships!” the pirate replied wistfully.
“Aww. Come now, don’t be so melodramatic. Think of it as me doing you a personal favor: I really don’t think this whole piracy thing was going to work out for you anyway. If I were you, I’d suggest something in the tourism industry. Lots of potential for growth… Anyway, good doing business with you, and I hope for your sake we never see you again. Buh bye!”
She severed the connection.
Eupprio regarded Aida with curiosity. “You’re still going to report them to your Navy, aren’t you?”
Aida shrugged nonchalantly. “Nah. Probably not.”
“No?” Eupprio asked, surprised.
“Yeah, in the Red Zone, even now that it’s stabilized, you’re good as your word. People live and die by their reputation out here. I get these guys killed; that’ll probably get some of our other guys killed somewhere else.”
“I guess… that makes sense. Just too bad for some other traders coming by, right?”
“Maybe. Maybe not. You have to understand, these guys probably won’t ever get to do it again. They’re bankrupt: the people they owe money to are not the kind where you can just shuffle assets and declare bankruptcy. And it’s not just this crew. Most pirates are constantly a couple bad hauls away from financial disaster because it’s fundamentally not that great a business model, even if you don’t count the risk to their lives.”
“It’s not?! Seemed like an easy way to make some quick money!”
Aida shook her head, a wry smile on her lips. “Oh yeah, that’s what many of them thought too before their first haul. Nah, the returns are terrible. There’s some glamor if you’re one of the big fish, yes, but fighting in space… it’s expensive. Flying anywhere burns money, and chasing ships?” Aida shook her head. “So many credits. You can see most of them coming, and truckers usually run just because they know it’s too expensive for pirates to chase them; they figure if they’re going to lose money, better to waste it getting to their destination quicker than let the pirates get their stuff. And the weapons… oh God, the munition cost! When we first started in space like a century ago, weapons were literally anything you can bolt onto a ship frame. But after decades of fighting here, effective weapons have gotten increasingly expensive.”
“That makes sense,” Eupprio said, nodding in understanding. “More sophisticated weapons cost more.”
“Yup, as an average cargo pirate now, if you have to fire a missile out here, you’ve already lost… Financially ruined, even if you’re not getting hunted by the Navy. I’m not joking: the big pirate gangs literally buy and sell legit insurance products that pay out for when you fire missiles out here. Gunpods work, but you have to hope they don’t run and let you get in real close, which is rare. I think small-time hostage takers can still make a living… that’s if you don’t get on the radar of those Republic counter-terrorism operators itching for training opportunities, but everything else sucks.”
“Why do they do it then?” Eupprio asked. “If it’s such a raw deal for the average pirate as you say.”
“Nobody gets into this life hoping to be the average cargo pirate,” Aida explained. “There are two types of people out here bucking the long arm of the Republic. First, you have the ones out here for credits. There’s piracy and there’s smuggling—”
“Is smuggling generally unprofitable too?” Eupprio asked, once again recalling the security briefing she’d gotten before the trip.
“Oh no, smuggling is a whole different beast. Smuggling… now, that’s a lucrative business if you want to make some real money in the Red Zone. But you need to have contacts and you need to know the right people. Need some starting capital for deposits, to cover insurance, to pay off the gangs to leave you alone. Need lots of security so people don’t think you’re a pushover or they can screw you over just because you don’t have a lot of legal options.”
Fleguipu looked up sharply at her. “Sounds like you uh… know a lot about the business.”
Aida grinned shamelessly. “Heh yeah. If I hadn’t joined Black Hole Sun after my time in the Marines was up… Anyway, smugglers and pirates, most of them are small-time operations; a few get bigger. The big ones march over to the transport corporations and demand protection fees. They’re not supposed to, but some of these companies pay.”
“You said there were two types of criminals out here.”
“The true believers. Or as they call themselves, the Resistance,” Aida’s face turned dark. “The pirates who are here for money and excitement — they kick up a ruckus from time to time, but they don’t hold a candle to the psychos out here who actually believe every word they say. The ones who are willing to blow up stations and colonies full of innocent people simply because they have a problem with authority and want the Republic gone so they can run things around here. Nothing is off the table for the terrorists.”
“Didn’t your people say those groups are mostly extinct?” Eupprio asked nervously.
“That’s what the tourism brochure says,” Aida smiled thinly at her. She looked out the window at the retreating image of Saturn. “But we all know they’re still out there. Plenty of rocks to hide in the Red Zone. They have their own ships, their own bases. Thousands of their cells, just running cold and hiding in the dark, maybe more. Sure, they haven’t really done anything in years after the last Navy sanitation campaign, but we all know it’s a matter of time before they strike again.”
++++++++++++++++++++++++
Previous
2024.06.07 18:48 Pitiful_Deer4909 AITAH for telling my father-in-law that my sister-in-law is dangerously overweight, and he enables her?
A little backstory: what's usually means a lot of backstory LOL but here goes:
My sister-in-law was born with a lot of medical complications. She has had numerous surgeries before she reached adulthood, and plenty more as an adult. She is a miracle baby, and despite many bad diagnosis she has overcome many of them. Her life is a full but complicated one, that I am very proud to be a part of.
She has very limited mobility, she can use a walker minimally, cannot walk on her own at all, she needs to be able to hold on to walls, railings, or she can also be guided with a gate belt, or your hands. She's also has very limited vision, adding to some of the mobility issues. Mostly in public she uses a wheelchair, that is manual, and whoever companies her pushes her and said wheelchair. She can transfer to chairs, the car, on her own for the most part, but needs to be watched and guided.
Her and I clicked immediately. She was the first person in my partners family I connected to, and our friendship is very genuine and close. A few years ago I became her PCA. She didn't like day programs due to her having social issues. She has very limited but hyper focused interests, and doesn't like to talk about much outside of them, so it is very difficult for her to socialize with others who arent understanding of this.
Her birth parents are also quiz essential "my daughter is handicapped so I have to do little thing for her" parents who I have come across a lot in my career. It isn't an out of ordinary thing, but the lack of doing things for oneself and lack of Independence can cause great issues. Her parents divorced at a young age and it was very tough on her. There have been a few Court battles over custody of her, and it has been a wild ride. All of this drama has been over for at least a decade before her and I met. Addiction also runs in the family, although not very obviously, and very high functioning. Due to her birth mother neglecting her in her early years after the divorce, and not feeding her proper meals, she's developed this fixation on food. Her birth father remarried rather quickly after the divorce, and her stepmother and her family are all wonderful people who have worked a lot with people with disabilities, or the elderly, or group homes, etc etc. They have made great strides in my SIL's life and well-being. But they also work full-time, on top of managing many things like aging parents, live in grandchildren, cooking meals, etc. This is one of the reasons why I was able to step in as a PCA.
Currently she is just under 5 ft tall, and the last time I attended a doctor appointment with her a year ago, she was 243 lb s. She has since gained weight, because her clothes are no longer fitting. It is becoming a great issue, because not only is this a concern for an average person, someone with very limited mobility being this overweight is extremely dangerous and detrimental to her independence.
In the past before I was in the picture, there was a short period of time where the whole family (dad, stepmom, grandparents, and her) got very into eating well and fitness. She learned healthier habits, and stuck to them for a while and lost weight. But a few years before covid, the habit started slipping, and when covid hit, a lot changed. I started becoming her PCA towards the end of covid.
Every activity, volunteer work, project, that we do is somehow connected to food. She's been volunteering at two places for many years, when her father worked from home, and he was able to take her to them. After she completed her volunteer work, he always took her out to lunch at a fast food restaurant, or got her ice cream at an ice cream shop. And this girl doesn't just want two scoops of ice cream on a cone. She wants a large Sunday with all the fixings and three extra toppings on it, and when you try to talk her out of it she has a lot of temper tantrums, manipulation tactics etc. she also hates any form of exercise, and currently the average amount of exercise she gets daily is walking around the house a little bit to the bathroom, walking out to the car when we go somewhere, and then walking either to her wheelchair or if it's close to her destination and sitting.
It is an unspoken agreement that when her primary caregivers get too old that she will most likely wind up in my care. What is fine, I am completely okay with this and prepared for it. But what worries me is the excess weight, and her only getting bigger and bigger. Her and I are the same age. So by the time she's in her elderly years so will I. I already have delicate joints due to contracting Lymes disease at a very young age. I worry that if she gets too big she will no longer be able to walk or move at all, and it will be a situation of having to roll her to change a nappy, give her sponge bath throughout the week, and doing a once or twice a week big shower that would be an hour or two long event. I gently encourage her everyday to make better choices and to exercise a little bit more. Her family follows through for the most point, but they also enable her greatly. For instance, she's an extremely picky eater, and only likes junk. She will eat a salad, but she doesn't like tomatoes in it, green peppers, olives, onions, celery, kale, any fancy lettuce, or any other nutritious vegetable. It just has to be lettuce, carrots, red or orange bell pepper. She also has to have croutons on it, on top of crispy fried onions, and tortilla strips. She then drowns it in ranch dressing. Her stepmother and I have been slowly adding less and less of the fattier ingredients, but still it's not enough. She also eats this after eating a huge plate of dinner, as a agreement not to have a second or third portion. They claim it's better than her not eating vegetables, and it's the only way to get a salad into her so they view it as a compromise. I would agree with this if that were her meal and she had some chopped up chicken in it or something. But I'm not the one who raised her, and I have to tiptoe with my opinions on things very carefully.
In the past her father has been very tough on staff whenever they try to bring up issues they have with her. It seemed that every day program, group situation, PCA, or PARA she has worked with has been some horrible problem. He is the typical blame everything on staff and his daughter is doing nothing wrong, and they aren't doing their job type of parent. While as a father-in-law, he is great. I adore him, he is one of my best buddies, and in the in law department I feel like I've hit the jackpot. But I know I have to be very gentle when I approach situations regarding my sister-in-law. I can be more Frank with her stepmom about issues, because she understands, but generally she's at work and I don't want to wear her out with more stuff when she gets home. Her father works from home owning his own business, and is around during the day to talk to and help out.
Yesterday we went to the movies. This is something we do about once a month, or if there's something she likes that's playing. She doesn't want to go to a movie she doesn't want to see, but she also likes the movie going experience. She also loves popcorn, especially movie theater popcorn. She usually wants candy along with a drink, which tends to be a pretty hefty price, so I always get candy at the dollar store before we go. And I'm also not the one paying for the outing.
I am also on a diet right now. I am trying to get into better shape because I never lost my pregnancy weight, and my daughter is like eight now LOL. I have been meal prepping and on a big health kick. Her stepmom is also on a big health kick. This where is my sister-in-law because the last time her primary caregivers were on healthcare, she wound up on one too and wasn't very happy about it LOL.
Usually when we order our snacks at concessions, when the employee asked if we want extra butter, I usually hint at no, shake my head no, or say no. My SIL always wants extra butter. She wants so much butter that it'll soak through the popcorn holder and leak on to her pants. This is also how her father orders her popcorn at movies or other events. Yesterday before I could signal to the employee, she asked for a lot of extra butter. It was a large popcorn, and we got two medium drinks. I got a diet coke, she got a lemonade iced tea mix.
While the previews were playing, I looked up the calorie information on movie theater popcorn on the theater we were attending's website. Without extra butter a cup of movie theater popcorn is around 100 calories which is reasonable. So a large popcorn, which tends to be between 10 and 15 cups usually amounts to 1,000 to 1,500 calories. The extra butter, depending on the size of the popcorn, and how much the employee adds tends to be around 500 extra calories for a small, 500 to 800 extra calories on a medium, and about 600 to 900 extra calories on a large. After reading this and the nutritional value, I did not want to eat any of the popcorn. She finished the entire bucket, with just a little bit at the bottom. She also finished her entire drink, which was the size of a Big gulp cup you would get at a gas station. Since she didn't get diet soda, I'm guessing her drink had to at least have been 3 to 400 calories minimum. She also ate some candy which didn't amount to much, it was about half a bag of single serving size m&Ms. Not the ones you would put in a Halloween bag, but the one size up from that. So about the size of a Halloween bag one. She also had two nerds rope, and a couple of peach gummy rings. I didn't really add those to the grand total, and didn't want to make it a day of talking to her about food, I just wanted to enjoy the experience. I also couldn't have talked her out of the food, because the popcorn is her main reason for going to the movies. Every activity she does as I've stated before somehow circles around food.
When we get home, I was getting her situated and we were talking about how the movie was. She asked me what I thought of the popcorn, since this was our first time at this particular theater. I said I wasn't sure, I only tried a little bit because I don't usually eat movie theater popcorn when it has extra butter. Her father interrupts us jokingly acting shocked, stating you can't have movie popcorn without extra butter, making her laugh. He went back to work in the dining room, and I snuck out to him, and informed him that extra butter on the popcorn she ate probably was at least 500 calories, but was more likely closer to the 700 to 800 range. And that she ate almost the entire thing of popcorn, which was around 1200 calories without the extra butter. That with the drinks and the candy, was probably more than what she should eat in an entire day given her sedentary lifestyle, and her obesity. Her BMI I think is a 40 or a 50 I forget, but it's up there and it's a concern. I said it to him gently, and I danced around it the best I could. But he didn't look too happy hearing this information. I know there's no way in hell he 100% believes that she should be able to eat like this, and I've heard him make several comments about her overeating. It's been an issue we have all discussed, and agreed to work on. But it seems like he caves the most out of all of us. They also had waffles and ice cream for dinner last night. So that was probably another hefty amount of food. She probably ain't close to 4,000 calories yesterday because I forget what she had for breakfast but it's never healthy.
We've all been talking about making a healthier plan for her, and I don't want to be the bad guy all the time by being the one that pushes her about this the most, tries to limit her junk food intake the most I can, having her completely miserable and hating me all the time, while everyone else is giving her ice cream and 1200 calorie popcorn like it's nothing. After I made this comment, I can see a look of sadness in my father-in-law's eyes. I don't think he really wanted to hear me say that. But I also felt that it needed to be said. I also know my limits, and understand that I am not her guardian, and I do not make the rules regarding her care. But I do think I should be allowed some input, being that I spend a lot of time with her.
This conflict of interest is very tough on me, I didn't want to take the job when I was first offered it because I was afraid of situations like this. But the good from this job far outweighs the bad. I get to spend almost every day with my new best friend and sister, we get to go bowling, go swimming, do volunteer work, go to different events, go to the movies, make beautiful artwork together for her art show, bake and cook new things, think of all kinds of new projects, etc. I also really enjoy almost all of my in-laws, especially the ones that live with my sister-in-law. My partner's nieces also live in the house with my other sister-in-law, who I get to play with often, and generally enjoy their antics. The last thing I want to do is overstep, and jeopardize this job that I love. But I fear that if I don't start vocalizing some of these issues, they won't be addressed as quickly, and the situation could get worse. I understand that they have struggled with her weight her entire adult life, and much of her teenage years, I understand that it's extremely hard for her to exercise, with her limited mobility and her extreme dislike of exercise. I understand that some early traumas in her life as well as having the addict genetic causes her to have a very complicated relationship with food, and these things won't be solved overnight. I don't think they'll ever be truly solved, and that it'll be an ongoing lifestyle change, that we have to work on and keep up with.
Before I left last night, my father-in-law made a comment to me. We never argue, but I do know to read some of his jokes as serious information. He joked around about my sudden health nuttiness is causing me to overanalyze everyone else is eating habits. He said it in a funny way, I forgot the wording, and I believe part of him meant it as a joke as well. But I strongly believe another part of him meant it as telling me I am overstepping by seemingly judging what she eats at the movie theater or at other events.
I feel like I need a third party non-biased person to go to with my issues. I don't know how to go on from here, and I feel guilty about making such a big deal about the popcorn, when he was lightly trying to joke with his daughter. But these little light jokes and comments to cheer her up are doing a lot more harm than good, sometimes. And it's erroding all of the work and effort I've put into her, and others who have put into her.
But since I will likely be her caretaker in her old age, where she has a lot more health issues naturally, I feel like I have a right to say some of these things now, so I can hopefully build a few healthier habits with her, to make her and my life easier when we are elderly. Am I the a****** for overstepping on these things and having these concerns? Is this simply not my business, and I should continue doing my job? The last thing I want to do is make him or her family feel like they're failing her, or not doing enough. Because they go above and beyond for her everyday. And she, along with his other children are my father-in-law's true top priority.
submitted by Pitiful_Deer4909 to AITAH [link] [comments]
My sister-in-law was born with a lot of medical complications. She has had numerous surgeries before she reached adulthood, and plenty more as an adult. She is a miracle baby, and despite many bad diagnosis she has overcome many of them. Her life is a full but complicated one, that I am very proud to be a part of.
She has very limited mobility, she can use a walker minimally, cannot walk on her own at all, she needs to be able to hold on to walls, railings, or she can also be guided with a gate belt, or your hands. She's also has very limited vision, adding to some of the mobility issues. Mostly in public she uses a wheelchair, that is manual, and whoever companies her pushes her and said wheelchair. She can transfer to chairs, the car, on her own for the most part, but needs to be watched and guided.
Her and I clicked immediately. She was the first person in my partners family I connected to, and our friendship is very genuine and close. A few years ago I became her PCA. She didn't like day programs due to her having social issues. She has very limited but hyper focused interests, and doesn't like to talk about much outside of them, so it is very difficult for her to socialize with others who arent understanding of this.
Her birth parents are also quiz essential "my daughter is handicapped so I have to do little thing for her" parents who I have come across a lot in my career. It isn't an out of ordinary thing, but the lack of doing things for oneself and lack of Independence can cause great issues. Her parents divorced at a young age and it was very tough on her. There have been a few Court battles over custody of her, and it has been a wild ride. All of this drama has been over for at least a decade before her and I met. Addiction also runs in the family, although not very obviously, and very high functioning. Due to her birth mother neglecting her in her early years after the divorce, and not feeding her proper meals, she's developed this fixation on food. Her birth father remarried rather quickly after the divorce, and her stepmother and her family are all wonderful people who have worked a lot with people with disabilities, or the elderly, or group homes, etc etc. They have made great strides in my SIL's life and well-being. But they also work full-time, on top of managing many things like aging parents, live in grandchildren, cooking meals, etc. This is one of the reasons why I was able to step in as a PCA.
Currently she is just under 5 ft tall, and the last time I attended a doctor appointment with her a year ago, she was 243 lb s. She has since gained weight, because her clothes are no longer fitting. It is becoming a great issue, because not only is this a concern for an average person, someone with very limited mobility being this overweight is extremely dangerous and detrimental to her independence.
In the past before I was in the picture, there was a short period of time where the whole family (dad, stepmom, grandparents, and her) got very into eating well and fitness. She learned healthier habits, and stuck to them for a while and lost weight. But a few years before covid, the habit started slipping, and when covid hit, a lot changed. I started becoming her PCA towards the end of covid.
Every activity, volunteer work, project, that we do is somehow connected to food. She's been volunteering at two places for many years, when her father worked from home, and he was able to take her to them. After she completed her volunteer work, he always took her out to lunch at a fast food restaurant, or got her ice cream at an ice cream shop. And this girl doesn't just want two scoops of ice cream on a cone. She wants a large Sunday with all the fixings and three extra toppings on it, and when you try to talk her out of it she has a lot of temper tantrums, manipulation tactics etc. she also hates any form of exercise, and currently the average amount of exercise she gets daily is walking around the house a little bit to the bathroom, walking out to the car when we go somewhere, and then walking either to her wheelchair or if it's close to her destination and sitting.
It is an unspoken agreement that when her primary caregivers get too old that she will most likely wind up in my care. What is fine, I am completely okay with this and prepared for it. But what worries me is the excess weight, and her only getting bigger and bigger. Her and I are the same age. So by the time she's in her elderly years so will I. I already have delicate joints due to contracting Lymes disease at a very young age. I worry that if she gets too big she will no longer be able to walk or move at all, and it will be a situation of having to roll her to change a nappy, give her sponge bath throughout the week, and doing a once or twice a week big shower that would be an hour or two long event. I gently encourage her everyday to make better choices and to exercise a little bit more. Her family follows through for the most point, but they also enable her greatly. For instance, she's an extremely picky eater, and only likes junk. She will eat a salad, but she doesn't like tomatoes in it, green peppers, olives, onions, celery, kale, any fancy lettuce, or any other nutritious vegetable. It just has to be lettuce, carrots, red or orange bell pepper. She also has to have croutons on it, on top of crispy fried onions, and tortilla strips. She then drowns it in ranch dressing. Her stepmother and I have been slowly adding less and less of the fattier ingredients, but still it's not enough. She also eats this after eating a huge plate of dinner, as a agreement not to have a second or third portion. They claim it's better than her not eating vegetables, and it's the only way to get a salad into her so they view it as a compromise. I would agree with this if that were her meal and she had some chopped up chicken in it or something. But I'm not the one who raised her, and I have to tiptoe with my opinions on things very carefully.
In the past her father has been very tough on staff whenever they try to bring up issues they have with her. It seemed that every day program, group situation, PCA, or PARA she has worked with has been some horrible problem. He is the typical blame everything on staff and his daughter is doing nothing wrong, and they aren't doing their job type of parent. While as a father-in-law, he is great. I adore him, he is one of my best buddies, and in the in law department I feel like I've hit the jackpot. But I know I have to be very gentle when I approach situations regarding my sister-in-law. I can be more Frank with her stepmom about issues, because she understands, but generally she's at work and I don't want to wear her out with more stuff when she gets home. Her father works from home owning his own business, and is around during the day to talk to and help out.
Yesterday we went to the movies. This is something we do about once a month, or if there's something she likes that's playing. She doesn't want to go to a movie she doesn't want to see, but she also likes the movie going experience. She also loves popcorn, especially movie theater popcorn. She usually wants candy along with a drink, which tends to be a pretty hefty price, so I always get candy at the dollar store before we go. And I'm also not the one paying for the outing.
I am also on a diet right now. I am trying to get into better shape because I never lost my pregnancy weight, and my daughter is like eight now LOL. I have been meal prepping and on a big health kick. Her stepmom is also on a big health kick. This where is my sister-in-law because the last time her primary caregivers were on healthcare, she wound up on one too and wasn't very happy about it LOL.
Usually when we order our snacks at concessions, when the employee asked if we want extra butter, I usually hint at no, shake my head no, or say no. My SIL always wants extra butter. She wants so much butter that it'll soak through the popcorn holder and leak on to her pants. This is also how her father orders her popcorn at movies or other events. Yesterday before I could signal to the employee, she asked for a lot of extra butter. It was a large popcorn, and we got two medium drinks. I got a diet coke, she got a lemonade iced tea mix.
While the previews were playing, I looked up the calorie information on movie theater popcorn on the theater we were attending's website. Without extra butter a cup of movie theater popcorn is around 100 calories which is reasonable. So a large popcorn, which tends to be between 10 and 15 cups usually amounts to 1,000 to 1,500 calories. The extra butter, depending on the size of the popcorn, and how much the employee adds tends to be around 500 extra calories for a small, 500 to 800 extra calories on a medium, and about 600 to 900 extra calories on a large. After reading this and the nutritional value, I did not want to eat any of the popcorn. She finished the entire bucket, with just a little bit at the bottom. She also finished her entire drink, which was the size of a Big gulp cup you would get at a gas station. Since she didn't get diet soda, I'm guessing her drink had to at least have been 3 to 400 calories minimum. She also ate some candy which didn't amount to much, it was about half a bag of single serving size m&Ms. Not the ones you would put in a Halloween bag, but the one size up from that. So about the size of a Halloween bag one. She also had two nerds rope, and a couple of peach gummy rings. I didn't really add those to the grand total, and didn't want to make it a day of talking to her about food, I just wanted to enjoy the experience. I also couldn't have talked her out of the food, because the popcorn is her main reason for going to the movies. Every activity she does as I've stated before somehow circles around food.
When we get home, I was getting her situated and we were talking about how the movie was. She asked me what I thought of the popcorn, since this was our first time at this particular theater. I said I wasn't sure, I only tried a little bit because I don't usually eat movie theater popcorn when it has extra butter. Her father interrupts us jokingly acting shocked, stating you can't have movie popcorn without extra butter, making her laugh. He went back to work in the dining room, and I snuck out to him, and informed him that extra butter on the popcorn she ate probably was at least 500 calories, but was more likely closer to the 700 to 800 range. And that she ate almost the entire thing of popcorn, which was around 1200 calories without the extra butter. That with the drinks and the candy, was probably more than what she should eat in an entire day given her sedentary lifestyle, and her obesity. Her BMI I think is a 40 or a 50 I forget, but it's up there and it's a concern. I said it to him gently, and I danced around it the best I could. But he didn't look too happy hearing this information. I know there's no way in hell he 100% believes that she should be able to eat like this, and I've heard him make several comments about her overeating. It's been an issue we have all discussed, and agreed to work on. But it seems like he caves the most out of all of us. They also had waffles and ice cream for dinner last night. So that was probably another hefty amount of food. She probably ain't close to 4,000 calories yesterday because I forget what she had for breakfast but it's never healthy.
We've all been talking about making a healthier plan for her, and I don't want to be the bad guy all the time by being the one that pushes her about this the most, tries to limit her junk food intake the most I can, having her completely miserable and hating me all the time, while everyone else is giving her ice cream and 1200 calorie popcorn like it's nothing. After I made this comment, I can see a look of sadness in my father-in-law's eyes. I don't think he really wanted to hear me say that. But I also felt that it needed to be said. I also know my limits, and understand that I am not her guardian, and I do not make the rules regarding her care. But I do think I should be allowed some input, being that I spend a lot of time with her.
This conflict of interest is very tough on me, I didn't want to take the job when I was first offered it because I was afraid of situations like this. But the good from this job far outweighs the bad. I get to spend almost every day with my new best friend and sister, we get to go bowling, go swimming, do volunteer work, go to different events, go to the movies, make beautiful artwork together for her art show, bake and cook new things, think of all kinds of new projects, etc. I also really enjoy almost all of my in-laws, especially the ones that live with my sister-in-law. My partner's nieces also live in the house with my other sister-in-law, who I get to play with often, and generally enjoy their antics. The last thing I want to do is overstep, and jeopardize this job that I love. But I fear that if I don't start vocalizing some of these issues, they won't be addressed as quickly, and the situation could get worse. I understand that they have struggled with her weight her entire adult life, and much of her teenage years, I understand that it's extremely hard for her to exercise, with her limited mobility and her extreme dislike of exercise. I understand that some early traumas in her life as well as having the addict genetic causes her to have a very complicated relationship with food, and these things won't be solved overnight. I don't think they'll ever be truly solved, and that it'll be an ongoing lifestyle change, that we have to work on and keep up with.
Before I left last night, my father-in-law made a comment to me. We never argue, but I do know to read some of his jokes as serious information. He joked around about my sudden health nuttiness is causing me to overanalyze everyone else is eating habits. He said it in a funny way, I forgot the wording, and I believe part of him meant it as a joke as well. But I strongly believe another part of him meant it as telling me I am overstepping by seemingly judging what she eats at the movie theater or at other events.
I feel like I need a third party non-biased person to go to with my issues. I don't know how to go on from here, and I feel guilty about making such a big deal about the popcorn, when he was lightly trying to joke with his daughter. But these little light jokes and comments to cheer her up are doing a lot more harm than good, sometimes. And it's erroding all of the work and effort I've put into her, and others who have put into her.
But since I will likely be her caretaker in her old age, where she has a lot more health issues naturally, I feel like I have a right to say some of these things now, so I can hopefully build a few healthier habits with her, to make her and my life easier when we are elderly. Am I the a****** for overstepping on these things and having these concerns? Is this simply not my business, and I should continue doing my job? The last thing I want to do is make him or her family feel like they're failing her, or not doing enough. Because they go above and beyond for her everyday. And she, along with his other children are my father-in-law's true top priority.
2024.06.07 18:43 bajajoaquin Budget Options for 24-Hrs of Glen Helen
For my 55th birthday in 2026, I’m going to race the 24 Hours of Glen Helen. I’ve never raced dirt bikes, but I’ve raced cars. I’ve been riding dirt bikes since about 2000 or so. I currently ride an XR650R. I’m doing Tecate to Cabo off road on it next spring and ride local so cal desert in the winter.
Anyway, I want to get something better suited to the 24 Hr. Budget for purchasing is in the $5k range. Two stroke or four is an option, but California green sticker is strongly preferred so I have more local riding options. Watching the Rocky Mountain video on their cheap bike challenge got me wise to the idea of an older two stroke, but I’ve really spent all my time on big four strokes having had two XR600s before my 650.
Plan is for having a three man team, all over 50, in the 190-lb range. Experienced riders but racing novices. Figure purchase price doesn’t include suspension or lighting.
ETA: looks like I’m going to be focusing on four strokes or pre-2002 two strokes. I really want a green sticker bike so I can ride year round.
submitted by bajajoaquin to Dirtbikes [link] [comments]
Anyway, I want to get something better suited to the 24 Hr. Budget for purchasing is in the $5k range. Two stroke or four is an option, but California green sticker is strongly preferred so I have more local riding options. Watching the Rocky Mountain video on their cheap bike challenge got me wise to the idea of an older two stroke, but I’ve really spent all my time on big four strokes having had two XR600s before my 650.
Plan is for having a three man team, all over 50, in the 190-lb range. Experienced riders but racing novices. Figure purchase price doesn’t include suspension or lighting.
ETA: looks like I’m going to be focusing on four strokes or pre-2002 two strokes. I really want a green sticker bike so I can ride year round.
2024.06.07 18:35 bluezagpinkzig15 1st Time Travelling to Saint Maarten
Hi,
1st time coming to Saint Maarten (South-west side). Staying in mid-July. I had a few questions. I hope this group can advise.
submitted by bluezagpinkzig15 to SXM [link] [comments]
1st time coming to Saint Maarten (South-west side). Staying in mid-July. I had a few questions. I hope this group can advise.
- Kid-friendly activities? We have 1 boat trip/snorkel outing planned. We cannot do the flying dutchman-1 child doesn't meet the weight minimum. Looking for other things to occupy 3 middle-schoolers. We want to save Yoda museum & Pirate adventure for a rainy day.
- Groceries? We will have a kitchen but wondering where we should go for staple items (bread, milk, eggs, fruits/veggies).
- Should we prepare the kids that they might see nude beachgoers? Or just not make it a big deal? Are they few and far between? We'd like to explore several beaches but we don't want our sons distracted/freaking out.
- Should we rent a car for the day and explore the north side? I've heard the food is great but my sons can devour their weight in sushi. They are not picky eaters. Are there reasonably priced places on the north end? Nothing fancy but tasty and a good value for a family of 5?
2024.06.07 18:17 MD_thrway_AfterPea I am 31 years old, make $92,600 base, live in Northern Alberta, work in Forestry and recently returned to work after a year off for maternity leave
Title: I am 31 years old, make $92,600 base, live in Northern Alberta, work in Forestry, and recently returned to work after a year off for maternity leave.
Section One: Assets and Debt
Retirement Balance: Total $76,431 (joint)
Savings account balance: $450 in emergency savings (this is a priority starting in August to beef up), $2000 in property taxes sinking fund (to be spent by July)
Checking account balance: $5288.15 - we both got paid today so I will be moving money around and this number will be down a lot by the end of the day.
Credit card debt: $16,635
Section Two: Income
Income Progression (Post College/Trade School):
Mine: $4768.90 (two paycheck months)
Day 1 - Friday
2 am - L wakes up and I get her back down 3 times before 3 am. At 3, H takes her out of the room to burn some energy before they both come back to bed roughly an hour later. Thanks, L. Thank you, H I was getting pretty frustrated with our darling child.
6:30 am - The first alarm goes off and I grab L for a cuddle and morning nursing session. Once she’s done, she rolls around and tries to climb both of us to get our phones before we all get out of bed at 7. Today is a PJ movie day at daycare so we don’t bother dressing her only changing the diaper and then H and L are out the door by 7:15. I leave for work at about 7:45 after doing some putting around.
8:15 am - I get to work and my first stop is the coffee machine. I get back to my office after talking to a few coworkers about our social club golf event next weekend. I see that an industry-specific mentor cohort program is open for applications so I find my most recent resume (2021!) and do a major update before applying. This year one of my goals is to work on leadership skills and mentoring so why not apply?
9 am - I had a hard time finding a bra this morning so I go online and purchase two new ones from the local bra-tique for pickup. My total is $170 after my 10% discount for signing up for their email list. This money is coming from my $500 annual work benefit for whatever I want and I now have $20 left. I eat my breakfast at my desk - yoghurt and homemade granola today.
11 am - I have a webinar on caribou to attend so I log into Zoom and while it's loading, pull up our cashflow forecaster to get the payday finances done before the weekend. $1750 to H’s cc to cover some overspending/vehicle expenses, $100 to the LOC, $373.10 for utilities, and $450 for daycare. Total is $2673.10 I’m not sure if I should include the bills in the daily writeups, but ah well. Day 1 spending is off to a great start.
1 pm - I get the notification that my bras are ready for pickup. Woohoo! I get new bras for the weekend! I send $50 to H’s TFSA once I confirm the bank account is connected.
2:30 pm - Eating lunch now as breakfast was so late. Freezer butter chicken with broccoli. I only have 1 more freezer meal at work so I make a note to restock.
3:30 pm - I work on some cycle times for the log haul for this coming logging season. It takes me a few minutes to remember exactly what I’m doing and how to do it. I am super glad I came back to work at the end of April as I get 3-ish months of slow time to get back into the swing of things before work starts to pick up.
4 pm - I am struggling to do any more than format my Excel sheets so I figure it’s time to pack it up and head home.
4:30 pm - After picking up my bras, I go to Once Upon A Child for some cheap baby clothes. L is in between sizes and we somehow managed to misplace all her more summery sleepwear so I’ve been grabbing a few here and there. OUAC has a sale on, 5 sleepers for $15 so I grab 5 of those and 4 other onesies for summer. We have a family photoshoot on Canada Day and I’ve been hunting for something that’ll match L’s ribbon skirt. $30.45
5 pm - I stop at the store to check the mail and grab a 12-pack of mixed tequila smashes. $37.55
5:30 pm - H calls. He’s off work and headed to get L. I pull burgers and fries out of the freezer, start up the BBQ and get the air fryer going.
6:05 pm - H and L arrive home in perfect time as the burgers and fries just finished cooking. I have an open Pineapple Tequila Smash and I hand H one to drink with supper too. L also has a veggie pouch with the burgers and fries.
7:20 pm - L is in bed nursing to sleep after her bath while H preps episode 4 of Obi-Wan Kenobi for us to watch. We watched it when it was first coming out, but he saw the discs at Walmart last week and figured to grab them. We thought we hadn’t seen all the episodes, but so far we’re 3:3 so we might’ve seen them all.
7:40 pm - L is down and out and I sneak out of the bedroom. I start a load of laundry and find the two bras I couldn’t this morning and handwash them. I sit down with H and we watch some Obi-Wan Kenobi.
10 pm - I check my email and see one from a local photographer group I really like. I’ve done at least two shoots with all 3 of them separately before and they’ve now joined forces. I went to their open house yesterday and won 50% off a boudoir package in 2024. I’ve wanted to book in since they announced their group, so I go through their open spots and book for November. My initial deposit is $262.50.
10:30 pm - We finished the last 3 episodes and watched all previously except for the finale. Of course. It was pretty good, but near the end, I started to scroll on my phone more than pay attention to the show. I swap the laundry, shower and head to bed at 11 pm.
H’s spending Day 1: $7.54 for lunch, $267.58 on vehicle parts/oil change that we didn’t budget for. Normally we would’ve, but communication is kinda crappy atm, and I think that’s due to sleep deprivation.
Day 1 total: $775.62 spending + $50 to TFSA. Oof off to a spendy start for the pay period.
—
Day 2 - Saturday
2:40 am - L is awake again and not going back down. This time it’s my turn. It’s already been a not-great night, hopefully, this 2 am party time doesn't keep happening.
4 am - We go back to bed. Our internet is on autopay and the notification comes through for my credit card. $105
7:20 am - L is up for the day. I don’t want to get out of bed yet, so I cuddle H and L rolls around, tries to stand and almost deletes everything on my phone. Then she notices my boobs so it’s time for a quick nurse.
8 am - I run the coffee machine and get breakfast going. We’re having pancakes this morning. While they’re cooking I pop some milk in the frother to make a fancy coffee. TBD if I drink it while it’s still hot. I feed the cats their morning meal.
8:30 am - H gets up and I’m still cooking. He grabs a coffee and takes L into the living room so I don’t trip over her and the plastic container horde.
9:30 am - H plays some Baldurs Gate 3 and L watches while I sort through the laundry I did last night. I try to get dressed and none of my shorts fit anymore so off in the donation bag they go. It’ll be a summer of dresses I guess! I start another load of laundry.
9:50 am - L is ready for a nap. Just kidding she just wanted some boob instead. We go outside afterwards to get some morning sun. Hopefully, this will tire her out and she will go down for a nap later! She hasn’t been big on sleep since she was born and gets major FOMO so we have no semblance of a schedule on weekends.
10:45 am - I bring L back inside and change her into outfit #3 for the day. Her trike got rained on and she gets soaked when she sits in it. I switch the laundry over, start yet another load and then pass L to H so I can head to the store, fill the Jerry can with gas for the lawnmower and do the recycling. 20 L of gas is $32.78 and I grab two lime slushes for H and I ($5.19). It’s +20 already and gorgeous. Total $37.97
11:30 am - L is ready for a nap! By 11:50 she’s down and I head outside to mow some of the lawn. It’s usually a 4 hr job so I don’t think I’ll get it all done today.
1 pm - I head inside for lunch, we’re having tuna sandwiches. L napped for 20 min and I didn’t get more than half the lawn mowed. After lunch, we head into town to hang out with my friend K and her two kids. We met in college back in 2014 and have babies of a similar age so it’s always nice to go over and visit.
4:30 pm - We leave K’s house and I swing by Wendy’s for a cold coffee-type drink for the drive home. I try the chocolate frosty-cinno and it’s terrible. Should’ve just gone to Tim’s for an ice cap. $4.19
5:05 pm - L fell asleep on the drive home so I hang out in the car with the windows down for another 5-10 minutes before moving things inside. She wakes up and we head in. H picks a meal and starts making dinner. L is fussy and still tired so I nurse her and we hang out in the cool basement while H cooks. I sort through the laundry that finished off today.
6 pm - H is still cooking our dinner, I reheat leftover pasta for L. H runs her bath and I bath her. She’s still grumpy on and off so she’ll probably be going to bed right after this.
6:45 pm - H and I eat chicken wings and shrimp poppers. L has decided it’s not bedtime yet, I tried to put her down and she got a second wind instead.
9:30 pm - I work on the website for one of the non-profits I volunteer for once L goes to bed at 8. After I’m done, I head into the craft room and work on the custom rag quilt project. One row left to sew together, then to put the final 5 rows together, figure out my borders and start cutting all the edges! It’s not ‘due’ until mid-July but I’d rather get it done sooner and not have to rush. My SIL texts and asks to borrow $50 till Thursday, I send it over out of my spending.
11 pm - H and I both go to bed after some kitty snuggles
Day 2 total: $92.16 (not counting $105 for internet)
—
Day 3 - Sunday
7 am - L is awake and I nurse her a couple of times cause she can’t decide if she’s happy or not. It was a decent night, but she must still be tired from not napping much yesterday. It’s my day to sleep in so H takes her out of the room by 7:30.
9:30 am - I get up make some coffee and slowly start on breakfast
10:30 am - L and I are eating breakfast, I made scrambled eggs, fried up leftover sausage, tomato and she also has two crackers with cream cheese. H and I wrote up a grocery list before I sat down and he’s off to town to get groceries and fuel up the car before the work week starts. Usually, H and his best friend C have a grocery shopping bro-date every Sunday, but C and his family are out camping this weekend so H heads in alone.
11 am - L is ready for a nap. I put her down and fold her laundry and the house laundry, taking a few breaks to scroll Reddit or Facebook and drink more coffee.
12:30 pm - L woke up and is kinda grouchy so we have a dance party to elicit baby giggles. H gets back from shopping and we put the groceries away, they cost $374.03. This is actually cheaper than the last few times we did a stock up so that’s nice! Groceries include ground beef, frozen chicken, wings, fries, cucumber, tomatoes, grapes, bananas, yoghurt, frozen lunches, macaroni, Ichiban, burgers, buttermilk, perogies, frozen fruit, frozen veggies, gravy mix, hollandaise mix, and more. We’ve been buying more convenience foods lately, but I do have 3 suppers planned for the week. He also grabbed me a big coffee mug for $6. He got gas for $60.83, and once we unload the groceries, he runs to the store for bacon, 2 jars of our favourite cowboy candy (pickled sweetened jalapeños), chips and a Starbucks frappe drink for $41.93. I make some sandwiches for lunch for tomorrow so I don’t have to scramble in the morning.
1 pm - Lunch is Ichiban noodles for H and I and baby charcuterie for L - strawberries, grapes, ham, cheese, and cucumber. We head outside afterwards to enjoy the weather, L is so close to walking, she pulls herself up onto everything right now. She has an after-lunch snack of mown grass and dandelions.
3 pm - We’re back inside and H puts on Die Hart 2. L goes down for her second nap at 4:15 and we finish the movie. I wake L up at 5:45 so she doesn’t sleep too long. When she wakes up she makes a face identical to her dad’s and it’s hilarious.
7 pm - H is cooking dinner, we’re having eggs Benny and bacon for supper. I prep L’s diaper bag for tomorrow and we run it out to the car. I also put all my laundry away so the closet is ready for the week. H sits on the chair once we’re done dinner and both cats flock to him and spread themselves over his legs.
9:45 pm - I finish off piecing the quilt top and head downstairs to shower. L is getting tired too so as soon as I’m done we head to bed. H is not far behind us.
Daily 3 total: $482.79. This is pretty usual for a grocery shop day.
—
Day 4 - Monday
6:35 am - My alarm goes off. Can’t lay in bed today as I need to meet my coworkers at the office at 7:30 am. We’re doing a team bonding mountain hike and it’s a 2.5 hrs drive away. I grab a banana, toast a bagel, add cream cheese and I’m out the door before 7 after filling up the cats' food.
7:30 am - I get to the office, fill up a water bottle, make a coffee and grab a few things from my office. Almost everyone is there, and we leave at 7:45
9:45 am - We’re there! I’ve seen 2 moose, 1 mule deer, 1 elk and almost hit 2 caribou on the highway already today! We start up the trailhead at about 10 am
1:00 pm - This mountain is much steeper than anticipated. A coworker and I decide at about 300 metres to the top that we shouldn’t push it. The last km has been extremely steep and we’ve hit our max. The rest of the group has gone ahead and summitted. We eat our lunch with a great view and start the trek back down.
3:30 pm - We’re back at the trucks! 11.2 km round trip. We hit the road to head home and stop at Dairy Queen for a celebratory ice cream. I spend $4.92 on a medium dip cone.
6 pm - Back at the office. I call H and let him know I’m headed home now and he suggests chicken wings for supper. I’m down for anything as long as I don’t have to cook.
7 pm - We all eat dinner. L has some veggie pouch, chicken wings/nuggets and leftover pasta. I am almost too tired to eat. One cat keeps trying to get L’s nuggets so he gets in trouble and shooed out of the dining room.
8:15 pm - I try to put L to bed and she goes down for a bit but decides ultimately that it’s not actually time for bed.
8:40 pm - I go and have a hot, hot shower, my muscles are sore and tomorrow might not be fun. L and H party in the TV area, she’s pulling herself up onto everything and trying to crawl up the couch. Not sure where she got this energy from! One of our cats comes for some aggressive cuddles and pets and H puts his dirty t-shirt on the chair for him. Our cat loves dirty laundry it’s hilarious.
9:20 pm - Time for bed for everyone. Hope tonight is a good night and we all can get some rest.
Day 4 Total: $4.92 (this would have been covered by one of the superintendents but a few people got ahead of her in line so she couldn’t pay for us all). My card is also charged by the garbage disposal company for the dumpster ($40.43 - counted in the bills above).
H didn’t spend any money today.
—
Day 5 - Tuesday
7 am - The first alarm went off at 6:30, but we are all tired and don’t want to wake up. I nurse L for a bit then we get up at 7. I’m pretty sore this morning so I’m not moving too fast. Get her dressed and H and L leave by 7:10. H fed the cats this morning so I don’t have to.
7:30 am - I forgot to pay H’s other cc and it’s due in 4 days so I pay it off now - $93.80 (random Amazon purchases and my KU). I pull some chicken out of the freezer to defrost and make my breakfast of homemade granola, hemp hearts and yoghurt. I leave the house around 7:45 to head to work.
8:20 am - I get to the office and immediately get asked some questions about blocks we have slated for this Fall/Winter. I’m not 100% sure of the answer and have to double-check with my boss. I grab a coffee and chat with the head boss before my boss arrives. I clarify what I need and relay the info back to my coworkers.
9:30 am - I eat my breakfast while I scroll through online courses offered by my company. I got an email yesterday of one I’m supposed to take so I book into that.
11 am - I book H and myself massages, 2 each - one this month and one next month.
12:30 pm - I took a long time to eat breakfast so I’m not quite hungry yet. I grab my running shoes from the truck and take a slow walk on the elliptical to help my sore muscles. This morning hasn’t been too busy, but I’m having a hard time starting my next big task (cycle time calculations) so hopefully the slow walk helps some.
1:30 pm - I’m back at my desk and diving into cycle time calculations. H grabs KFC for lunch $24.12
2 pm - Lunch time, I’m having a leftover sandwich from yesterday, a grapefruit cup, grapes and strawberries. I also grab a chai with milk from the coffee machine. I eat while I plug away at the cycle times.
3:45 pm - I finish off one section of cycle times and my brain has had enough. I go fill my water bottle and chat with a few coworkers. At 4:15 pm someone comes by to sign a few cheques I asked for and I leave the office at 4:30 pm
4:40 pm - H grabbed buttermilk instead of heavy cream and I need it for supper tonight so I swing by the grocery store. Then, I head out of town to a colleague’s house to drop off one of the cheques. $4.95
5:15 pm - I check the mail, get home and start cooking. We’re having Skillet Dijon Chicken with Asparagus and Mushrooms for supper. I also make some macaroni for a side. H and L get home about 5:45 to the cats waiting at the door.
6:20 pm - Supper is served! It is delicious. L and H aren’t fans of the asparagus, but the chicken, macaroni and sauce are perfection! H also riggs up a tie to L’s water bottle so it doesn’t hit the ground every 30 seconds. We fed the cats at the same time and they’re not begging for food quite so much tonight.
6:50 pm - We’re finished supper, H cleans up and I bath L.
7:30 pm - H calls my/our best friend J via FaceTime and we chat with her and her daughter R for a few minutes. L tried to steal the phone and gets mad when we don’t let her. J’s daughter requests a morning call so I promise to call at 7 am. J doesn’t think R will be awake yet so we’ll see!
8 pm - L is tired and ready to go to sleep. I put her down, have a hot bath, throw in some epsom salts, and read a bit on my KU.
9:40 pm - Bedtime!
Day 5 Total: $112.17 (removed $10 for my KU - counted in subscriptions)
—
Day 6 - Wednesday
7 am - I nurse L, she had a weird wake-up last night so we’re tossing the idea of taking her into daycare today. I’ll probably take her in a bit later and H will take his truck so if I have to WFH for the afternoon I can. Try calling J and R and there is no response - I am not surprised.
7:45 am - L and I leave the house, she’s not coughing much and doesn’t have a fever or anything so she’s good to go to daycare today
8:15 am - I drop L off at daycare
8:30 am - I get to the office. I talk with a few coworkers and ask our admin if my new phone has been dropped off yet.
9 am - My new phone is here! Now to start the setup process, everything takes forever with all the authentication apps we need. I also go through all my iCloud photos and organize/save them to my OneDrive while the phone is getting set up.
12:30 pm - I think the phone is finally done. Now to eat some lunch, I’m having leftovers from 2 nights ago - chicken nuggets, strawberries, grapes and a Cherry Bubly.
1:30 pm - H goes to a food truck for lunch. $35.01. This includes the tip.
3 pm - I had some more phone set-up to do. Might be finished now? Get an email about the cats’ annual checkups and vaccinations so I book their appointments for August.
4 pm - SIL paid me back the $50, plus another $50 she’d borrowed earlier. (+$100) I work on the photo garland for L’s first birthday for a bit.
5 pm - I haven’t gotten much done today beyond setting up my phone. I leave the office and pick up L at 5:20. I talk to her day home provider for about 15 min about how she’s been doing, etc.
6 pm - We get home! H has cooked supper already, so as soon as we get in the door we sit down to eat. Supper tonight is perogies and garlic bread. L also has a veggie pouch. H tells me the old vehicle was sold, and the buyers are doing a payment plan. We will get $300/month for the next 10 months. A lump sum would be nice, but H’s coworkers will handle all the paperwork so it’s no more work for us.
6:45 pm - Time for a bath! H cleans up supper, cleans the litter boxes (we have 3) and starts some laundry while I take L and get her cleaned up.
7 pm - All finished in the bath. We head downstairs and hang out until L is ready for sleep. I mostly scroll my phone and H plays on his Rog Ally. L climbs the couch and me and scoots around on the floor hunting for different treasures.
8:40 pm - L is ready for bed. I put her down and read some more KU
10 pm - H and I head to bed. I washed and dried a baby quilt to bring to work in the morning for a coworker.
Day 6 Total: $35.01 for H’s lunch. I spend $0, and ‘make’ $100
—
Day 7 - Thursday
6:35 am - The first alarm goes off. It’s a new one on the phone and nice to wake up to! L doesn’t want to wake up and she grumbles and rolls around.
7 am - We all get out of bed. I get L dressed while H packs up what he needs for the day. I get her milk together and they’re out the door by 7:15
7:50 am - I leave the house. After H and L left, I did the dishes and packed up my stuff for the day. Made a smoothie for breakfast (yoghurt, flax seed, orange, banana, rhubarb jam, frozen berries, watermelon, cranberry juice and milk) and there’s lots left over so I pop that into the fridge for tomorrow. I need gas in the work truck, so I head there before going to the office. I have a fuel card so I don’t spend any $ on fuel.
8:30 am - Get to the office and it’s time to make a coffee. I have some things to get done before my webinar at 11 am.
9 am - I show the quilt to my coworker, she loves it and buys it! (+$100)
11 am - Oops. I didn’t get the login link earlier and don’t know who to contact to get it so no webinar for me. I scroll Reddit and my socials and work a bit more on my cycle times. I snack on some grapes and drink another coffee.
1 pm - Lunch time! I’m having leftover skillet Dijon chicken and macaroni. It is still delicious, that recipe is going into the rotation for sure! H goes to McDonalds for lunch and spends $35.66. He bought a coworker lunch as well, she was having a rough day.
2 pm - Chat with a few coworkers about different projects/things we need to think of for this next year.
3 pm - I have an afternoon pick-me-up snack of Brookside pomegranate-flavoured chocolate and a ginger ale.
4:30 pm - I’m tired and don’t feel like doing anything else. I leave the office and call H to see what we should do for supper. We decide on potstickers and veggies, I’ll start cooking when I get home. I stop and check the mail on my way home too.
5:45 pm - H and L arrive home. I take L into the spare room and we call my mum and grandma for a video chat. L rolls around the bed and shows off how she’s almost standing!
6:10 pm - We sit down to eat, L isn’t that interested in either the potstickers or veggies so we pull out some leftover macaroni and she goes to town on that.
7 pm - Bath time! H cleans up and does some more laundry. It just seems to never end.
7:30 pm - Bedtime for L. I read some of my book while I put her down.
8:30 pm - SIL texts again to borrow $50. I send it over out of my spending. I get all of the borders cut for the custom quilt.
9 pm - H has SING on so I sit down to watch it, he’s also playing his Rog Aloy and I’m reading some more of my book.
10 pm - We go to bed.
Day 7 Total: $35.66 for H’s lunch. I spend $50, and ‘make’ $100
—
Weekly Expenses:
Reflection:
submitted by MD_thrway_AfterPea to MoneyDiariesACTIVE [link] [comments]
- All $ in CAD. $1 CAD to $0.73 US.
- I will call my spouse H.
- We aren’t looking to change spending habits too much, this was more a fun exercise to see what we spend and how we’re doing financially now that I am back to work.
Section One: Assets and Debt
Retirement Balance: Total $76,431 (joint)
- My retirement accounts include a DCPP of $62,495, an RRSP of $8125, and a TFSA of $130
- H’s only has a spousal RRSP of $5631
- DCPP amount is from a 5% base contribution plus 2% matching from my employer, and 3% from me. I have had this account since 25 (when I started at the company) and have done the matching the entire time except during my maternity leave. They continued the 5% base while I was off on maternity leave, I had the option to get the matching as well but we couldn’t swing the cost while I was only on EI.
- RRSPs are mostly from excess benefits money. I have flex benefits and get an annual amount to “spend”. Before we had our kid there was about $500/month split going into our RRSPs. Now we do $42.30/month split ($21.15 for each). The spousal RRSP means I can claim this on my taxes, instead of him claiming on his.
- TFSAs will be our next focus once we’ve caught up on the annual bills from May to July - annual house insurance and two vehicle insurances. We haven’t been consistent with depositing into our TFSA’s, so we have $80K+ room in each.
Savings account balance: $450 in emergency savings (this is a priority starting in August to beef up), $2000 in property taxes sinking fund (to be spent by July)
Checking account balance: $5288.15 - we both got paid today so I will be moving money around and this number will be down a lot by the end of the day.
Credit card debt: $16,635
- $12,855 LOC. This is entirely from vehicles - before I went on maternity leave H sold his truck and we took a $9500 loss - pulled the money out of the LOC to pay off the lien. In April, we needed a different vehicle so we took $6500 out of the LOC to purchase a new-to-us car. We have yet to sell the vehicle we replaced, but when we do that money will either go onto LOC or into emergency savings. We’re aiming to get $3000 for the sale.
- $530 My CC. This is from not budgeting for two road trips I took in the last two weeks, plus some other overspending on random things.
- $3250 H CC. This is from overspending on groceries/gas and vehicle expenses.
- H went to trade school (8 weeks/year for 4 years) to become a journeyman mechanic
- I took a 2-year diploma program that cost $12,000 (including books and random spending). My parents saved up $20K for me to go to college/university, so I got about $8,000 in cash from my mum once I graduated as I didn’t use all of the savings for school.
- I lived with my mum while in college and H lived with roommates so his income went to rent/groceries/bills and I had basically no living expenses as my mum covered everything.
- When he went to trade school I was working, so I covered our bills while he was off (and he got EI and some grants during that time frame).
- H and I have had combined finances since we were 19 when we married. This has greatly changed our financial situation.
- I have access to an employee stock purchase plan - I have about $1400 in my company stocks with no plan for them at the moment.
- I got a salary top-up when I went on maternity leave. My employer covered my 1 week EI waiting period and topped up to 100% salary for 11 weeks. The rest of the time I was off I was getting $1158 biweekly from EI.
- We qualify for the Climate Action Incentive from the federal government. This is about $1200/year.
- We get CCB for our kid of $140.61/month. This will increase to $273.74/month come July as our annual income was less in 2023 compared to 2022.
Section Two: Income
Income Progression (Post College/Trade School):
- H has been in his field for roughly 8 years and his starting salary was about $37,000 ($19/hr). Two years ago, he took a $20/hour pay cut moving from a journeyman mechanic ($45/hr) to a service advisor ($25/hr). He’s since gotten a $10/hr pay increase from switching employers and switching roles/getting a raise. H now makes $72,800 not including any overtime, which he does get fairly regularly.
- I've been working in my field for 8 years, and my starting salary was about $41,000. I have not changed careers, but I have changed employers. I got two raises when at my first job post-college from $20/hr (41,000) to $23/hr ($47,800) to $30/hr ($62,400). When I started at my current employer in 2018 I was offered $78,000 annually, plus moving benefits (approx $2000). I’ve consistently gotten a 2-5% raise every year (except this year - but I did get a raise 2 weeks before going on leave) or have gotten promoted and am now making $92,600 before bonuses. I get two bonuses a year, one is based on company performance and has been $0 to $10,000. My other bonus is performance-based and has been anywhere from $1200 to $4000. I got both bonuses while on maternity leave, the company performance one was cut in half based on hours worked. I also had to pay back EI because of my bonus income.
Mine: $4768.90 (two paycheck months)
- My monthly deductions include ESPP $213.60, DCPP matching $213.60, social club $5, flex benefits $26, plus taxes $701.27, CPP $203.97 and EI $59.14. In September I usually have an increase in my monthly take home as my CPP/EI is maxed out, but this might not happen this year as my RTW date was the end of April.
- H gets an advance on the 15th of $1000 and at the end of the month gets the rest of his pay. His end-of-the-month pay has ranged from $2600 to $3900 already this year because of illness, time off and short months.
- H’s deductions include taxes $623.25, EI $78.23, CPP $263.07, and $61.10 of HCP, but we’re not 100% sure what the HCP is cause he declined his benefits. This reminds me he should talk to payroll and see what’s up with that. He hits his 1st anniversary in August so we’ll see if he ends up maxing out CPP/EI in September or so.
- I craft and go to some markets and things, but don’t make much after counting all my costs. If I didn’t sell things I made, I’d have no room for craft storage!
- I am working on a custom quilt that when finished will bring in $275.
- As said above, we qualify for the CAI and CCB. CCB is $140/month currently and CAI is $400 quarterly.
- I get $500/year from my benefits to spend wherever and however I want. So far this year I’ve spent it on clothes and hiking boots. I have $190 left.
- Mortgage: $950 bi-weekly - $1900/month on 2 pay period months.
- Property Taxes: Sinking fund of $185/biweekly (we pay this annually in June. It is $2250 this year, last year was $1950).
- Home Insurance: $1640 annually. We pay this in full in July. I expect it to increase this year, but I’m unsure how much.
- Retirement Contribution: In addition to pre-tax contributions above, starting in August, biweekly contributions will be $377 to H’s TFSA and $226 to mine. H’s is more as I have my DCPP and when H’s total is closer to even or maxed out, I’ll max out mine.
- Savings Contribution: $200/biweekly starting in July, we also will have a home maintenance fund and will save $425/month.
- Debt Payments: LOC minimum is $130/month. We pay anywhere from $200 to $2000/month. This will increase come August, and the LOC will be paid off in May 2025. Both CCs should be paid off by September.
- Donations: $20/month to the animal shelter, and $20/month to SOS, I also volunteer at least 5-15 hours a month to a local sports group and to the foundation my MIL set up after my BIL passed. I sit on the board for both non-profits. We also randomly donate money to other things, or go in on 50/50 raffles different nonprofits have.
- Utilities: In the winter $600/month, the summer around $300/month. Gas and electricity combined. I live somewhere where it hits -40C and +40C depending on the time of the year.
- Garbage Rental: $40/month, $120/month when we get it dumped - approximately every 4 months. We live on an acreage and instead of carting garbage bags to work every week or going to the dump, we rent a dumpster for the driveway and call to have it dumped when it's full.
- Septic System Inspection/Cleaning: $400/year
- Internet: $105/month for unlimited fibre optic.
- Cellphone: $70/month for H. I have a work phone at no charge.
- Subscriptions: Amazon Prime $99/year, Spotify $11.54/month, Patreon $10.50/month (Money Feels <3), PlayStation Plus $32/quarter, Kindle Unlimited $10/month, Crunchyroll $9.99/month ($60.95/month total)
- Pet expenses: Roughly $100/month for food and litter for our two cats. Plus $400/year for an annual checkup. This will go up some as they age and probably have to have dental cleanings done.
- Car Insurance/Registration: No payments we own both vehicles outright. Insurance is $1500/year for both vehicles, we pay this in May/July. H spends around $300/month on gas as we live 30 min out of town. I have a work truck so I have no commuting costs. Annually we spend $160 on registration. AMA is 262.50 annually in July.
- Paid Hobbies: Don’t have fixed costs for these right now as we cut them out while I was on maternity leave. In January though, we’ll each get $100-200/month for hobbies.
- Daycare: $900/month ($450 the 1st and 15th). This is slightly more expensive than some others we found and does not qualify for subsidy or grants, but L loves her day home and the caretaker is great.
- Life/Disability Insurance: $125/month for both of us. This is $500K each for life and $100K each for critical illness.
- Food: Roughly $800/month in groceries and I’m not sure about eating out. Since going back to work a month ago life has been hectic so we’re spending more than usual on eating out/convenient foods. H has ADHD and forgets his lunch at home or in the car every day which is a waste, so he buys lunch either at the nearby grocery store or restaurants. I sometimes pack leftovers and sometimes go get food. I’ve been trying to get freezer meals and leave them at the office so I don’t have to pack things back and forth and we haven’t been making meals with leftovers.
- L’s Baby Supplies: $75/month? We have to buy diapers and wipes monthly pretty much.
- House Cleaners: This is an expense we had before H took his pay cut, and we’ve been slowly putting it back in the budget on and off. Roughly $200/clean which happens sporadically as the house is a mess and there is no time for two working parents to clean with an 11-month-old butt scooting everywhere. She always manages to find floor snacks
- Family: We send my sister-in-law money on a fairly regular basis, anywhere from $20-$100. She always pays us back, but we treat this as a write-off in case she doesn’t.
Day 1 - Friday
2 am - L wakes up and I get her back down 3 times before 3 am. At 3, H takes her out of the room to burn some energy before they both come back to bed roughly an hour later. Thanks, L. Thank you, H I was getting pretty frustrated with our darling child.
6:30 am - The first alarm goes off and I grab L for a cuddle and morning nursing session. Once she’s done, she rolls around and tries to climb both of us to get our phones before we all get out of bed at 7. Today is a PJ movie day at daycare so we don’t bother dressing her only changing the diaper and then H and L are out the door by 7:15. I leave for work at about 7:45 after doing some putting around.
8:15 am - I get to work and my first stop is the coffee machine. I get back to my office after talking to a few coworkers about our social club golf event next weekend. I see that an industry-specific mentor cohort program is open for applications so I find my most recent resume (2021!) and do a major update before applying. This year one of my goals is to work on leadership skills and mentoring so why not apply?
9 am - I had a hard time finding a bra this morning so I go online and purchase two new ones from the local bra-tique for pickup. My total is $170 after my 10% discount for signing up for their email list. This money is coming from my $500 annual work benefit for whatever I want and I now have $20 left. I eat my breakfast at my desk - yoghurt and homemade granola today.
11 am - I have a webinar on caribou to attend so I log into Zoom and while it's loading, pull up our cashflow forecaster to get the payday finances done before the weekend. $1750 to H’s cc to cover some overspending/vehicle expenses, $100 to the LOC, $373.10 for utilities, and $450 for daycare. Total is $2673.10 I’m not sure if I should include the bills in the daily writeups, but ah well. Day 1 spending is off to a great start.
1 pm - I get the notification that my bras are ready for pickup. Woohoo! I get new bras for the weekend! I send $50 to H’s TFSA once I confirm the bank account is connected.
2:30 pm - Eating lunch now as breakfast was so late. Freezer butter chicken with broccoli. I only have 1 more freezer meal at work so I make a note to restock.
3:30 pm - I work on some cycle times for the log haul for this coming logging season. It takes me a few minutes to remember exactly what I’m doing and how to do it. I am super glad I came back to work at the end of April as I get 3-ish months of slow time to get back into the swing of things before work starts to pick up.
4 pm - I am struggling to do any more than format my Excel sheets so I figure it’s time to pack it up and head home.
4:30 pm - After picking up my bras, I go to Once Upon A Child for some cheap baby clothes. L is in between sizes and we somehow managed to misplace all her more summery sleepwear so I’ve been grabbing a few here and there. OUAC has a sale on, 5 sleepers for $15 so I grab 5 of those and 4 other onesies for summer. We have a family photoshoot on Canada Day and I’ve been hunting for something that’ll match L’s ribbon skirt. $30.45
5 pm - I stop at the store to check the mail and grab a 12-pack of mixed tequila smashes. $37.55
5:30 pm - H calls. He’s off work and headed to get L. I pull burgers and fries out of the freezer, start up the BBQ and get the air fryer going.
6:05 pm - H and L arrive home in perfect time as the burgers and fries just finished cooking. I have an open Pineapple Tequila Smash and I hand H one to drink with supper too. L also has a veggie pouch with the burgers and fries.
7:20 pm - L is in bed nursing to sleep after her bath while H preps episode 4 of Obi-Wan Kenobi for us to watch. We watched it when it was first coming out, but he saw the discs at Walmart last week and figured to grab them. We thought we hadn’t seen all the episodes, but so far we’re 3:3 so we might’ve seen them all.
7:40 pm - L is down and out and I sneak out of the bedroom. I start a load of laundry and find the two bras I couldn’t this morning and handwash them. I sit down with H and we watch some Obi-Wan Kenobi.
10 pm - I check my email and see one from a local photographer group I really like. I’ve done at least two shoots with all 3 of them separately before and they’ve now joined forces. I went to their open house yesterday and won 50% off a boudoir package in 2024. I’ve wanted to book in since they announced their group, so I go through their open spots and book for November. My initial deposit is $262.50.
10:30 pm - We finished the last 3 episodes and watched all previously except for the finale. Of course. It was pretty good, but near the end, I started to scroll on my phone more than pay attention to the show. I swap the laundry, shower and head to bed at 11 pm.
H’s spending Day 1: $7.54 for lunch, $267.58 on vehicle parts/oil change that we didn’t budget for. Normally we would’ve, but communication is kinda crappy atm, and I think that’s due to sleep deprivation.
Day 1 total: $775.62 spending + $50 to TFSA. Oof off to a spendy start for the pay period.
—
Day 2 - Saturday
2:40 am - L is awake again and not going back down. This time it’s my turn. It’s already been a not-great night, hopefully, this 2 am party time doesn't keep happening.
4 am - We go back to bed. Our internet is on autopay and the notification comes through for my credit card. $105
7:20 am - L is up for the day. I don’t want to get out of bed yet, so I cuddle H and L rolls around, tries to stand and almost deletes everything on my phone. Then she notices my boobs so it’s time for a quick nurse.
8 am - I run the coffee machine and get breakfast going. We’re having pancakes this morning. While they’re cooking I pop some milk in the frother to make a fancy coffee. TBD if I drink it while it’s still hot. I feed the cats their morning meal.
8:30 am - H gets up and I’m still cooking. He grabs a coffee and takes L into the living room so I don’t trip over her and the plastic container horde.
9:30 am - H plays some Baldurs Gate 3 and L watches while I sort through the laundry I did last night. I try to get dressed and none of my shorts fit anymore so off in the donation bag they go. It’ll be a summer of dresses I guess! I start another load of laundry.
9:50 am - L is ready for a nap. Just kidding she just wanted some boob instead. We go outside afterwards to get some morning sun. Hopefully, this will tire her out and she will go down for a nap later! She hasn’t been big on sleep since she was born and gets major FOMO so we have no semblance of a schedule on weekends.
10:45 am - I bring L back inside and change her into outfit #3 for the day. Her trike got rained on and she gets soaked when she sits in it. I switch the laundry over, start yet another load and then pass L to H so I can head to the store, fill the Jerry can with gas for the lawnmower and do the recycling. 20 L of gas is $32.78 and I grab two lime slushes for H and I ($5.19). It’s +20 already and gorgeous. Total $37.97
11:30 am - L is ready for a nap! By 11:50 she’s down and I head outside to mow some of the lawn. It’s usually a 4 hr job so I don’t think I’ll get it all done today.
1 pm - I head inside for lunch, we’re having tuna sandwiches. L napped for 20 min and I didn’t get more than half the lawn mowed. After lunch, we head into town to hang out with my friend K and her two kids. We met in college back in 2014 and have babies of a similar age so it’s always nice to go over and visit.
4:30 pm - We leave K’s house and I swing by Wendy’s for a cold coffee-type drink for the drive home. I try the chocolate frosty-cinno and it’s terrible. Should’ve just gone to Tim’s for an ice cap. $4.19
5:05 pm - L fell asleep on the drive home so I hang out in the car with the windows down for another 5-10 minutes before moving things inside. She wakes up and we head in. H picks a meal and starts making dinner. L is fussy and still tired so I nurse her and we hang out in the cool basement while H cooks. I sort through the laundry that finished off today.
6 pm - H is still cooking our dinner, I reheat leftover pasta for L. H runs her bath and I bath her. She’s still grumpy on and off so she’ll probably be going to bed right after this.
6:45 pm - H and I eat chicken wings and shrimp poppers. L has decided it’s not bedtime yet, I tried to put her down and she got a second wind instead.
9:30 pm - I work on the website for one of the non-profits I volunteer for once L goes to bed at 8. After I’m done, I head into the craft room and work on the custom rag quilt project. One row left to sew together, then to put the final 5 rows together, figure out my borders and start cutting all the edges! It’s not ‘due’ until mid-July but I’d rather get it done sooner and not have to rush. My SIL texts and asks to borrow $50 till Thursday, I send it over out of my spending.
11 pm - H and I both go to bed after some kitty snuggles
Day 2 total: $92.16 (not counting $105 for internet)
—
Day 3 - Sunday
7 am - L is awake and I nurse her a couple of times cause she can’t decide if she’s happy or not. It was a decent night, but she must still be tired from not napping much yesterday. It’s my day to sleep in so H takes her out of the room by 7:30.
9:30 am - I get up make some coffee and slowly start on breakfast
10:30 am - L and I are eating breakfast, I made scrambled eggs, fried up leftover sausage, tomato and she also has two crackers with cream cheese. H and I wrote up a grocery list before I sat down and he’s off to town to get groceries and fuel up the car before the work week starts. Usually, H and his best friend C have a grocery shopping bro-date every Sunday, but C and his family are out camping this weekend so H heads in alone.
11 am - L is ready for a nap. I put her down and fold her laundry and the house laundry, taking a few breaks to scroll Reddit or Facebook and drink more coffee.
12:30 pm - L woke up and is kinda grouchy so we have a dance party to elicit baby giggles. H gets back from shopping and we put the groceries away, they cost $374.03. This is actually cheaper than the last few times we did a stock up so that’s nice! Groceries include ground beef, frozen chicken, wings, fries, cucumber, tomatoes, grapes, bananas, yoghurt, frozen lunches, macaroni, Ichiban, burgers, buttermilk, perogies, frozen fruit, frozen veggies, gravy mix, hollandaise mix, and more. We’ve been buying more convenience foods lately, but I do have 3 suppers planned for the week. He also grabbed me a big coffee mug for $6. He got gas for $60.83, and once we unload the groceries, he runs to the store for bacon, 2 jars of our favourite cowboy candy (pickled sweetened jalapeños), chips and a Starbucks frappe drink for $41.93. I make some sandwiches for lunch for tomorrow so I don’t have to scramble in the morning.
1 pm - Lunch is Ichiban noodles for H and I and baby charcuterie for L - strawberries, grapes, ham, cheese, and cucumber. We head outside afterwards to enjoy the weather, L is so close to walking, she pulls herself up onto everything right now. She has an after-lunch snack of mown grass and dandelions.
3 pm - We’re back inside and H puts on Die Hart 2. L goes down for her second nap at 4:15 and we finish the movie. I wake L up at 5:45 so she doesn’t sleep too long. When she wakes up she makes a face identical to her dad’s and it’s hilarious.
7 pm - H is cooking dinner, we’re having eggs Benny and bacon for supper. I prep L’s diaper bag for tomorrow and we run it out to the car. I also put all my laundry away so the closet is ready for the week. H sits on the chair once we’re done dinner and both cats flock to him and spread themselves over his legs.
9:45 pm - I finish off piecing the quilt top and head downstairs to shower. L is getting tired too so as soon as I’m done we head to bed. H is not far behind us.
Daily 3 total: $482.79. This is pretty usual for a grocery shop day.
—
Day 4 - Monday
6:35 am - My alarm goes off. Can’t lay in bed today as I need to meet my coworkers at the office at 7:30 am. We’re doing a team bonding mountain hike and it’s a 2.5 hrs drive away. I grab a banana, toast a bagel, add cream cheese and I’m out the door before 7 after filling up the cats' food.
7:30 am - I get to the office, fill up a water bottle, make a coffee and grab a few things from my office. Almost everyone is there, and we leave at 7:45
9:45 am - We’re there! I’ve seen 2 moose, 1 mule deer, 1 elk and almost hit 2 caribou on the highway already today! We start up the trailhead at about 10 am
1:00 pm - This mountain is much steeper than anticipated. A coworker and I decide at about 300 metres to the top that we shouldn’t push it. The last km has been extremely steep and we’ve hit our max. The rest of the group has gone ahead and summitted. We eat our lunch with a great view and start the trek back down.
3:30 pm - We’re back at the trucks! 11.2 km round trip. We hit the road to head home and stop at Dairy Queen for a celebratory ice cream. I spend $4.92 on a medium dip cone.
6 pm - Back at the office. I call H and let him know I’m headed home now and he suggests chicken wings for supper. I’m down for anything as long as I don’t have to cook.
7 pm - We all eat dinner. L has some veggie pouch, chicken wings/nuggets and leftover pasta. I am almost too tired to eat. One cat keeps trying to get L’s nuggets so he gets in trouble and shooed out of the dining room.
8:15 pm - I try to put L to bed and she goes down for a bit but decides ultimately that it’s not actually time for bed.
8:40 pm - I go and have a hot, hot shower, my muscles are sore and tomorrow might not be fun. L and H party in the TV area, she’s pulling herself up onto everything and trying to crawl up the couch. Not sure where she got this energy from! One of our cats comes for some aggressive cuddles and pets and H puts his dirty t-shirt on the chair for him. Our cat loves dirty laundry it’s hilarious.
9:20 pm - Time for bed for everyone. Hope tonight is a good night and we all can get some rest.
Day 4 Total: $4.92 (this would have been covered by one of the superintendents but a few people got ahead of her in line so she couldn’t pay for us all). My card is also charged by the garbage disposal company for the dumpster ($40.43 - counted in the bills above).
H didn’t spend any money today.
—
Day 5 - Tuesday
7 am - The first alarm went off at 6:30, but we are all tired and don’t want to wake up. I nurse L for a bit then we get up at 7. I’m pretty sore this morning so I’m not moving too fast. Get her dressed and H and L leave by 7:10. H fed the cats this morning so I don’t have to.
7:30 am - I forgot to pay H’s other cc and it’s due in 4 days so I pay it off now - $93.80 (random Amazon purchases and my KU). I pull some chicken out of the freezer to defrost and make my breakfast of homemade granola, hemp hearts and yoghurt. I leave the house around 7:45 to head to work.
8:20 am - I get to the office and immediately get asked some questions about blocks we have slated for this Fall/Winter. I’m not 100% sure of the answer and have to double-check with my boss. I grab a coffee and chat with the head boss before my boss arrives. I clarify what I need and relay the info back to my coworkers.
9:30 am - I eat my breakfast while I scroll through online courses offered by my company. I got an email yesterday of one I’m supposed to take so I book into that.
11 am - I book H and myself massages, 2 each - one this month and one next month.
12:30 pm - I took a long time to eat breakfast so I’m not quite hungry yet. I grab my running shoes from the truck and take a slow walk on the elliptical to help my sore muscles. This morning hasn’t been too busy, but I’m having a hard time starting my next big task (cycle time calculations) so hopefully the slow walk helps some.
1:30 pm - I’m back at my desk and diving into cycle time calculations. H grabs KFC for lunch $24.12
2 pm - Lunch time, I’m having a leftover sandwich from yesterday, a grapefruit cup, grapes and strawberries. I also grab a chai with milk from the coffee machine. I eat while I plug away at the cycle times.
3:45 pm - I finish off one section of cycle times and my brain has had enough. I go fill my water bottle and chat with a few coworkers. At 4:15 pm someone comes by to sign a few cheques I asked for and I leave the office at 4:30 pm
4:40 pm - H grabbed buttermilk instead of heavy cream and I need it for supper tonight so I swing by the grocery store. Then, I head out of town to a colleague’s house to drop off one of the cheques. $4.95
5:15 pm - I check the mail, get home and start cooking. We’re having Skillet Dijon Chicken with Asparagus and Mushrooms for supper. I also make some macaroni for a side. H and L get home about 5:45 to the cats waiting at the door.
6:20 pm - Supper is served! It is delicious. L and H aren’t fans of the asparagus, but the chicken, macaroni and sauce are perfection! H also riggs up a tie to L’s water bottle so it doesn’t hit the ground every 30 seconds. We fed the cats at the same time and they’re not begging for food quite so much tonight.
6:50 pm - We’re finished supper, H cleans up and I bath L.
7:30 pm - H calls my/our best friend J via FaceTime and we chat with her and her daughter R for a few minutes. L tried to steal the phone and gets mad when we don’t let her. J’s daughter requests a morning call so I promise to call at 7 am. J doesn’t think R will be awake yet so we’ll see!
8 pm - L is tired and ready to go to sleep. I put her down, have a hot bath, throw in some epsom salts, and read a bit on my KU.
9:40 pm - Bedtime!
Day 5 Total: $112.17 (removed $10 for my KU - counted in subscriptions)
—
Day 6 - Wednesday
7 am - I nurse L, she had a weird wake-up last night so we’re tossing the idea of taking her into daycare today. I’ll probably take her in a bit later and H will take his truck so if I have to WFH for the afternoon I can. Try calling J and R and there is no response - I am not surprised.
7:45 am - L and I leave the house, she’s not coughing much and doesn’t have a fever or anything so she’s good to go to daycare today
8:15 am - I drop L off at daycare
8:30 am - I get to the office. I talk with a few coworkers and ask our admin if my new phone has been dropped off yet.
9 am - My new phone is here! Now to start the setup process, everything takes forever with all the authentication apps we need. I also go through all my iCloud photos and organize/save them to my OneDrive while the phone is getting set up.
12:30 pm - I think the phone is finally done. Now to eat some lunch, I’m having leftovers from 2 nights ago - chicken nuggets, strawberries, grapes and a Cherry Bubly.
1:30 pm - H goes to a food truck for lunch. $35.01. This includes the tip.
3 pm - I had some more phone set-up to do. Might be finished now? Get an email about the cats’ annual checkups and vaccinations so I book their appointments for August.
4 pm - SIL paid me back the $50, plus another $50 she’d borrowed earlier. (+$100) I work on the photo garland for L’s first birthday for a bit.
5 pm - I haven’t gotten much done today beyond setting up my phone. I leave the office and pick up L at 5:20. I talk to her day home provider for about 15 min about how she’s been doing, etc.
6 pm - We get home! H has cooked supper already, so as soon as we get in the door we sit down to eat. Supper tonight is perogies and garlic bread. L also has a veggie pouch. H tells me the old vehicle was sold, and the buyers are doing a payment plan. We will get $300/month for the next 10 months. A lump sum would be nice, but H’s coworkers will handle all the paperwork so it’s no more work for us.
6:45 pm - Time for a bath! H cleans up supper, cleans the litter boxes (we have 3) and starts some laundry while I take L and get her cleaned up.
7 pm - All finished in the bath. We head downstairs and hang out until L is ready for sleep. I mostly scroll my phone and H plays on his Rog Ally. L climbs the couch and me and scoots around on the floor hunting for different treasures.
8:40 pm - L is ready for bed. I put her down and read some more KU
10 pm - H and I head to bed. I washed and dried a baby quilt to bring to work in the morning for a coworker.
Day 6 Total: $35.01 for H’s lunch. I spend $0, and ‘make’ $100
—
Day 7 - Thursday
6:35 am - The first alarm goes off. It’s a new one on the phone and nice to wake up to! L doesn’t want to wake up and she grumbles and rolls around.
7 am - We all get out of bed. I get L dressed while H packs up what he needs for the day. I get her milk together and they’re out the door by 7:15
7:50 am - I leave the house. After H and L left, I did the dishes and packed up my stuff for the day. Made a smoothie for breakfast (yoghurt, flax seed, orange, banana, rhubarb jam, frozen berries, watermelon, cranberry juice and milk) and there’s lots left over so I pop that into the fridge for tomorrow. I need gas in the work truck, so I head there before going to the office. I have a fuel card so I don’t spend any $ on fuel.
8:30 am - Get to the office and it’s time to make a coffee. I have some things to get done before my webinar at 11 am.
9 am - I show the quilt to my coworker, she loves it and buys it! (+$100)
11 am - Oops. I didn’t get the login link earlier and don’t know who to contact to get it so no webinar for me. I scroll Reddit and my socials and work a bit more on my cycle times. I snack on some grapes and drink another coffee.
1 pm - Lunch time! I’m having leftover skillet Dijon chicken and macaroni. It is still delicious, that recipe is going into the rotation for sure! H goes to McDonalds for lunch and spends $35.66. He bought a coworker lunch as well, she was having a rough day.
2 pm - Chat with a few coworkers about different projects/things we need to think of for this next year.
3 pm - I have an afternoon pick-me-up snack of Brookside pomegranate-flavoured chocolate and a ginger ale.
4:30 pm - I’m tired and don’t feel like doing anything else. I leave the office and call H to see what we should do for supper. We decide on potstickers and veggies, I’ll start cooking when I get home. I stop and check the mail on my way home too.
5:45 pm - H and L arrive home. I take L into the spare room and we call my mum and grandma for a video chat. L rolls around the bed and shows off how she’s almost standing!
6:10 pm - We sit down to eat, L isn’t that interested in either the potstickers or veggies so we pull out some leftover macaroni and she goes to town on that.
7 pm - Bath time! H cleans up and does some more laundry. It just seems to never end.
7:30 pm - Bedtime for L. I read some of my book while I put her down.
8:30 pm - SIL texts again to borrow $50. I send it over out of my spending. I get all of the borders cut for the custom quilt.
9 pm - H has SING on so I sit down to watch it, he’s also playing his Rog Aloy and I’m reading some more of my book.
10 pm - We go to bed.
Day 7 Total: $35.66 for H’s lunch. I spend $50, and ‘make’ $100
—
Weekly Expenses:
- Food + Drink: 575.09
- Fun/Entertainment: $0
- Home + Health: $38.78 (includes gas for lawn mower)
- Clothes + Beauty: $200.45
- Transport/Vehicle Expenses: $328.41
- Other: $496.30 (CC payment, photoshoot, TFSA and $ to SIL)
Reflection:
- This was a more expensive week for sure. I don’t usually spend money on clothes and the photo shoot deposit was a random impulsive spend. The vehicle expenses were also a bit different, usually, they’re budgeted for but not this time.
- Honestly surprised we didn’t order dinner at least once this week - usually we do!
- Events-wise, it was a typical week except for the mountain hike, those are not part of my usual work day. This time of year is slow and mostly involves prep for the coming winter.
- This was a fun experiment to write! I did have to cut some things as my word count kept increasing and I didn’t want it to be too long - is this too long even still? Too much detail on baby routines?
2024.06.07 18:14 Virtual-Oil-793 Canto/Intervello Finishing Lines (Faust)
Alright, change of plans.
Yuri
Canto I: I'm not going to be that big an idiot. Besides, I have a better way to take my life.
Canto II: Sigh...didn't think those Luck Tattoos were so strong. What?
Canto III: I won't rest killing every single one of you, all because of that damn box.
Intervello I: ...hurk...
Canto IV: I dealt with A Party Everlasting. A distortion like that isn't going to stop me.
Intervello II: Faust, you're an idiot.
Canto V: I don't know who you are, so your words don't hold weight against me.
Intervello III: How'd I survived opening up that bag...ha ha...perfect experience.
Intervello IV: I've dealt with the Amber Midnight with Crumbling Armor, your swordplay's no better than mine.
Canto VI: Lucky bitch...
W Corp
Canto I: Shame. Would had loved to see the W Corp Singularity reset her.
Canto II: Nothing more than an average day in R- W-Corp
Canto III: Love Town was a migraine. You are not.
Intervello I: A Veggie Pizza would be nice. Pineapples too.
Canto IV: I know the feeling of pretending. Every single day I'm reminded of it.
Intervello II: (Groan)
Canto V: I despise Ravens like you.
Intervello III: So the recordings are true. You do exist.
Intervello IV: Being a Traitor's no fun. Or at least if the person you're betraying still loves you.
Canto VI: Damnit. She's still a Raven. Did this not work or something?
The One Who Grips
Canto I: A moment of silence. For the suffering of a pure body as Yuri's to come to an end.
Canto II: Heh. Finally, me - lucky.
Canto III: You can't become me, and you can't grip him. You can't become anything. You are just a child, failed to crack the shell, failed to fly, and all you can do is to struggle weakly.
Intervello I: ...Rejoyce, everybody. Let us feast.
Canto IV: I'm glad to see what proves to mean to take flight. Had that imposter dared to still live Yi Sang, have her learn from you (Special, if Red Sheet Sinclair is included): (Gargling noises, slowly losing breath)
Intervello II: ...I regret every single minute of not thinking of this.
Canto V: I must thank you Pequod Captain, I finally get to- what do you mean spare her!? (Special, if Pequod Captain Ishmael is included): See yourself in this sad excuse of an Identity, Ahab. The person who dared to be me was worthless...just as the person who dared to be you could not stop me.
Intervello III: ...(Pitiful crying noises)
Intervello IV: I have no father, you traitor!
Canto VI: I'm sorry, Heathcliff - there's no way the Singularity can bring those memories back.
Seven Association (Heathcliff)
Canto I: The less time I've got to think of this mess the better.
Canto II: All the Luck in the world isn't needed...I already have him.
Canto III: Trying to force your love won't work the way you did it, Kromer.
Intervello I: Shall we join this Feast Heathcliff? Eh? What do you mean by no?
Canto IV: ...Good, I still have memories of him.
Intervello II: Note to selves: Next time build a submarine mode FIRST.
Canto V: Yeah, I'd figured the Brough be here - where else would something so valuable be at?
Intervello III: Ha ha...Oh is my mind reeling with the gifts I want to get Heathcliff...
Intervello IV: Thanks Kim - if it weren't for you, I'd never find Heathcliff.
Canto VI: !?...Heathcliff, you still exist right? Ah, good good good good good...The sabotage actually worked.
Zwei Association
Canto I: Failure. Faust, our VIP was Dante, not Yuri. Long as he's alive-gah...we're good.
Canto II: Mice and Men, right Faust? Plans just go awry with us.
Canto III: Sinclair's favorite. At least unlike last time Sinclair didn't accidently kill her.
Intervello I: Honestly a very delightful taste. Mermaid Meat Pizza's just the best.
Canto IV: Kept any memories, Effie? Yup, Nagel Und Liu training grounds. Never mind.
Intervello II: Effie, don't. The sinking bus is punishment enough Faust.
Canto V: As fearsome as they arrived, Sinclair was much worse. At least our Ahab(s) are more reasonable.
Intervello III: Not a word. Let me enjoy riding this thing.
Intervello IV: Get that thing away please...I beg of you...gah...
Canto VI: And yet Don's still a pest. And I still remember Cathy's tomfoolery. Maybe we didn't install it right?
Lobotomy E.G.O (Witch's Night)
Canto I: You had A Sword Sharpened By Tears with you Yuri, you could had stopped that Abnormality on your damn own and yet you wanted to die!? I should had killed you myself!
Canto II: Congrats Rodion, you made peace with the only other survivor of your own actions. Thank goodness it was worth it.
Canto III: You. I like you.
Intervello I: Let me remove this mask, I'm not letting this Pizza go to waste.
Canto IV: Green Evening was more painful than this.
Intervello II: Congratulations you FUCKING IDIOT FAUST, This boat's sinking and not a damn thought of turning this into a Sub went through that concrete skull of yours!
Canto V: You do NOT want to piss Malkuth off. And seeing you? I'll say scaring the crap out of me was a complement...but that clearly didn't work for long.
Intervello III: BYE BYE Ya stupid freak!
Intervello IV: ...You two have been through enough - I'm not going to spite either of you.
Canto VI: Fuckin' Coward.
Blade Lineage
Canto I: Doomsday Callender. Seeing the end of the world through it was...awe-inspiring. Yuri's death by contrast? Filth.
Canto II: Not many people make art from words as horrid as an execution, Ryoshu. But you can reward yourself by making me jealous.
Canto III: Nothing more than a filthy nightmare. Had you wished to inspire me more Kromer, more of what you have done with the city, not of what you've did to yourself.
Intervello I: ...Outis was right, maybe I shouldn't had eaten that thing raw...(pukes)
Canto IV: Zzz...zzz...
Intervello II: I wish to see the horrors of the deep, and the beauty of the undersea.
Canto V: ...Pure beauty. An elegant form of spite against the very world. I shall spare you, even if for only once Madame Ahab. But if you wish to keep yourself alive, continue your very art of hatred.
Intervello III: So this was my wish? Such joy can only be described in beauty...thank you Santana.
Intervello IV: Disgusting work, Kim. Next time, don't buy from peddlers.
Canto VI: I took one look at this place, and I knew I should had brought my sleeping bag, Nelly.
Edgar Family
Canto I: A sloppy performance, everybody. Let us not repeat this mistake again.
Canto II: ...I knew I shouldn't had taught Heathcliff to dance.
Canto III: Your family only saw you as just another malfunction, Sinclair. Had Kromer not gotten to them, I would had gladly torn them all ap-
Intervello I: Everybody, prepare your silverware. Gregor, stop grabbing the pizza with your hands. Ryoshu, stop stuffing your face with Chicken.
Canto IV: It truly is beautiful to have seen someone as happy as you have, Yi Sang. Brings back...terrible memories.
Intervello II: Everybody, please in order enter the Bus - Faust will attend to her mistake forcefully.
Canto V: Orderly, and in manner. Ahab, had you happen to been a part of the butlers in a past life?
Intervello III: It truly is a crying shame to see you go, Santana.
Intervello IV: We will not allow the Sun to intervene, Kim.
Canto VI: ...the memories...when will his wrath end?
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Now if you don't mind, I got to slep. Night folks)
submitted by Virtual-Oil-793 to limbuscompany [link] [comments]
Yuri
Canto I: I'm not going to be that big an idiot. Besides, I have a better way to take my life.
Canto II: Sigh...didn't think those Luck Tattoos were so strong. What?
Canto III: I won't rest killing every single one of you, all because of that damn box.
Intervello I: ...hurk...
Canto IV: I dealt with A Party Everlasting. A distortion like that isn't going to stop me.
Intervello II: Faust, you're an idiot.
Canto V: I don't know who you are, so your words don't hold weight against me.
Intervello III: How'd I survived opening up that bag...ha ha...perfect experience.
Intervello IV: I've dealt with the Amber Midnight with Crumbling Armor, your swordplay's no better than mine.
Canto VI: Lucky bitch...
W Corp
Canto I: Shame. Would had loved to see the W Corp Singularity reset her.
Canto II: Nothing more than an average day in R- W-Corp
Canto III: Love Town was a migraine. You are not.
Intervello I: A Veggie Pizza would be nice. Pineapples too.
Canto IV: I know the feeling of pretending. Every single day I'm reminded of it.
Intervello II: (Groan)
Canto V: I despise Ravens like you.
Intervello III: So the recordings are true. You do exist.
Intervello IV: Being a Traitor's no fun. Or at least if the person you're betraying still loves you.
Canto VI: Damnit. She's still a Raven. Did this not work or something?
The One Who Grips
Canto I: A moment of silence. For the suffering of a pure body as Yuri's to come to an end.
Canto II: Heh. Finally, me - lucky.
Canto III: You can't become me, and you can't grip him. You can't become anything. You are just a child, failed to crack the shell, failed to fly, and all you can do is to struggle weakly.
Intervello I: ...Rejoyce, everybody. Let us feast.
Canto IV: I'm glad to see what proves to mean to take flight. Had that imposter dared to still live Yi Sang, have her learn from you (Special, if Red Sheet Sinclair is included): (Gargling noises, slowly losing breath)
Intervello II: ...I regret every single minute of not thinking of this.
Canto V: I must thank you Pequod Captain, I finally get to- what do you mean spare her!? (Special, if Pequod Captain Ishmael is included): See yourself in this sad excuse of an Identity, Ahab. The person who dared to be me was worthless...just as the person who dared to be you could not stop me.
Intervello III: ...(Pitiful crying noises)
Intervello IV: I have no father, you traitor!
Canto VI: I'm sorry, Heathcliff - there's no way the Singularity can bring those memories back.
Seven Association (Heathcliff)
Canto I: The less time I've got to think of this mess the better.
Canto II: All the Luck in the world isn't needed...I already have him.
Canto III: Trying to force your love won't work the way you did it, Kromer.
Intervello I: Shall we join this Feast Heathcliff? Eh? What do you mean by no?
Canto IV: ...Good, I still have memories of him.
Intervello II: Note to selves: Next time build a submarine mode FIRST.
Canto V: Yeah, I'd figured the Brough be here - where else would something so valuable be at?
Intervello III: Ha ha...Oh is my mind reeling with the gifts I want to get Heathcliff...
Intervello IV: Thanks Kim - if it weren't for you, I'd never find Heathcliff.
Canto VI: !?...Heathcliff, you still exist right? Ah, good good good good good...The sabotage actually worked.
Zwei Association
Canto I: Failure. Faust, our VIP was Dante, not Yuri. Long as he's alive-gah...we're good.
Canto II: Mice and Men, right Faust? Plans just go awry with us.
Canto III: Sinclair's favorite. At least unlike last time Sinclair didn't accidently kill her.
Intervello I: Honestly a very delightful taste. Mermaid Meat Pizza's just the best.
Canto IV: Kept any memories, Effie? Yup, Nagel Und Liu training grounds. Never mind.
Intervello II: Effie, don't. The sinking bus is punishment enough Faust.
Canto V: As fearsome as they arrived, Sinclair was much worse. At least our Ahab(s) are more reasonable.
Intervello III: Not a word. Let me enjoy riding this thing.
Intervello IV: Get that thing away please...I beg of you...gah...
Canto VI: And yet Don's still a pest. And I still remember Cathy's tomfoolery. Maybe we didn't install it right?
Lobotomy E.G.O (Witch's Night)
Canto I: You had A Sword Sharpened By Tears with you Yuri, you could had stopped that Abnormality on your damn own and yet you wanted to die!? I should had killed you myself!
Canto II: Congrats Rodion, you made peace with the only other survivor of your own actions. Thank goodness it was worth it.
Canto III: You. I like you.
Intervello I: Let me remove this mask, I'm not letting this Pizza go to waste.
Canto IV: Green Evening was more painful than this.
Intervello II: Congratulations you FUCKING IDIOT FAUST, This boat's sinking and not a damn thought of turning this into a Sub went through that concrete skull of yours!
Canto V: You do NOT want to piss Malkuth off. And seeing you? I'll say scaring the crap out of me was a complement...but that clearly didn't work for long.
Intervello III: BYE BYE Ya stupid freak!
Intervello IV: ...You two have been through enough - I'm not going to spite either of you.
Canto VI: Fuckin' Coward.
Blade Lineage
Canto I: Doomsday Callender. Seeing the end of the world through it was...awe-inspiring. Yuri's death by contrast? Filth.
Canto II: Not many people make art from words as horrid as an execution, Ryoshu. But you can reward yourself by making me jealous.
Canto III: Nothing more than a filthy nightmare. Had you wished to inspire me more Kromer, more of what you have done with the city, not of what you've did to yourself.
Intervello I: ...Outis was right, maybe I shouldn't had eaten that thing raw...(pukes)
Canto IV: Zzz...zzz...
Intervello II: I wish to see the horrors of the deep, and the beauty of the undersea.
Canto V: ...Pure beauty. An elegant form of spite against the very world. I shall spare you, even if for only once Madame Ahab. But if you wish to keep yourself alive, continue your very art of hatred.
Intervello III: So this was my wish? Such joy can only be described in beauty...thank you Santana.
Intervello IV: Disgusting work, Kim. Next time, don't buy from peddlers.
Canto VI: I took one look at this place, and I knew I should had brought my sleeping bag, Nelly.
Edgar Family
Canto I: A sloppy performance, everybody. Let us not repeat this mistake again.
Canto II: ...I knew I shouldn't had taught Heathcliff to dance.
Canto III: Your family only saw you as just another malfunction, Sinclair. Had Kromer not gotten to them, I would had gladly torn them all ap-
Intervello I: Everybody, prepare your silverware. Gregor, stop grabbing the pizza with your hands. Ryoshu, stop stuffing your face with Chicken.
Canto IV: It truly is beautiful to have seen someone as happy as you have, Yi Sang. Brings back...terrible memories.
Intervello II: Everybody, please in order enter the Bus - Faust will attend to her mistake forcefully.
Canto V: Orderly, and in manner. Ahab, had you happen to been a part of the butlers in a past life?
Intervello III: It truly is a crying shame to see you go, Santana.
Intervello IV: We will not allow the Sun to intervene, Kim.
Canto VI: ...the memories...when will his wrath end?
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Now if you don't mind, I got to slep. Night folks)
2024.06.07 18:13 DoABarrowRoll Defending the Draft: New York Giants Edition (2024)
Hello again, fellow ingrates. Sorry I am a couple of days late.
I am pleased to return for the 7th year of "DABR Writes a Ton of Words About the New York Giants" and I hope you all enjoy reading as much as I enjoyed writing it.
With the Giants' success, the NFL decided to give the Giants 4 prime time games through the first 6 weeks of the season, starting with a SNF showdown with the Giants' most common week 1 opponent: their division rival, the Dallas Cowboys.
Things got off to an okay start: The Giants got the ball to start the game and methodically moved it down the field, setting up a 3rd and 2 from the Cowboys' 8 yard line.
Then: disaster struck.
First you had a false start by Andrew Thomas to make it 3rd and 7. Then rookie center John Michael Schmitz botched a snap low, which made it 4th and 21. Okay fine, let's get 3 points and regroup.
But the field goal gets blocked and returned for a touchdown. A three and out on the ensuing possession followed by a Dallas field goal makes it 9-0. And on the Giants' next possession, Jones checks it down to Saquon Barkley, who gets hit, pops the ball into the air...and it's intercepted and returned for a touchdown.
Now with 2:30 left in the first quarter, the Giants are in a 16-0 hole, where 13 of those points were scored by Dallas' defense and special teams. And everything crumbled from there; the Cowboys defense took it to the Giants offense, the Giants OL had no answers for anything Dallas did, and by the end of the game it was a 40-0 embarrassment. All of the hype the Giants had coming into the year, instantaneously vanished.
Things got worse before they got better: Come to find out, Andrew Thomas injured his hamstring chasing down the blocked field goal. He was going to miss time. And now, headed for a 2 game west coast trip, the Giants confidence was shot and they were without their best offensive player, the one offensive lineman they could rely on.
And the Giants showed up for week 2 and immediately got bitchsmacked again, taking a 20-0 deficit into halftime against the Cardinals, a team almost everyone expected to be one of the worst in the league. But somehow, the Giants managed to mount a comeback and win that game 31-28. It didn't feel good to go down like that to one of the worst teams in the league, but the comeback roused some optimism, headed into a TNF matchup against SF.
But the optimism was short-lived, with a loss to SF kicking off a 4 game losing streak that included: being completely outclassed by SF, another disaster prime time game at home against Seattle in which the Giants mustered just 3 points, a bad loss to Miami on the road that included Daniel Jones sustaining a major neck injury that would sideline him for a few weeks, and a tough SNF loss to Buffalo where the Giants defense finally came alive, but Tyrod Taylor and the offense couldn't top 10 points.
Through that first 6 weeks, the Giants had scored 31 points in the 2nd half against Arizona, and 40 points in the other 22 quarters of play. And 7 of those 40 points came from a pick 6 against Miami.
The Giants managed to win against the Commanders the next week before blowing a late lead into an overtime loss against the Jets in one of the worst football games I've ever seen. And oh by the way, Tyrod Taylor got hurt in that game against the Jets, leading to undrafted rookie Tommy DeVito finishing that game.
There was some light at the end of that tunnel though, hopefully. Headed into their next game against the Raiders, Daniel Jones would be returning. Andrew Thomas had played every snap against the Jets, so maybe now that they could have the QB and LT back together, there was some hope to right the ship after a 2-6 start.
But it wasn't meant to be that way. The Raiders fired Josh McDaniels and replaced him with someone Giants fans are very familiar with: Antonio Pierce. That gave the Raiders some life. Jones looked atrocious, missing throws that should have been routine even just to the flats. And on the Giants' 3rd drive, at the beginning of the second quarter, Jones tore his ACL, ending his season, and putting Tommy DeVito back in as the Giants' QB.
DeVito would remain the starter the next week against the Cowboys, where the Giants got destroyed. But since Jones' season was over and Taylor wasn't healthy yet, DeVito would remain the starter for the next two games, a rematch against the Commanders, and the Patriots. And somehow, DeVito won both, spawning Tommy Cutlets-Mania.
That mania would last through the bye week, and DeVito would somehow pull out a win against the Green Bay Packers, dragging the Giants back to a 5-8 record.
Things would really hit the fan from there, with the Giants losing their next 3 games, where DeVito would get sent back to the bench for Tyrod Taylor. The Giants almost managed to beat the Rams, but missed a long field goal as time expired. Then finished off their season with a (let's face it) meaningless, but also satisfying win against the Eagles, to finish at 6-11.
Wink Martindale decided he wanted out, embattled ST Coordinator Thomas McGaughey was given the axe, and the Giants parted ways with Brian Daboll's longtime lieutenant, OL coach Bobby Johnson.
For the second year in a row, the Giants' biggest "free agency" addition might actually have been a player acquired via trade: a 2nd round pick and some late round picks/swaps for EDGE Brian Burns, and giving him a 5 year, 141m contract to team up with Kayvon Thibodeaux and Dexter Lawrence to hopefully create a fearsome pass rush.
The Giants targeted their offensive line pretty aggressively next. It started with bringing in a new OL coach: Carmen Bricillo, who had been the OL coach for the Raiders. Then they brought Jermaine Eluemunor over, a player Bricillo is very familiar with having worked together the last couple of years with the Raiders. Eluemunor provides a stable vet option for the RT spot in case Evan Neal continues to struggle like he has the first two years of his career. And if Neal can finally put it together with a new OL coach at the helm, the Giants have a solid swing tackle who can also play guard. They also added OL Jon Runyan to hopefully solidify one of the guard spots. That gives the Giants the week 1 starting OL of Andrew Thomas, Jermaine Eluemunor, John Michael Schmitz, Jon Runyan, and Evan Neal.
The Giants would lose Saquon Barkley in free agency, to their bitter rivals, the Eagles, but would replace him with another guy this coaching staff is familiar with: Devin Singletary. Singletary is not Saquon, but the Giants finally understood that Saquon cannot be the answer to all of their problems, and they're seemingly more willing to operate a more committee-based rushing attack. Paying Saquon a lot of money didn't really make sense for the Giants anyways, and Singletary is a cheaper option that should provide a comparable amount of production.
The Giants then replaced Tyrod Taylor with Drew Lock, to help protected them if Daniel Jones wouldn't be healthy for 2024 (and they couldn't draft a QB; more on this later), and invested in other vet minimum type depth.
Now, without further ado, let's get into the picks:
This year, they didn't completely shift away from that, but the average age definitely feels like it went up. Malik Nabers is the only player who won't be 23 by Thanksgiving. And while I don't hate any of the Giants' picks, it feels like they were trying to hit singles/doubles after Nabers. None of those players to me feel like swinging for upside, thinking you have a superstar in the making, they feel like players the team thinks will just be good solid pros. I'm not sure how I feel about it, since the swings on upside haven't been the most successful, but I also don't feel like this draft changes the outlook of the team moving forward either. Most importantly, it does feel like a departure from their previous tendencies, so it'll be interesting to see whether it was more conscious and if it works out.
I'm not sure this is a draft we'll be looking back on and thinking about how great an impact it had on the future of the team. But I'm also not sure how likely that was once the trade up for Drake Maye was off the table.
submitted by DoABarrowRoll to NFL_Draft [link] [comments]
I am pleased to return for the 7th year of "DABR Writes a Ton of Words About the New York Giants" and I hope you all enjoy reading as much as I enjoyed writing it.
Season Recap
The Giants were flying high, coming off not just a playoff appearance, but a playoff VICTORY in the 2022 season. They chose to keep the band together, tagging Saquon Barkley and paying Daniel Jones, hoping to take yet another step forward under Coach of the Year Brian Daboll. Fans were feeling the positivity, projecting 10+ win seasons.With the Giants' success, the NFL decided to give the Giants 4 prime time games through the first 6 weeks of the season, starting with a SNF showdown with the Giants' most common week 1 opponent: their division rival, the Dallas Cowboys.
Things got off to an okay start: The Giants got the ball to start the game and methodically moved it down the field, setting up a 3rd and 2 from the Cowboys' 8 yard line.
Then: disaster struck.
First you had a false start by Andrew Thomas to make it 3rd and 7. Then rookie center John Michael Schmitz botched a snap low, which made it 4th and 21. Okay fine, let's get 3 points and regroup.
But the field goal gets blocked and returned for a touchdown. A three and out on the ensuing possession followed by a Dallas field goal makes it 9-0. And on the Giants' next possession, Jones checks it down to Saquon Barkley, who gets hit, pops the ball into the air...and it's intercepted and returned for a touchdown.
Now with 2:30 left in the first quarter, the Giants are in a 16-0 hole, where 13 of those points were scored by Dallas' defense and special teams. And everything crumbled from there; the Cowboys defense took it to the Giants offense, the Giants OL had no answers for anything Dallas did, and by the end of the game it was a 40-0 embarrassment. All of the hype the Giants had coming into the year, instantaneously vanished.
Things got worse before they got better: Come to find out, Andrew Thomas injured his hamstring chasing down the blocked field goal. He was going to miss time. And now, headed for a 2 game west coast trip, the Giants confidence was shot and they were without their best offensive player, the one offensive lineman they could rely on.
And the Giants showed up for week 2 and immediately got bitchsmacked again, taking a 20-0 deficit into halftime against the Cardinals, a team almost everyone expected to be one of the worst in the league. But somehow, the Giants managed to mount a comeback and win that game 31-28. It didn't feel good to go down like that to one of the worst teams in the league, but the comeback roused some optimism, headed into a TNF matchup against SF.
But the optimism was short-lived, with a loss to SF kicking off a 4 game losing streak that included: being completely outclassed by SF, another disaster prime time game at home against Seattle in which the Giants mustered just 3 points, a bad loss to Miami on the road that included Daniel Jones sustaining a major neck injury that would sideline him for a few weeks, and a tough SNF loss to Buffalo where the Giants defense finally came alive, but Tyrod Taylor and the offense couldn't top 10 points.
Through that first 6 weeks, the Giants had scored 31 points in the 2nd half against Arizona, and 40 points in the other 22 quarters of play. And 7 of those 40 points came from a pick 6 against Miami.
The Giants managed to win against the Commanders the next week before blowing a late lead into an overtime loss against the Jets in one of the worst football games I've ever seen. And oh by the way, Tyrod Taylor got hurt in that game against the Jets, leading to undrafted rookie Tommy DeVito finishing that game.
There was some light at the end of that tunnel though, hopefully. Headed into their next game against the Raiders, Daniel Jones would be returning. Andrew Thomas had played every snap against the Jets, so maybe now that they could have the QB and LT back together, there was some hope to right the ship after a 2-6 start.
But it wasn't meant to be that way. The Raiders fired Josh McDaniels and replaced him with someone Giants fans are very familiar with: Antonio Pierce. That gave the Raiders some life. Jones looked atrocious, missing throws that should have been routine even just to the flats. And on the Giants' 3rd drive, at the beginning of the second quarter, Jones tore his ACL, ending his season, and putting Tommy DeVito back in as the Giants' QB.
DeVito would remain the starter the next week against the Cowboys, where the Giants got destroyed. But since Jones' season was over and Taylor wasn't healthy yet, DeVito would remain the starter for the next two games, a rematch against the Commanders, and the Patriots. And somehow, DeVito won both, spawning Tommy Cutlets-Mania.
That mania would last through the bye week, and DeVito would somehow pull out a win against the Green Bay Packers, dragging the Giants back to a 5-8 record.
Things would really hit the fan from there, with the Giants losing their next 3 games, where DeVito would get sent back to the bench for Tyrod Taylor. The Giants almost managed to beat the Rams, but missed a long field goal as time expired. Then finished off their season with a (let's face it) meaningless, but also satisfying win against the Eagles, to finish at 6-11.
Wink Martindale decided he wanted out, embattled ST Coordinator Thomas McGaughey was given the axe, and the Giants parted ways with Brian Daboll's longtime lieutenant, OL coach Bobby Johnson.
Free Agency Recap
The Giants were very targeted in their free agency approach this year.For the second year in a row, the Giants' biggest "free agency" addition might actually have been a player acquired via trade: a 2nd round pick and some late round picks/swaps for EDGE Brian Burns, and giving him a 5 year, 141m contract to team up with Kayvon Thibodeaux and Dexter Lawrence to hopefully create a fearsome pass rush.
The Giants targeted their offensive line pretty aggressively next. It started with bringing in a new OL coach: Carmen Bricillo, who had been the OL coach for the Raiders. Then they brought Jermaine Eluemunor over, a player Bricillo is very familiar with having worked together the last couple of years with the Raiders. Eluemunor provides a stable vet option for the RT spot in case Evan Neal continues to struggle like he has the first two years of his career. And if Neal can finally put it together with a new OL coach at the helm, the Giants have a solid swing tackle who can also play guard. They also added OL Jon Runyan to hopefully solidify one of the guard spots. That gives the Giants the week 1 starting OL of Andrew Thomas, Jermaine Eluemunor, John Michael Schmitz, Jon Runyan, and Evan Neal.
The Giants would lose Saquon Barkley in free agency, to their bitter rivals, the Eagles, but would replace him with another guy this coaching staff is familiar with: Devin Singletary. Singletary is not Saquon, but the Giants finally understood that Saquon cannot be the answer to all of their problems, and they're seemingly more willing to operate a more committee-based rushing attack. Paying Saquon a lot of money didn't really make sense for the Giants anyways, and Singletary is a cheaper option that should provide a comparable amount of production.
The Giants then replaced Tyrod Taylor with Drew Lock, to help protected them if Daniel Jones wouldn't be healthy for 2024 (and they couldn't draft a QB; more on this later), and invested in other vet minimum type depth.
Draft Needs
A roster that they hoped would compete fell way short, and it opened up a lot more warts than they had expected:- QB. Just one year after giving Daniel Jones a 4 year, 160m contract, the Giants were sitting with the 6th overall pick in a draft class that had potentially 6 first round QBs. And now that Jones had suffered both the torn ACL, and a second serious neck injury (the first costing him the last 7 games of the 2021 season), the Giants had to get serious about potentially moving on from Jones.
- CB. The Giants had invested top 110 picks in CBs in the previous 4 drafts: Darnay Holmes in 2020, Aaron Robinson in 2021, Cor'Dale Flott in 2022, and Deonte Banks in 2023. To this point, the returns on those picks hasn't been all that great. Flott flashes at times but also consistently messes up his assignment. Banks had a very up and down rookie year, tasked with going up against WR1s man to man. Adoree' Jackson had left in free agency. And the Giants really didn't address this position in free agency at all. Heading into the draft, the room was basically the same as it was in 2023, but without Adoree' Jackson.
- WR. The Giants have had a WR1 problem since Dave Gettleman traded away Odell Beckham Jr. They were hoping to kind of replace it in the aggregate in 2023 by having potentially 5 WRs that could contribute, and having Darren Waller serve as the focal point of their passing attack. But between the OL's struggles, the lack of health and performance at QB, Waller missing time with a hamstring injury, and the WRs maybe not being what the team hoped for (Parris Campbell was a total zero, Jalin Hyatt was essentially a deep threat only), that plan fell apart. After attacking the OL mostly in free agency, finding a consistent focal point for the passing attack felt like the logical next step to fixing this offense.
- Safety. The Giants let Xavier McKinney walk in free agency, leaving them with Jason Pinnock and Dane Belton. New Defensive Coordinator Shane Bowen found his most success when he had some strong safety play with Kevin Byard in Tennessee, and there are definitely snaps to be found in that room.
- OL. The Giants attacked the OL aggressively in free agency, but there were still places for investments to succeed. Eluemunor is a more natural fit at tackle, that's where he has played the last couple of years, but the Giants want Evan Neal to stick at RT. Eluemunor can play guard, but the Giants are one injury away from seeing Josh Ezeudu or Aaron Stinnie come into the starting 5, and that is a bit dangerous. Drafting a starting guard and letting Eluemunor focus on being the swing tackle/primary backup could definitely be a benefit.
- TE. Daniel Bellinger has proven to be a solid piece, but Darren Waller has been considering retirement recently. Heading into the draft, Waller insisted he wanted to give the team an answer sooner rather than later, but there was still no clarity on his situation. To me, if you're not sure, you're not committed, and the team needs to plan like you're gone.
- Depth. The OL/TE depth has mostly been addressed above, but the Giants also were in need of solid depth at other spots. Singletary is a good start to a committee based RB room, but the group behind him isn't inspiring, with 2nd year RB Eric Gray and primarily ST player Gary Brightwell leading the mix. Another head to that backfield could go a long way. Dexter Lawrence is a dominant force on the DL, but the Giants traded Leonard Williams at the trade deadline and could use more bodies in that room to eat snaps.
Now, without further ado, let's get into the picks:
1.6: Malik Nabers, WR, LSU
Before we dive in on Nabers, we first have to talk about the whole picture.
The Giants did a TON of work on the QB class headed into the draft. They had sent people to USC and UNC especially a ton during the season. It's been reported/rumoured that the Giants were aggressive in trying to move up the board. Before the Bears traded Justin Fields and made it clear Caleb Williams was their guy, the Giants tried to move up to 1. And up until the very last minute on Draft Night, the Giants were pushing to trade up to 3 to pick Drake Maye, with their final offer believed to be their 1st, 2nd, and 4th this year, plus their 2025 1st round pick. Depending on who you believe, the Patriots were actually interested in this offer, but Robert Kraft vetoed the deal. Which sucks for Giants fans, but is probably correct for the Patriots.
That left the Giants sitting at pick 6, watching Caleb Williams, Jayden Daniels, and Drake Maye fly off the board. Then MHJ and Alt went, and the Giants had a decision to make.
They had done a lot of work on JJ McCarthy. Were they comfortable enough with him to pick him at 6, or were they going to go with the best player on their board? In the end, they went with Nabers.
I've already written about the Giants' need for a WR1, so let's focus on Nabers, and why the Giants picked him over Odunze. A lot of Giants fans believed Odunze would be the correct choice because of his size, his contested catch ability, and how that skillset fits into the Giants' current WR room with Darius Slayton, Jalin Hyatt, and Wan'Dale Robinson.
But to me, Nabers is just a much more complete and versatile player. We've seen a lot of LSU receivers over the last decade, and people love to compare them to Odell, but Nabers is legitimately the closest I've seen to Odell's burst and explosiveness. He gets from 0-60 almost instantly, he's a great threat after the catch. The Giants have had an explosive pass play problem over the last few years, and Nabers gives them a huge threat in that way with his ability to turn any play into a an explosive play whether it's his ability to separate deep or taking a quick throw and turning into a big gain after the catch.
He attacks all three levels of the defense effectively, and he is a natural separator. That will be extremely important for a team that doesn't feel like they have a consistent QB at this time and will need a "best friend" for any future QB they draft.
Daboll and Schoen have talked publicly about how the ability to separate and to play any position they need, boundary or slot, are keys to their WR evaluation, and those are areas are areas where Nabers excels.
It will not be easy for Nabers to make this offense great, but if you can get a year or two out of him like Drake London and Garrett Wilson have had with their respective QB situations, you can feel really really good about the impact he'll have if/when the Giants solve their QB problem.
2.47: Tyler Nubin, S, Minnesota
The Giants kept up their "BPA" approach with their second round pick of Tyler Nubin. We know they could use a safety to bolster that room, but Nubin was also legitimately one of the best players available at this pick.
Nubin is a very well-rounded player. He's got the size and strength to play in the box, and he has the coverage instincts to be an impact player there. He had great ball production at Minnesota, and a lot of it was thanks to his ability to read the QB's eyes and anticipate throwing windows, break on the ball, and make a play. The Giants also loved him off the field, they view him as a future leader in the locker room, which something this regime values highly.
His athletic traits don't necessarily pop off the screen, but he more than makes up for it with his instincts. And even though he's not really a nickel defender or man-to-man defender, you just wouldn't put him in those positions.
Nubin has a really good shot to start and play as many snaps as he can for the Giants this year. Xavier McKinney played every single snap for the Giants last year, in a variety of different roles, and if Nubin can step into that role and contribute, this pick will be a huge success. But even if he has more rotation with Belton and Pinnock, Nubin will still have a lot of opportunity to make a difference in the Giants' new defensive scheme.
3.70: Andru Phillips, CB, Kentucky
Surprisingly, this has become one of the most contentious picks in the Giants' draft. People (including me) were happy the Giants passed on the QBs for Nabers, as we didn't want the Giants to take a QB they didn't believe in just to "save their jobs" or whatever. But this pick confused a lot of people.
A lot of that had to do with a) the board b) Giants fans' collective PTSD and obsession with the offensive line. And believe me, I am as obsessed with the offensive line as anyone on the planet.
We've already discussed how the Giants OL could still use an infusion of talent, and there was no shortage of OL talent available. Isaiah Adams went with the very next pick, and a few "fan favorites" of various content creators in the Giants' orbit went in the 16 picks after; Coober Beebe went 73, Christian Haynes 81, Zak Zinter 85, Dominick Puni 86.
That said, it still makes a lot of sense that the Giants maybe prioritized CB over the OL. Like I said earlier, the Giants CB room at this point was just the 2023 CB room minus either the best or second best player (depending whether you rate Deonte Banks better or worse) in Adoree' Jackson.
I personally didn't like Phillips as a prospect, and I have my questions about him coming to the Giants in particular. But let's put that aside and focus on the positives in his game first.
Phillips is a physical player who does not hesitate to fire downhill and get involved in the run game, which is something Giants' slot corners have been lacking over the last few years. He brings the same physicality to coverage as well; despite being a little on the small side (part of why he's moving inside), he's not afraid to attack receivers, even if they outweigh him significantly. The functional strength is pretty impressive at his size.
I do think there are some pretty lacking traits here, which contribute to why he went this late at all (though I had him rated much lower). The ball skills are really disappointing to me, he had very little ball production at Kentucky. For me, the difference between his ability in zone far exceeds his ability in man; this can be worked around since Shane Bowen is not the man coverage fiend that Wink Martindale was, but is still a problem.
What I'm really interested to see is how his athleticism translates; I didn't find it that impressive on film, and the 40 and agilities were just fine, while the jumps were really good. I wonder if he'll come to the league as a really talented athlete, or if it'll continue to limit him.
For what it's worth, I really do not trust CB coach Jerome Henderson anymore. The Giants have drafted a CB in the top 110 every year since he's been here, dating back to 2020, and Deonte Banks is by far the best one, maybe the only one who is a starter level NFL player. And all 3 of the other guys (Darnay Holmes, Aaron Robinson who also has been a walking injury, and Cor'Dale Flott) were supposed to be nickel corners.
Phillips will be the day 1 starter in the slot, and it'll be hard for him to avoid criticism even though he's a rookie making a hard transition, since the Giants have struggled so much to develop talent at this position recently.
4.107: Theo Johnson, TE, Penn State
With Darren Waller's status in limbo, the Giants decide to get aggressive and deepen their TE room.
It feels like every year there are a couple of guys like Theo Johnson: The size and athleticism are off the charts, great testing numbers, but somehow a complete dearth of production. Johnson turned 23 in February, spent 4 seasons at Penn State, but amassed a total of 77 catches, 938 yards, and 12 TDs in his collegiate career, with highes of 34 catches, 341 yards, and 7 TDs in 2023.
It's honestly a little reminiscent of the Giants selecting Daniel Bellinger in the 2022 draft, another guy who tested really well but had similar or worse production than Johnson in every category.
I'm of the opinion that if Johnson was more productive over his collegiate career, he would have gone earlier. He's got great size, he's a good athlete, he's an active and willing blocker with high end flashes in that department. The one major thing that's lacking is that evidence of being an impact player in the passing game. He's not really a threat after the catch, and the film doesn't always back up the testing in terms of separating and being explosive through routes.
If Waller does return to the Giants for 2024, then Johnson gets to be one of the best TE3s in the NFL and really work on his craft, getting ready to compete for the starting gig once Waller presumably retires after the 2024 season. But if Waller retires, as the Giants are currently expecting, then Johnson will be a solid TE2 working with Daniel Bellinger while trying to develop into something a bit more.
5.166: Tyrone Tracy, RB, Purdue
The Giants decide to help out their RB committee by adding Tyrone Tracy to the mix.
Tracy has only been playing RB full time for one season, and you can definitely see that. He has a little trouble with processing moving fronts and picking rush lanes, and he still has to learn when to just lower his shoulder and get a few yards, rather than seeking the big play.
What Tracy does provide is a bursty, one-cut type of runner who also provides a significant receiving threat, having played WR before transitioning to RB. He can run routes out of the backfield and make himself available to QBs and has soft hands. His contact balance is pretty solid as well, since he's pretty solidly built. He'll be a good compliment to Singletary.
In addition, Tracy both has kick return experience and has the type of skillset that teams think will be effective with the new kick return rules.
Tracy's easiest path to playing time will be to lean into being a 3rd down back. He has the receiving skills already, and if he can prove he's a reliable pass protector, he'll definitely earn playing time on offense. At worst, we'll see him on special teams this year while he hones his craft and tries to compete for more significant playing time moving forward.
6.183: Darius Muasau, LB, UCLA
The Giants stick with some special teams focus here. Muasau and new Giants STC Michael Ghobrial have history, with Ghobrial being Muasau's ST coordinator in 2019 at Hawai'i.
Muasau has a relentless motor and reads plays really well. He has a really good feel for rushing lanes and how to fill in, and he plays physical, he doesn't shy away and seems to love getting in the mix even against pulling OL.
He's not a super impressive athlete and can be a little too aggressive at times. He also needs to learn some new tricks to evade OL rather than trying to go through them. When it comes to earning snaps on defense, it'll be hard for him to shake a "two-down" label due to his lack of coverage ability.
With Okereke and McFadden pretty much locked in as the starters and Isaiah Simmons as the "sub package" LB, Muasau's roster spot will be mostly based on his ability to earn Ghobrial's trust on special teams. Over the last few years, Carter Coughlin and Cam Brown earned 53 man roster spots the same way, so the avenue for Muasau is pretty clear.
UDFAs:
As usual, I'll highlight the UDFAs and kind of organize them by guarantees. The guarantees are usually the best way to tell who has the best shot at making the roster. Remember that a practice squad salary for the full year is $225k- NDSU OL Jake Kubas ($270k): Kubas is a super experienced player, having played over 2400 snaps at RG at NDSU. He's on the smaller side. He plays pretty balanced, has solid technique, and understands how to position his body. That's how he wins for the most part, since he's not really a freakish athlete and his power profile is pretty underwhelming. He'll be kind of a "stash and develop" type of player who will compete for a bottom of the roster spot with guys like Marcus McKethan, Jimmy Morrissey, and Jalen Mayfield.
- Oregon DL Casey Rogers ($220k): Rogers posted some really impressive testing numbers, but we need to see it transfer to the field more consistently. He might be a better fit for what Shane Bowen likes to do than what Wink Martindale liked to do; Wink prefers stronger two-gapping IDL with knockback power, while Bowen is looking for DL to penetrate upfield and create chaos. As it stands right now, he'd be a liability in the run game, and doesn't really provide you that much in the pass game to justify it. But maybe he can hang out and develop his craft and get his pad level down under one of the best position coaches in the NFL in Andre Patterson.
- Missouri OT Marcellus Johnson ($170k): Johnson is an interesting guy to give a lot of money to. He played at Eastern Michigan for 5 seasons, with almost 2300 snaps played, before transferring to Missouri...to be a backup, playing just 84 snaps in 2023. He's another guy that is pretty lacking in power profile. I'm not really sure I see the avenue to a 53 man roster spot for him, as it'll be tough for him to compete with Kubas and the guys I listed in his section, and if he's playing OT, he has to get through not just Thomas/Neal/Eluemunor, but also Matt Nelson, Yodny Cajuste, and Josh Ezeudu (who has been the 2nd team LT in OTAs I believe).
- UCLA CB Alex Johnson ($115k): Johnson is another player that tested better than I think his film showed; the film made me think maybe he'll be better converting to safety. He mostly played in the slot at UCLA, but struggled a lot in the run game. I was underwhelmed with his ability in coverage. I don't really see it with him, but the Giants CB room is so bad that I guess he does have a shot.
- West Florida WR John Jiles ($100k): Jiles' highlights are insane. He looks like he's playing against middle schoolers at times the way he just leaps over guys and makes highlight reel catches. That's pretty much all it was to me though. He's a stiff mover and wasn't quite as consistently dominant as you'd like to see in my opinion. If I'm looking for a guy to make a couple of sick catches in the preseason and never be heard from again, it's Jiles, but if I'm looking for a guy who can become a player on Sundays, I'm not looking here.
- South Carolina RB Dante Miller: Miller wasn't really a UDFA, because he was signed well before the draft, but I want to mix him in here. South Carolina and the NCAA kind of botched his eligibility, so he barely played in 2022, was not part of the 2023 draft, then was ruled ineligible for the 2023 season and 2024 draft. Had a really sick pro day, and his nickname "Lil Turbo" is very apt. He's just really explosive and fast, that's most of his game. Most of his opportunity to make the team will be to maybe compete as a kick returner.
Final Takeaways
The Giants had a good, solid, like B level draft. I didn't think they got exceptional value at any pick, and I thought they kind of played it safer than they had the last couple of years in the draft. In 2022, the story was really about investing in young, athletic players and trying to develop them. In 2023, they mostly continued that, sticking with their tenants of sticking to younger, more athletic players.This year, they didn't completely shift away from that, but the average age definitely feels like it went up. Malik Nabers is the only player who won't be 23 by Thanksgiving. And while I don't hate any of the Giants' picks, it feels like they were trying to hit singles/doubles after Nabers. None of those players to me feel like swinging for upside, thinking you have a superstar in the making, they feel like players the team thinks will just be good solid pros. I'm not sure how I feel about it, since the swings on upside haven't been the most successful, but I also don't feel like this draft changes the outlook of the team moving forward either. Most importantly, it does feel like a departure from their previous tendencies, so it'll be interesting to see whether it was more conscious and if it works out.
I'm not sure this is a draft we'll be looking back on and thinking about how great an impact it had on the future of the team. But I'm also not sure how likely that was once the trade up for Drake Maye was off the table.
2024.06.07 18:11 saumikn Why St. Louis should not build the Green Line
 | Note: This post was copy-pasted from my blog, but I’ve put the full text (minus images) here so it’s easier to engage with. I wrote this so it's more general about light rail, but this post was directly inspired by the St. Louis North-South Metrolink (i.e. Green Line), since I think it's a really bad use case for light rail and I want to advocate against its construction. Most of the examples I reference in the article come from St. Louis, when possible. submitted by saumikn to StLouis [link] [comments] If you're not interested in the general bus/light rail debate and only care about the relevancy to St. Louis, I essentially want our city to create something like this 100 mile BRT network instead, which will cost about half the price of the 5.6 mile Green Line and be exponentially more useful to all St. Louis residents. IntroductionLight rail (or LRT) is a type of transit which uses street-running, at-grade trains to transport passengers. It’s been seeing a growing surge of interest in American cities over the last few decades, and politicians across the country are proposing light rail as a solution to their cities’ transit challenges. The reason is that light rail is seen as a technology which can improve a city’s transportation network at a fraction of the cost of heavy rail (i.e. subways or elevated rail).However, I strongly feel that we should not be pursuing the construction of new light rail (and the related mode of streetcars) systems in America. The simple reason for this is cost - new light rail lines cost anywhere between $100 million to $200 million per mile to construct. As an example, the proposed 5.6 mile St. Louis Green Line) is projected to cost $1.1 billion. This high price tag isn’t inherently a bad thing. There have been many expensive projects over history which were well worth the cost. The problem with light rail specifically is that we get almost no value back from its construction. For transit riders, there are almost no benefits to a light rail line over a simple bus line, and in a lot of respects, light rail is even worse for riders. And for cities as a whole, light rail does lead to some improvements and increased development, but at a scale which is very out of line with its high cost. Instead of light rail or streetcars, I propose that transit agencies invest heavily in a different mode of transit - “Light BRT”. If you haven’t heard of this term before, it’s because I invented it for the purposes of this article, as there is no single widespread term which characterizes this mode. I’m personally hoping that the phrase Light BRT catches on, as it’s a very convenient nomenclature to describe these existing transit lines and in a way which is easily distinguishable from the more traditional Gold-Standard or Heavy BRT. So what is Light BRT? Essentially, Light BRT is a type of city bus which includes many infrastructure upgrades to increase the speed and reliability of the bus line. While not every light BRT line has all of these features, in general, light BRT lines are characterized by the following:
And the best part? This line was incredibly cheap. The 18 mile D Line cost about $75 million in total to construct, for an average cost of about $4 million per mile. Compared to light rail, which can cost $200 million per mile, light BRT is a steal. Or in other words, for the same cost it would take to build a 5 mile LRT line, we could build over 200 miles of light BRT, leading to a much better transit network for an entire city. As a side note, I want to contrast Light BRT with the more traditional form of BRT (which I’ll denote as “Heavy BRT”) which features very prominently in the transit systems of many international cities like Istanbul, Jakarta, and Bogota. Heavy BRT is also growing in popularity in the US in cities like Albuquerque, Richmond, and Cleveland. It is characterized by a dedicated concrete guideway which separates the bus from car traffic, and often features center running operations. There is a wide range of intensity of BRT operations (hence the need for the BRT Standard rubric). But in general, heavy BRT can cost anywhere between $8 million to $50 million per mile to construct, with the lower end of this spectrum mostly resembling light BRT. In the rest of this post, I hope to make a convincing argument on why we should stop building new light rail and streetcar lines, and instead transition to prioritizing light BRT. First, I will give a brief overview on the various forms of transit so that we have a common set of definitions to work off of. Next, I will provide an objective set of differences between light rail and light BRT, going over the benefits and drawbacks of each mode for both transit riders and non-riders. Finally, I will give my personal opinions on each of these differences, and why I believe that we should not pursue light rail in America. In many of the examples and discussions, I will specifically reference the example of the proposed St. Louis Green Line LRT, since it’s one I’m more familiar with and I think it’s an example of an egregiously bad light rail line. But my comments are generally applicable to any new light rail or streetcar line in the US. Overview of Transit ModesIn this section, I’ll give a brief overview of the various types of transit modes which are built with rail and buses.Types of Rail
Types of Buses
Light Rail vs Light BRTNext, I will go over the differences between light rail and light BRT. Because there are a lot of differences, I’m going to organize my thoughts into two sections. First, I will discuss the difference between modes in terms of the experiences that actual riders on the system will encounter. Second, I will discuss the difference between modes for everybody else - how it affects non-riders, government officials, citizens, etc. In both of these sections, I’ll describe what makes LRT better than light BRT, and vice versa, and I will do my best to make these sections as objective as possible.Before I begin, I would like to acknowledge that many of these thoughts come from my reading on transit modes and systems around the country. In particular, Jarrett Walker’s post on Rail-Bus Differences was a very useful starting point for this post. Also, I'd like to acknowledge the discussions I’ve had with other transit enthusiasts for pointing out things I've missed (shout-out St. Louis Urbanists!) Differences for Transit RidersHow Light Rail is better than Light BRT
How Light Rail is equal to Light BRT
How Light Rail is worse than Light BRT
Differences for non-Transit RidersHow Light Rail is better than Light BRT
How Light Rail is worse than Light BRT
ConclusionFinally, I will conclude this article with some of my opinions on the facts described above, going over each of the major differences between Light Rail and Light BRT.Why LRT is not better than Light BRTThe biggest factor in favor of LRT, capacity, is not a relevant distinction for essentially any new project, as light BRT has enough capacity to operate most LRT routes. For example, the proposed Green Line LRT in St. Louis has a projected daily ridership of 5k. A hypothetical light BRT could carry nearly 9k passengers every hour, well above the needed capacity. I actually couldn’t find a single example of a light rail system in the entire United States which needs the capacity of light rail and couldn’t get by with buses. If somebody has a counterexample in the comments, I’d love to see it.One thing to note is that the ongoing driver shortage might change this math. For example, one could imagine a corridor where an LRT with 15-minute frequency has enough capacity but a bus with 15-minute frequency doesn’t. My two comments about this is that (1) If the driver shortage is such a big deal that it’s limiting frequency, that should definitely be the priority for where to spend money, and (2) If you’re only running 15-minute headways, then this is not exactly a corridor that needs significant transit investment in the first place. Another note is that buses generally have enough capacity for day to day operations, but occasional large events like sports games or concerts might overrun this capacity. I would suggest in these cases to run special express buses on these days to transport passengers, rather than overbuilding rail capacity for most of the year. I ride my bike and take it onto transit often, so I understand the appeal of bringing your bike on board to a light rail. But in reality, if our goal is to help urban cyclists, we would be much better off actually building protected bike lanes for a fraction of the cost of light rail. Alternatively, if St. Louis had an effective bus network, I wouldn’t even need to take my bike onto trains; I could just use the bus system to make connections! Every other factor for transit riders actually favors light BRT over light rail. The smoothness of trains is nice, and makes it easier to read or work or relax while on it. But if I had to decide between a smooth LRT with 15-minute frequency and a less smooth light BRT with 8-minute frequency, I would definitely prefer the light BRT. And then when you consider that LRT usually leads to additional transfers for riders (usually to buses anyways), this only makes light BRT more attractive. In terms of non-transit factors, I agree that rail leads to more development than buses. But if development is really our goal, we have much more effective and targeted methods for actually inducing development. For example, we could subsidize private development through upzoning and tax abatements or even take the money to build public development directly. The factor of permanence is easily overcome - you could simply take the $200 million per mile which would have been used to construct the LRT and put it in a trust which can legally only be spent on transit operations in this corridor. The consideration of maintenance and efficiency also goes away based on LRT cost, as the interest alone from saved construction costs could be used to pay for maintenance and green energy technology many times over. What should we do instead of Light Rail?I’ve spent this entire post talking about reasons we shouldn’t build light rail. So what should we do instead? The short answer: it depends entirely on your priorities and why you even want to build light rail in the first place. If you’re going to spend $1.1 billion on a light rail line (as St. Louis has proposed to do), here are some things you could do with it instead:Transit: If your priority is to help transit riders, you would be much better off by building Light BRT instead, for 1/40th of the cost. (i.e. for every mile of LRT you build, you could afford to build 40 miles of Light BRT). The above image is an quick example of what a potential 100 mile Light BRT system could look like in St. Louis. It would cost $400 million to build, instead of the $1 billion, 5 mile Green Line. You could then take the remaining $600 million to place in a trust fund for guaranteeing high frequency service along all these routes for years to come. If you consider federal matching as part of your calculation, it’s roughly the case that the FTA will cover 80% of the cost of new light rail projects, and 50% of the cost of bus projects. For St. Louis specifically, both the 5.6 mile Green Line and my proposed 100 mile light BRT network would both cost $200 million in local funding, with the federal government picking up the rest of the costs. I would definitely argue that the 100 mile BRT network provides a much higher value for $200 million than the 5 mile train line. Long-Term Savings: If your goal is to reduce long term costs on street maintenance with LRT, you could instead take the $1 billion and put it in a fund to gain interest. The $40M you would get every year would be enough to quintuple current city street maintenance (we currently spend about $9M every year across the entire city). Environmental Impact: I don’t have any numbers to back this up, but I imagine that the difference in emissions between an electric LRV and electric bus is not that high to begin with. On the other hand, you could just take the $1 billion and give a free 3kW solar system to every single household in the city, which would save many orders of magnitude more emissions. Development: If your priority is to spur development, you should just take the $1 billion and use it to directly incentivize new construction. This could be done with tax abatements, paid-for without hurting school budgets. A very back-of-the-napkin estimate is that if $10 million is enough to cover this abatement, then $1.1 billion would be enough to pay for almost $16 billion in new development projects, 32,000 new housing units and 165,000 sqft of commercial space. For some context, in the last 10 years (2014-2023), St. Louis gained only gained 7,034 new housing units total. I haven’t seen any direct numbers as to how much development is expected from the Green Line, but I would expect this amount is far less than $16 billion, considering the state of the literature on LRT development referenced above. As a specific example, the Wellston station in St. Louis has been open for more than 20 years and still borders a huge undeveloped plot of grass. Bus Network Externalities: Some may object to my previous two recommendations of using the money to build solar panels and create tax abatements, rather than building transit, since funding sources are often not transferable like this, and rail funding might only be usable for transit projects. In these cases, I would still suggest building a large 100 mile light BRT transit network instead of a 5 mile light rail line. While I don’t have numbers to support this, I would strongly expect that this 100 mile network would lead to more emission reductions and more economic development than the 5 mile LRT line. TakeawayIn my opinion, when you consider all of the differences, there is really no reason why we should be building Light Rail or Streetcars anywhere in America. For transit riders, light BRT provides an arguably more useful service than LRT, at a fraction of the cost. For non transit-riders, LRT does have some positive effects, but in an incredibly cost-inefficient manner.I’m sure this post has some very controversial opinions. If you disagree with me, and think I’m missing some broader point about LRT, feel free to let me know in the comments. I’m especially interested in actual case studies where the capacity of LRT was necessary over light BRT, or where LRT demonstrably led to increased development. |